Professional Documents
Culture Documents
20016 (FORMERLY PT 88) SEKSYEN 63, JALAN RAJA CHULAN, KUALA LUMPUR
FOR MESSRS ARMANI HARTAJAYA SDN BHD
Page 1 of 1
PROPOSED PAVILION SQUARE KUALA LUMPUR
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION
SECTION 01016
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION
INDEX TO SPECIFICATION
CLAUSE PAGE
This specification section is the copyright of DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. No reproduction either in part or
in whole in any manner whoever is allowed without written permission from DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd.
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.2 This technical specification shall form part of the Contract and the Contractor shall allow
for all obligations, requirements, considerations, etc. to comply with the specification.
The Contractor is also deemed to have visited the site and fully acquainted himself as to
the nature and practicability of the works. No claims will be entertained as a result of
his failure to do all of the above.
1.3 The Consulting Civil and Structural Engineers is DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. The
Contractor is to note that when the term ‘Engineer’ in the following Specification means
the representative of the Consulting Engineers.
1.4 The Contractor is to note that when the term Engineer is referred to in the following
specification, such term shall be deemed to mean The Architect or Superintending
Officer’s Representative (S. O. Rep.) as defined in the Articles of Agreement or any
other person designated in writing by the Architect or the Superintending Officer (S.O.)
from time to time to exercise the power of the Architect or S.O..
1.5 When referred to, the term “Main Contractor” shall deemed to mean the contractor
appointed under this Contract.
1.6 The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Uniform
Building By-Laws of Malaysia, the Malaysian Standards and Codes of Practices,
Malaysian Standards Eurocodes current at the date of tender and to the satisfaction of
the local Building Authorities empowered to control the Works, the Specifications and
drawings supplied to the Contractor and any other instructions issued by the
Engineer/Architect or their representative from time to time.
1.7 The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications,
such term shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context
otherwise requires.
1.8 Any reference in the Specifications to a Malaysian Standard (MS), Eurocodes (EC) or
Code of Practice (CP) shall imply the latest version at the time of tender of the
applicable Standards or Code of Practices. Should there be any discrepancy between
these Specifications and the MS, EC or CP, the more onerous requirement/s shall be
adopted. The Engineer has the sole discretion to modify or upgrade the specifications,
drawings and documents to comply fully with MS Eurocode requirements at no
additional cost and time to the Contract.
1.9 The Contract Works shall be programmed strictly in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract and Architect’s Instructions; no claims shall be entertained for
compliance with the programming restrictions so imposed.
1.10 The Contractor is to fully comply with all the safety requirements of the latest
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) and Department of Occupational and
Health and Safety (DOHS) regulations; and all other relevant local By-Laws and
regulations.
1.11 The working times are to conform to the Authorities' requirements and the Contractor
shall be responsible for obtaining permission to work beyond these times, if necessary,
to complete the Works as set out in the agreed programme.
1.12 The Contractor shall also comply with Authorities' requirements regarding the removal
and discharge of any spoil, debris or other materials.
1.13 The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting all method statements, working
sequence, detailed drawings and instrumentation results to the various authorities and
the Engineer for all necessary approvals. The Contractor shall be responsible for
liaison, complying with all the requirements and obtaining all approvals from the relevant
authorities to enable him to commence and complete the contract works, especially the
foundation and excavation works.
1.14 Procedurally, the Contractor shall be required to make his submissions to the
Architect/Engineer for their approval before making submissions to the Government
authorities. The Contractor shall make all modifications in his submissions as required
by the Architect/Engineer before submitting to the relevant authorities.
1.15 It is highlighted that the specifications frequently stipulate the requirement for the
Contractor to submit method statements, shop drawings, calculations, etc for Engineer’s
Review and Approach. The Contractor is explicitly advised that Engineer’s approval
does not absolve the Contractor of his sole responsibility that the methods, materials
and workmanship employed are safe and suitable and the contract works are
completed safely, within the contracted time and in full compliance of the specification
and intended use. All technical submissions made shall be prepared and certified by the
Contractor’s Professional Engineer.
1.16 The Contractor shall be responsible for accurately setting out the Works to the specified
positions, dimensions, levels, and building lines and also checking the site survey for
dimensional and level accuracy and reporting any discrepancies before any Work
commences. Any errors in position, level, dimension or alignment of any part of the
Works at any time shall be rectified by the Contractor at his own expense. The
Contractor shall provide the Engineer with all facilities, equipment and labour to enable
him to check the setting out and levels of the Works at all times. The checking of any
setting out point, line or level by the Engineer shall not in any way relieve the Contractor
of his responsibility. All setting out points, benchmarks, site rails, pegs and other survey
points shall be clearly marked and protected from damage or disturbance during the
execution of the Works.
1.18 The quality of the Works throughout and of workmanship generally is to be to the entire
satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.19 These Specifications shall equally apply to additional work where variations have been
authorised by the Engineer under the terms and conditions of the Contract.
1.20 Descriptions and compositions of materials and workmanship throughout are, unless
otherwise noted, applicable to all trades. Items referred to in one trade are deemed to
refer to any other trades where applicable.
1.21 All materials and workmanship are to comply with the latest relevant Malaysian or
Eurocode Specification and/or Code of Practice where applicable which are hereinafter
abbreviated as MS, EC and CP respectively. The Contractor is deemed to be
conversant with the relevant MS, EC and CP referred to and shall allow for complying
therewith.
1.22 Materials complying with foreign standards may be accepted, subject to the Engineer's
approval, if unobtainable to the Standards specified.
writing from the Engineer. Where materials are substituted at the Contractor's own
request, there shall be no admissible increase in price.
1.24 Where proprietary materials are specified, these are to be used and/or fixed strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and/or printed instructions.
1.25 All materials shall be new and approved by the Engineer before use in the Work.
1.26 All materials which do not comply with this Contract shall be removed from the Site at
the Contractor's own expense.
1.27 If, during the course of the Contract, certain materials required for use in the Works
should be unobtainable despite best efforts of the Contractor, then the Contractor may
offer for the approval of the Engineer substitute materials.
1.28 The substitute materials, although not complying fully with the Specifications, must
nevertheless be suitable and appropriate for use in the Works. Acceptance or refusal of
such substitute materials shall be at the sole discretion of the Engineer.
1.29 In the event of acceptance of the substitute materials, a suitable price reduction shall be
made in respect of decreases in quality or value but no price addition shall be made in
respect of increase in quality or value. In the event of refusal of the substitute materials,
the Contractor shall not be relieved of any of his obligations under the Contract.
1.30 Any defective work, materials and also deviations from the working details in respect of
setting out, correct lines and levels, verticality, sizes, thickness of members and/or any
other dimensional variation of any kind whatsoever, shall be removed and reconstructed
or otherwise rectified to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall be
responsible for all additional cost and time incurred. All such remedial works shall be
executed without undue delay.
2.1 The scope of Works includes but not limited to the following:
2.2 The Contractor shall be deemed to have included all other temporary and incidental
works necessary for the satisfactory completion of the contract works for the intended
use, even if not specifically shown in the contract documents. The Contractor shall be
fully responsible for the design and documentation of these temporary works and shall
provide certification by his PE. All temporary works shall be removed at the Contractor’s
expense. Where required, such temporary works shall be submitted to the Authorities
by the Contractor’s PE and the relevant approvals be obtained prior to commencement
on site.
2.3 The Contractor shall carry out an environment impact assessment and to minimize
noise, vibration, pollution and other environmental effects on the surroundings arising
from the proposed works. Notwithstanding the assessment, the maximum noise
permitted on site shall conform to the latest regulations or guidelines by the relevant
authorities having jurisdiction.
2.4 The Contractor shall make allowance in his tender for compliance with all the
specifications and other requirements necessary for proper execution and completion of
the works to the Engineer's satisfaction. The work shall be carried out on the basis of
site and ground as found.
2.5 The Contractor is solely responsible for investigating and ensuring the actual extent and
nature of the Works comprised in this Contract prior to submission of his tender. Any
doubts as to the actual extent or nature of Works shall be clarified with the
Architect/Engineer prior to the tender submission. The Contractor is advised that no
claims arising from lack of clarity or availability of information. Allowance for all and any
contingencies on account of this provision is deemed to be included in the tender.
2.6 The contractor is responsible to carry out a Building Damage Assessment on the effects
of ground movement to the neighbouring properties due to the works, for the purpose of
establishing suitable values for ‘Alert’ and “Work Suspension’ levels for monitoring. The
proposed values are indicated in the contract drawings. Also, take into account of site
access, space occupation, safety and safeguarding of adjoining properties and each
other’s works. Submit to Engineer with endorsement from a PE.
2.7 The Contractor is solely responsible for investigating and ensuring the actual extent and
nature of the Works comprised in this Contract prior to submission of his tender. Any
doubts as to the actual extent or nature of Works shall be clarified with the Engineer
prior to the tender submission. The Contractor is advised that no claim arising from lack
of clarity or availability of information shall be entertained by the Engineer. Allowance
for all and any contingencies on account of this provision is deemed to be included in
the tender.
3.1 The Contractor shall satisfy himself where relevant regarding subsoil conditions, the
underground water table, potential obstructions and the presence of varying conditions
below the Site.
3.2 The soil information, where available and included in this Contract, is for the reference
of the Contractor only. Neither the Consultants nor the Client accept responsibility for its
accuracy or implications, if actual soil conditions are found to be different during
progress of Works.
3.3 The tender shall be based on the condition of ground as found and no extras shall be
allowed for dealing with more difficult soil conditions than envisaged by the Contractor
at the time of tendering.
3.4 The Contractor may, at his own cost, conduct additional soil tests at his own cost and
time.
4.1 Where relevant the Contractor shall satisfy himself regarding project site conditions, the
existing footing and sub-structures, obstructions and the presence of varying existing
structures below the ground.
4.2 The survey drawing and as-built drawings included in this Contract is for the reference
of the Contractor only. Neither the Consultants nor the Client accept responsibility for its
accuracy or implications, if actual site conditions are found to be different during
progress of Works.
4.3 The Contractor shall expose and carry out survey by a licensed surveyor the location of
the existing piles, if used in the existing structures, on the site. All existing piles shall be
cut and de-bonded from his proposed new foundation system. The contractor shall
submit the method statement of piles cutting and de-bonding to the Engineer’s
approval. All costs and time associated with the works shall be deemed to be included
within the contract, price and time.
4.4 The method of demolition, where required, shall be proposed by the Contractor at the
time of his tender submission and shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
4.5 The Contractor shall provide adequate numbers instruments as stipulated in the
Section 01018 Instrumentation and monitoring.
4.6 Where relevant, the contractor is to maintain a Tree Protection Zone (TPZ) of 6.0m
radius measured from the centre of the tree and shall comply with the following
conditions within the TPZ:
4.7 In the event that there are existing utility services such as pipes, cables etc. within the
said land, the contractor may be required to divert or protect such existing utility
services and the cost of diversion repair or protection (if any) shall be borne by the
contractor and shall be paid forthwith on demand to the Public Utilities Board or other
relevant Competent Authorities, agencies, bodies or corporations having the authority
over or being in charge of the matter. The Contractor shall carry out of underground
services detection works prior to the commencement of demolition works. The
Contractor shall arrange with the relevant Authorities to disconnect, terminate, capping
off or diversion of all utility services. The Contractor shall ensure such termination or
diversion will not cause any damage or disruption to the public services or the services
in the neighbouring properties.
4.8 Where the contract works or access to the site requires diversion of existing traffic, the
contractor shall prepare, co-ordinate and seek approval of his diversion plans from the
relevant authorities. All costs and time associated with implementing the traffic diversion
including the preparation of plans and seeking authorities’ approval shall be deemed to
be included within the contract, price and time.
4.9 The Contractor shall determine, probe and/or investigate the position of all existing
services within the Site and shall take all precautions to protect and prevent damage to
them. All damage caused to the active services shall be reinstated by the Contractor at
his own cost and time.
4.10 All the known underground services have either been shown in the Contract
Documents. Any other unknown services, which are found within the work areas shall
be either diverted or protected by the Contractor. The Contractor shall not be entitled to
any additional cost or time on account of unforeseen services found within the Contract
boundaries, which may affect the Contract Work.
4.11 If any obstructions such as existing fences, structures, footings, boulders, concrete
blocks, pipes, drains, driveways or ramp are encountered during excavation, submit
proposals for their removal for the Architect’s acceptance.
4.12 All debris, waste and construction remnants are to removed off site before the handing
over of the site, by the Contractor at his own cost and time.
4.13 The Works are required to be carried out in close proximity to other existing structures,
services, adjacent existing buildings, sewer lines, drains, hoardings, signboards,
canopies, etc, which are to be adequately protected. The Contractor shall also ensure
these structures are monitored through this works and that there are no adverse effects
to these existing properties arising from his works. Ground movements resulting from
the excavations, borings, trenching and ground improvement works, if any, may cause
damage to these existing properties and services. The Contractor is therefore required
to carefully plan, design and implement all necessary temporary works and precautions
to prevent damage to these services. Contractor’s proposals in this respect, including
calculations and method statements, shall be submitted to the Engineer and the
relevant Authorities through the Contractor’s PE. All modifications and/or enhancements
to the Contractor’s proposal as required by the Engineer shall be implemented.
Implementing the Engineer’s requirements shall not relieve the Contractor of his sole
responsibility for the adequacy of his proposals and maintaining the stability of the
existing structures, including periodic inspections, any protective measures, and
assessments/reports by his PE. The Contractor is deemed to have allowed for all these
in his offer and no extra cost or time to the Contract shall be allowed on this account.
4.14 The Contractor shall carry out Pre- and Post- Construction photographic survey of all
existing structures and services as stipulated in SECTION 01017 CONDITION
SURVEY AND MONITORING as well as Pre- and Post- Construction CCTV of existing
sewer lines affected by the Works. The Works shall only commence after all Pre-
construction surveys have been completed and submit to the relevant Authorities and
Owners of the property/service.
4.15 The Contractor is explicitly advised that there is an existing temporary site entrance on
site. He shall take over the existing facility and regularise with the relevant Authorities
on all necessary submissions and approvals for the use of this site entrance. The
Contractor shall also note there are construction remnants within the site. He shall be
responsible to dispose off these items upon gaining possession of the Site. There shall
be no additional time and cost.
5.0 PROGRAMME
5.1 The Contractor shall with his tender, submit a detailed programme showing the
sequence and manner in which the superstructures and other temporary works are to
be executed. The actual construction would be carried out in a sequence and to a
programme agreed with the Engineer. Where a sequence is specified in the contract,
this shall be adhered to.
5.2 Where approval from authorities is required, such provisions shall be obtained and all
sequence and other requirements imposed shall be complied with at no extra cost or
time to the contract.
6.1 The minimum number of instruments to be installed and monitored are indicated in the
drawings.
6.2 The contractor shall be solely responsible all instrumentation installation, monitoring and
reporting requirements required under the contract and/or imposed by the
Engineer/Authorities at any time during the contract, and shall submit the necessary
reports to the Engineer/Authorities as required from time to time.
6.3 The contractor shall responsible to coordinate with the instrumentation specialist for the
installation, monitoring, protection to the instruments and reporting requirements
required under the contract and/or imposed by the Engineer/Authorities at any time
during the contract, and shall provide full barricade and protection to the instrument
from disturb or damage from construction activities. Any defective work including
disturbance and damage to the instruments as the results of construction activities, shall
be reinstalled and replaced or otherwise rectified to the approval of the Engineer. The
Contractor shall be responsible for all additional cost and time incurred. All such
remedial works shall be executed without undue delay.
6.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for continuously monitoring the instrumentation
readings and effect necessary remedial works immediately, as soon as the ground
movements exceed the acceptable limits and/or pose safety risks to the contract works
and/or the existing structures and services. All such measures that may need to be
implemented shall be deemed to be included in the contract price and time.
6.5 The contractor shall be responsible for the continuously monitoring of the
instrumentation as stipulated in SECTION 01018 INSTRUMENTATION AND
MONITORING and/or additional as imposed by the Engineer/Authorities and taken
precaution measure immediately, as soon as it exceeds the acceptable limits. All such
measures that may need to be implemented shall be deemed to be included in the
contract price and time.
6.6 The Contractor shall install and monitor additional instruments, if he deem necessary for
the execution of his works. There shall be no time and cost for the installation and
monitoring of the additional instruments.
6.7 The responsibility to monitor the adjacent buildings, structures, underground services,
etc, throughout the Works lies solely with the Contractor. The Contractor shall ensure
there are no adverse effects arising from his Works.
7.1 The structures are designed to support superimposed loads as indicated on the floor
plans. In the event the Contractor requires certain part of the structure to be used as
work area which may be required to support floor construction and/or heavier loading,
the Contractor shall designate such areas at the time of tender for Engineer’s approval.
The strengthening of the designated areas shall be undertaken based on the Engineer’s
design at the Contractor’s expense and time, including the redesign cost.
7.2 Any temporary openings required through the structures to facilitate the Contract Works
shall similarly be subject to Engineer’s approval and such modifications shall be
implemented at the Contractor’s expense and time.
8.1 The stability of any slope or temporary earth retaining structures before and after
excavation works shall be proposed and checked by the Contractor’s PE. He shall also
propose and check the backfilling/cutting of soil profile after excavation works, certifying
as safe and stable slope or temporary earth retaining structures. Slope stability or
temporary earth retaining structures calculation shall be provided by contractor's PE for
the Engineer’s approval. The contractor's PE shall submit his design for authorities’
approval, where necessary.
8.2 Any excavation, temporary works, site access and working platform required for the
safe execution of excavation works shall be submitted for the Engineer and relevant
authority approval. All scope related to such as any necessary design, submission and
supervision shall be deemed to be included in the tender sum.
8.3 Contractor PE shall encompass both the structural and geotechnical requirements in
accordance to the Building By-Lawss and the relevant authority jurisdiction.
8.4 All incidental / temporary works required for excavation work are deemed included in
the Contractor’s Tender Offer. The Contractor's PE shall provide all necessary design
calculation and checks, supervision and submissions to authorities for approval as and
when required.
8.5 Water ponding shall not be permitted at all times. All surface runoff shall be effectively
discharged into site drain and appropriate earth or silt control facilities and be treated
before discharging into public drains.
8.6 A notional scheme for the basement construction is indicated in the tender documents.
The Contractor shall be required to carry out an independent assessment and review of
the proposed excavation sequence and construction methodology to fully satisfy himself
that the notional scheme is adequate to accommodate his works, and include in his
tender any design modifications and additional provisions as he deems required. The
Contractor shall be fully responsible to develop the full details of the Earth
Retaining/Stabilising Structures (ERSS) for the whole development in conjunction with
his detailed work method, including but not limited to all localised excavation beyond
Basement formation level, lift pit or pile cap construction, sump/drain construction, etc.
The Contractor shall appoint a Professional Engineer to design and supervise the full
aspects of the ERSS works in tandem with his proposed work method.
8.7 The ERSS proposal shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer, Accredited
Checker and all other relevant Authorities. All requirements imposed by the Engineer,
Accredited Checker and Authorities during the contract shall be implemented by the
Contractor at no extra cost or time. Compliance with the Engineer’s requirements shall
not absolve the Contractor of his sole responsibility to carry out the excavation and
complete the construction of substructure without exceeding the ground movement and
stress change requirements specified in the contract and without causing any damage
to existing properties and services.
8.8 The Contractor is required to prepare and submit the method statements, risk analysis
and assessment reports and detailed shop drawings for excavation works to the
Engineer and any other relevant Authority for approval, before any excavation works
can commence on site. There shall be no additional time or cost implication to the
contract as a result of any delay due to obtaining approvals from the Authorities and/or
the Engineer.
8.9 The Contractor shall propose his detailed sequence of excavation and construction
methodology, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
8.10 The Contractor shall be fully responsible to install and supervise the temporary works
that are required to support the earth retaining system, during excavation and
construction of the basement. The Contractor shall satisfy himself fully that the
basement wall/ secant pile wall design is adequate to accommodate his proposed
excavation sequence and construction methodology. Any strengthening to the wall,
ground improvement and additional structures required to execute the works shall be
deemed included in the contract price. There shall be no additional cost or time
implication to the Contract as a result of any such strengthening to the earth retention
system to suit the Contractor’s work method.
8.11 The Contractor shall, at the time of tender, submit details of his proposed temporary
works and construction sequences including his calculations for estimated ground
movements at various stages of the Contract Works to satisfy the Engineer that the
Contractor’s proposed Earth Retaining/Stabilising Structures have duly considered the
site constraints and all authorities’ requirements.
9.1 In the case that Permit to Commence Work or any related permit is necessary, the
Contractor shall be responsible to satisfy all the requirements, liaise with the Engineer
and submit the application for Permit to Commence Work to the relevant Authority
within one week from the date of award of the Contract. Any delays caused by the
authorities in granting all necessary permits shall not entitle the Contractor to any
additional cost or time. The contractor is advice to provide the followings:
9.2 The Contractor is advised that, notwithstanding the contractual commencement date of
the Contract Works, the actual Works can only commence after the necessary Permit to
Commence Work has been granted.
10.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for all liaisons, preparing and making the required
submissions and follow up meetings with relevant authorities to obtain the necessary
approvals to execute with the contract works – both temporary and permanent. Any
delays caused by the authorities not issuing the necessary approvals shall not entitle
the Contractor to any additional cost or time.
10.3 For demolition, piling and excavation works (if any), the Contractor is required to make
submission by his professional engineer to authorities for approval, for a plan showing
the locations of the vibration monitoring devices before work commences.
11.1 The Contractor shall undertake the design, supply and installation of the following works
(non-exhaustive):
Any elements not shown in the structural plans but required for the completion of
building shall be deemed included in this list.
11.2 The layout and design intent of these structures are shown in the architecture drawings.
Based on the design intent, the Contractor shall engage qualified and competent
personnel and specialists including a Professional Engineer (Civil) (PE), to carry out the
design. according to the tender documents and tender drawings provided.
11.3 The design shall include but not limited to the design of the structural elements and
foundation and the interfacing with other structures. The design shall be carried out in
accordance and compliance with all relevant codes and authorities’ requirements. All
designs shall be in compliance with the Specifications and other documents as
specified.
11.4 The Contractor’s design shall be subjected to the approval of the Engineer and the
relevant authorities. Approval by the Engineer of the Contractors tender proposals or of
any subsequent revision thereof by the Contractor shall in no way relieve the Contractor
of his entire responsibility for the adequacy and practicality of his proposals. The cost of
all necessary remedial works, be it temporary or permanent ordered by the Engineer, as
a result of any inadequacy discovered at any time (i) in the Contractors tender proposal
or (ii) in the revised proposals, or (iii) due to the Contractors failure or inability to provide
and complete the Works shall be the entire responsibility of the Contractor and shall be
borne by him irrespective of whether such remedial work is performed by the Contractor
himself or by some party authorized by the Engineer. The cost of all necessary remedial
works not done by the Contractor shall be ascertained by the Engineer and deducted
from amounts due to the Contractor or shall be recoverable from him as a liquidated
demand in money.
11.5 The Engineer reserves the right to direct the Contractor's PE to amend the design
calculations, design parameters and assumptions made. Should, in the opinion of the
Engineer, the design be inadequate or in contravention of design codes or regulations,
the Contractor's PE shall re‐analyse and re‐submit for the acceptance of the Engineer
and the approval of the relevant Authority or other relevant statutory boards or
government ministries. The acceptance by the Engineer of the Contractor's PE design
shall not, however, absolve the Contractor and his specialists/PE of their responsibilities
and obligations with regard to the entire design.
11.6 All designs shall be carried out according to the specified Standards and Codes of
Practice and shall comply with all Building and Safety Regulations including the latest
Building By-Lawss and relevant Authorities regulations. The Contractor shall be liable
for any defects/ damages arising out of non‐conformity and all necessary remedial
works shall be carried out at the Contractor's own cost and time.
11.7 All designs and drawings shall be fully endorsed by a registered Professional Engineer
(PE), who has in force a valid practicing certificate issued by the competent authority or
relevant agency having jurisdiction.
11.8 The Contractor shall be responsible to make relevant submissions to the authorities for
approval. and secure all relevant authority approvals for the works to proceed on site.
There shall be no additional time and cost arising from the compliance to Authority
comments or the late approval from the authorities.
11.9 All design calculations and drawings submitted by the Contractor's PE shall form part of
the Contract only when such calculations and drawings are accepted by the Engineer
and approved by the Authority. All design calculations and drawings submitted by the
Contractor's PE shall be submitted to the Engineer at the Contractor's expense.
12.1 The Contractor shall carry out a verticality and level survey of each completed floor and
shall submit these records to the Engineer progressively at no more than one month
interval. The verticality of all the vertical elements shall be monitored and recorded after
completion of each floor. Any deviation from plumb beyond specified tolerances shall be
rectified immediately.
12.2 The Contractor is required to submit the locations of the permanent markers and 3-D
prisms (at least 4 sets each instrument each) at ground floor level, and at higher
relevant floor levels for weekly monitoring (with factual and interpretive report) the
building movement (vertically and laterally) during construction stage from the
commencement of the works to 6 months after completion of the whole superstructures.
12.3 The Contractor shall continuously monitor the floor levels as completed for all blocks
and any settlement arising from the foundation settlement and/or shrinkage/creep
shortening of the vertical element where relevant. These readings shall be taken after
completion of each two floors. Permanent markers will be installed around the perimeter
of each building facade. Similarly, permanent markers will also be installed at the 1st
floor level on the central core and its settlement and/or shrinkage/creep shortening
recorded. All these readings shall be taken throughout the construction period, until six
(6) months after completion of the structure and submitted to the Engineer progressively
at no more than one month intervals. The differential settlement/shortening between
the core and perimeter columns shall be tabulated and submitted to the Engineer.
13.1 The Contractor shall progressively carry out an as-built survey of all the structural
elements after completion of each floor and submit to the Engineer no later than a
month from the completion of the floor. The plans shall show the as-built position,
dimensions and levels of all horizontal and vertical elements including their sizes and
final deflections. These plans shall be submitted to the Engineer progressively and a
final set upon completion of the entire structure. The submission shall be effected both
in paper as well as CD-Rom.
13.2 The full pile survey / pile eccentricity plan, shall be submitted within 14 days after the
last pile has been trimmed to the final cut-off level or as directed by the Engineer, with
an endorsement by the Licensed Surveyor.
14.0 TOLERANCES
14.1 This project requires strict compliance by the Contractor to the tolerances specified in
the various specifications and contract documents forming part of this contract. Any
deviations from the specified tolerances shall be rectified to the Contractor’s expense
and time.
15.1 Defective work shall be all work which, in the opinion of the Engineer, does not fully
comply with this specification or the drawings. The Contractor shall make good or carry
out such additional works at his own expense as may be necessary to make good all
defective work to the Engineer's satisfaction.
16.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all persons on the Works, for the
safety of the public and others.
16.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of excavations and slopes and shall
take all necessary precautions for the safety of personnel in the area of construction
and excavation activities. The Contractor must ensure that no damage is caused to
adjoining properties or construction works adjoining the proposed building and would be
solely responsible for such consequences.
16.3 The Contractor shall comply all current legislation and regulations, all applicable safety
requirements of the DOHS and in particular the OSH Act and any amendments or re-
enactments thereto and other acts and regulations of Malaysia including any
amendments or re-enactments thereto.
16.4 Unless otherwise agreed, the Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fencing,
lighting, guarding and watching of all the Works on the Site until taken over by the
Employer and for the proper provision for a like period of temporary roadways,
footways, guards, fencing and hoardings so far as the same may be necessary for the
accommodation and protection of the owners and occupiers of the adjacent property,
the public and others.
16.5 In addition to enforcement procedures stated in the Acts and Regulations, the Engineer
may require the removal from the Site of any person who, in the opinion of the
Engineer, fails properly to observe safety procedures and that person shall not be again
employed on the Site without the written approval of the Engineer.
16.6 The Contractor shall provide and enforce the wearing of approved safety helmets, and
where necessary, eye goggles, ear protectors and other personal protective equipment
for all personnel. Safety helmets shall be colour-coded.
16.7 All platforms, covers, ladders, stairways and other provisions for access supplied under
the contract as part of the permanent works shall be installed and made available for
use as early as possible during the construction period. In cases where this is
impracticable the Contractor shall provide all necessary temporary access facilities
which shall be constructed, installed and maintained in a safe and secure manner.
16.8 The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s acceptance detailed proposals for fire,
emergency and safety procedures. Copies of approved plans shall be posted at notice
boards and such other places as directed. The language shall be in English, Chinese
and others as may be employed on the Works. The plans shall be maintained, revised
or replaced as necessary.
16.9 Temporary illumination for maintaining safe working conditions shall be in accordance
with the OSHA.
16.10 Notwithstanding the reporting requirements of the Factory and Machinery Act 1970 and
the Insurance Specification, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any
accident or dangerous occurrence associated with this Contract within 24 hours. Verbal
notification shall be carried out within 6 hours.
16.11 The Contractor shall be particularly aware of the requirements of the OSHA Confined
Spaces regulations and OSHA Construction Site regulations. Ventilation and lighting
requirements of the excavation are extremely important. The Contractor shall allow for
all the requirements as stated in the OSH Act with regard to air quality and supply as
well as all other requirements stated therein.
16.12 For basement excavation works, the Contractor shall submit at the time of tender his
proposed methods of ventilation of the basement excavation.
16.13 The Contractor shall allow all the appropriate monitoring devices to measure the various
requirements as stipulated in the relevant regulations. The monitoring devices are to be
of the portable type and recordings shall be taken at least twice daily unless stipulated
otherwise in the regulations. The readings shall be recorded and submitted to the
Resident Engineer / Resident Technical Officer/ Clerk Of Works daily.
17.1 The Contractor shall propose, construct and maintain all necessary temporary roads,
ramps and paths to provide adequate all-weather access to and within the Site and
reinstate the Site and all Works damaged or disturbed during the construction Works
and upon completion of the Contract to the satisfaction of the Architect. The Contractor
shall obtain approval of temporary crossings over existing monsoon drains if required.
17.2 The layout of the proposed roads, ramps and paths must be submitted to the Architect
for his approval prior to the commencement of the Work. The proposed temporary
roads, ramps and paths shall not have gradients or slopes steeper than 1 in 10. The
Architect/Engineer may issue directions to the Contractor regarding the layout and
method of forming temporary roads, ramps and path.
18.1 The Contractor shall be responsible and liable for the preparation of all
Shop/Construction Drawings required for the Works which shall be based on the
Contract Drawings, Working/Construction Drawings, Specifications issued and any
revised drawings issued by the Consultants from time to time during the Contract.
Working/Construction Drawings issued by the Consultants serve to illustrate the design
intent, which are sufficient for the Contractor to produce detailed shop drawings for
construction. All shop drawings shall be subjected to the approval of the Architect.
18.2 In preparing the Shop/ Construction Drawings, the Contractor shall provide all
construction-related design input and undertake construction coordination, inter-facing,
cross-checking, sequencing and construction detailing subject to the absolute approval
of the Architect.
18.4 In preparing the Shop/Construction Drawings, the Contractor shall check the Contract
Drawings, Specifications and other parts of the Contract Documents and advise the
Engineer of any inadequacy, impracticality, unsuitability, discrepancies and/or lack of
integrity of any design or other information in such Drawings, Specifications and other
Contract Documents.
18.5 The Contractor shall note that this section shall also be read in conjunction with the
requirements for the preparation and submission of Shop Drawings/Construction
Drawings as defined in the other sections of the Technical Specifications.
18.6 The Contractor shall note that all reinforcement schedules issued by the Engineer are
for the purpose of illustrating the design and detailing requirements and for the
preparation of Shop Drawings by the Contractor.
18.7 The Contractor shall be responsible to prepare detailed reinforcement Shop Drawings
showing reinforcement plans, elevations and relevant sections for his construction
purpose. The reinforcement Shop Drawings shall include but not be limited to concrete
profiles, rebar arrangement, anchorages, curtailment, lap lengths, splicing, link spacing,
etc.
18.8 All reinforcement Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to
the preparation of reinforcement schedule and fabrication.
18.9 The Contractor shall also comply with Clause 19 below when preparing and submitting
the shop drawings.
19.0 DRAWINGS
19.1 All drawings shall be drawn in a neat, clear and concise manner so that they can be
correctly and expeditiously interpreted.
19.2 The Contractor shall submit a complete list of drawing numbers and titles.
19.3 All levels, system of numbering of floors and grid system shall conform strictly to the
architectural drawings.
19.4 All abbreviations, notations and symbols used shall be dearly stated at the beginning of
the set of drawings, and consistently used throughout the drawings.
19.5 All drawings shall be accurate, detailed in length in millimetres (mm) and drawn to
suitable and legible scales.
19.6 All drawings submitted shall be produced in either A0 or A1 sizes. They shall be neatly
and securely bound together with the title of the project, the name of the Contractor and
the consultant dearly printed on the front cover. They shall be arranged systematically in
the following order: ‐
(a) Site plan, general notes and abbreviations, notations and symbols used, etc.
(b) Index of drawings.
(c) Loading layout plans.
(d) Foundation layout plans.
(e) Layout plans, elevations and sections.
(f) Foundations (including details of piles and pile caps).
(g) Columns and walls (where applicable).
(h) All floor beams and slab etc (where applicable).
(i) Trench, box drain u‐drain details etc.
(j) Miscellaneous details.
19.7 The Contractor shall ensure high standard and completeness of his drawings to
facilitate checking. He shall bear all costs involved in the submissions and any
resubmissions of his drawings to the Architect and the Building Authority.
19.8 If CAD format is used in the preparation of drawings, the Contractor shall use the latest
version of the AutoCAD software.
19.9 On completion of the Works and within two months after the completion, the Contractor
shall submit to the Architect/Engineer a complete set of “as‐built” drawings in three sets
of prints and soft copy in AutoCAD format. All “as‐built” drawings shall be endorsed and
signed by the Professional Engineers.
20.1 The Contractor shall allow 4 weeks for the reviewing and approval of technical
submissions, including but not limited to shop drawings, design proposals, co-ordination
drawings, etc. by the Engineer. The Contractor shall also allow a time frame of 2 weeks
for the Engineer to response to any Request For Information (RFI) raised by the
Contractor during the contract period.
20.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to programme his works taking into consideration
the above time frame required by the Engineer to review/approval technical
submissions or response to RFI. No claim for time extension shall be entertained in the
event should the Contractor fail to incorporate the above into his submission schedule.
20.3 All technical proposals, not limited to method statements and reports, shall be duly
endorsed by a Professional Engineer.
21.1 All alternatives shall be submitted at the time of tender submission with full design and
details, duly prepared and certified by a Professional Engineer.
21.2 Alternatives proposed by the Contractor shall satisfy the same design and performance
criteria as used by Engineer in the basic design, in all regards, including but not limited
to loading, structural, Codes, serviceability and overall structural performance.
Alternatives not complying with these requirements will be disqualified. The Contractors
wishing to propose alternatives must agree the design criteria with the Engineer during
the tendering period.
21.3 Any alternative proposed by the Contractor must be submitted at the time of tender with
full supporting documents. The alternatives shall be subject to the Engineer’s sole
approval. The Contractor shall implement all modifications and enhancements required
by the Engineer at no extra cost or time to the Contract.
21.4 All Contractors must submit the pricing and time schedule for the basic design as
contained in the tender documents, with a separate pricing and schedule for any
proposed alternatives.
21.5 The cost of re-design, checking by the Engineer, Consultants, Accredited Checker and
resubmission to the Authorities shall be borne by the Contractor. If the Contractor has
carried out detailed design and prepared drawings which fully comply with the
Engineer’s design and performance criteria during the tender stage, then the associated
cost will be limited to the cost of checking and re-submission only. The cost shall be
computed based on the following hourly rates:
21.6 The Engineer will carry out sufficient checks of alternative proposals to grant an in-
principle approval prior to award of the Contract.The alternative design proposal shall
not compromise the original design intent specified in the Contract Documents. The
proposed structural system shall not impose additional loadings onto the foundation
system, which is currently under construction.
Hourly Rate
Designation (Desktop Review)
RM
Director 1050.00
Engineer 360.00
21.7 The alternative design proposal shall comply fully to the following design and
performance criteria: -
a) Codes of Practice
b) Loads
21.7.b.1 The design imposed loadings are indicated on the floor plans.
Material Density
Material Density
100mm Brickwall with 20 Plaster each face 3.0 kPa on surface area
200mm Brickwall with 20 Plaster each face 5.0 kPa on surface area
c) Deflection Criteria
21.7.c.2 Vertical deflection of beams & slabs shall not exceed the following: -
The design of the structural works shall take into account such effects as
temperature, creep, shrinkage, sway, settlement and cyclic loading, as
appropriate. The deformation of the structure or any part shall not adversely
affect the building’s efficiency/ appearance and shall be compatible with the
degree of movement acceptable by other elements including but not limited
to finishes, services, partitions, glazing, cladding, etc.
All elements shall be detailed so that they fit together on Site allowing for the
expected deflections, together with the tolerances allowed in the
Specification. Loss of performance, which includes but not limited to effects
such as excessive slope, ponding, cracking, etc shall not be permitted.
Excessive accelerations under lateral loads and excessive vibrations due to
fluctuating loads that may cause discomfort or alarm to occupants shall be
avoided.
The steel content in floor slabs shall comply with the minimum percentage of
reinforcement in the relevant design codes and shall not be in any way
lesser than 10-250 mm c/c in any one direction and layer. Slab in contact
with earth and/or exposed to weather shall be reinforced continuously on
both faces with a minimum reinforcement percentage of 0.175% of the
concrete sectional area in each direction and face.
Swimming pools and water retaining structures shall be designed to limit the
concrete crack width to 0.2 mm at the serviceability state.
e) The tenderer shall submit the following documents for the alternative design
proposal at the time of tender submission:
SECTION 01017
CONDITION SURVEY AND MONITORING
INDEX TO SPECIFICATION
CLAUSE PAGE
This specification section is the copyright of DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. No reproduction either in part or
in whole in any manner whoever is allowed without written permission from DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd.
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the Particular Specification, and all other contract documents.
This technical specification shall form part of the Contract and the Contractor shall allow for all
obligations, requirements, considerations, etc. to comply with the specification. The Contractor is
also deemed to have visited the site and fully acquainted himself as to the nature and
practicability of the works. No claims will be entertained as a result of his failure to do all of the
above.
The Consulting Civil and Structural Engineer is DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. The Contractor is to
note that when the term ‘Engineer’ in the following Specification means the representative of the
Consulting Engineer.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Engineer is referred to in the following specification,
such term shall be deemed to mean The Architect or Superintending Officer’s Representative (S.
O. Rep.) as defined in the Articles of Agreement or any other person designated in writing by the
Architect or the Superintending Officer (S.O.) from time to time to exercise the power of the
Architect or S.O.
The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Uniform Building By-
Laws of Malaysia, the Malaysian Standards and Codes of Practices, Malaysian Standards
Eurocodes current at the date of tender and to the satisfaction of the local Building Authorities
empowered to control the Works, the Specifications and drawings supplied to the Contractor and
any other instructions issued by the Engineer/Architect or their representative from time to time.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
Any reference in the Specifications to a Malaysian Standard (MS), Eurocodes (EC) or Code of
Practice (CP) shall imply the latest version at the time of tender of the applicable Standards or
Code of Practices. Should there be any discrepancy between these Specifications and the MS,
EC or CP, the more onerous requirement/s shall be adopted. The Engineer has the sole
discretion to modify or upgrade the specifications, drawings and documents to comply fully with
MS Eurocode requirements at no additional cost and time to the Contract.
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the requirements for the condition survey and monitoring of
buildings, services and other structures within the area of influence of other
construction works. The survey may be carried out prior to and / or after the execution
of the other construction works.
It applies generally to buildings and structures that could be affected by works such
as:
(a) Demolition
(b) Piling
(c) Earthworks
The requirements for instrumentation for monitoring are given in SECTION 01018
INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING.
Read this section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the following work
sections:
Where the works are done as required by the authorities, comply with all standards
and regulation as directed by the authorities.
Submit and work to a quality control plan as agreed with the Engineer.
▪ Inclinometers
▪ Piezometers
▪ Water Standpipes
▪ Vibration Sensors
▪ Settlement Markers
▪ Load Cells
Take cognisance of and co-ordinate with other contractors on site who may
be carrying out instrumentation and monitoring works to avoid duplication of
installation and readings.
1.5 Definitions
Sections of the report relating to individual owners of the nearby and adjacent
buildings/properties must be distributed to the respective owners prior to commencing
any Works on Site.
Provide adequate record to identify changes that occurred and to allow changes to
methods of the construction works such as to avoid or minimise damage to the
surveyed buildings.
When planning for suitable methods and instrumentation for the survey, take account
on the limits on movements and levels of vibration, refer to SECTION 01018
INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING, as well as in the respective specifications
relevant to the other construction works. Also take account of the frequency of
monitoring as indicated in the respective sections.
Take all necessary actions to ensure compliance with the local authorities having
jurisdiction over noise pollution. In the absence of written requirements from the
competent authorities, the noise level (Maximum allowable equivalent continuous
noise level measured over a period of 5 minutes in dB) at the nearest occupied
building outside the site shall not exceed the following maximum permissible noise
level:
7pm to 10pm
7pm to 10pm
10pm to 7am
10pm to 7am
7pm to 10pm
7am to 7pm
7am to 7pm
7am to 7pm
Types of
affected
buildings
(a) Hospital,
school,
No
home for 75 55 75 55 No Work
Work
the aged,
sick etc
(b) Residential
Buildings
located less
than 150m 90 70 55 90 70
from the
construction
site
(c) Buildings 90 70 90 70 90 70
other than
those in (a)
and (b)
above
Note: Noise levels in dBA (Leq 5mins)
3.1 Instrumentation
3.2 Camera
Use camera capable of producing digital records of the survey unless otherwise
agreed with the Engineer.
Plan to carry out the Works in a manner that the Works do not cause any damage to
the buildings or properties. Submit a workable and reliable working method to the
Engineer for acceptance. If damage is inevitable provide a solution to rectify the
damage to the Engineer for acceptance prior to commencement of any work.
Submit colour photographs, their negatives and *.jpg or *.bmp format files to the
Engineer for record. Comply with size and other requirements as described in the
contract. Where a digital camera is used, submit an electronic copy of the
photographs in either *.jpg or *.bmp format in place of the photograph negatives.
The photographs shall show clearly all required details and shall contain a graduated
scale and colour chart for reference. These shall be taken under natural light
condition and the intensity of light shall be uniform to reflect the natural colour of the
intended objects. Use flashlight only as agreed.
Ensure that all labels and markers are clearly identified within the photograph.
Give at least 48 hours notice of the intention to install any instrument unless otherwise
agreed by the Engineer. Install all instruments and establish initial readings prior to
the construction activity or area of works to which they relate unless otherwise agreed
by the Engineer.
Carry out a visual survey of all structural elements in the adjacent properties for
cracks in excess of 0.1mm. Notify the Engineer if there are signs of structural
damages. Mark the location of cracks thus identified on plans and elevations as
appropriate.
The survey shall include at least the cracks previously identified and agreed in the
report as described in the contract.
Establish the initial (datum) reading of each survey point and submit records to the
Engineer. Protect the datum during monitoring period.
Carry out a plumb survey to establish the verticality of the members where necessary.
Typical details of acceptable installations for ground and building settlement points
are shown in the drawings.
Monitor and record the levels of ground survey and building settlement points
throughout the duration of the Works to the accuracy of 0.5mm.
Review the monitoring records on receipt. Notify the Engineer immediately if the alert
or work suspension levels are reached and agree any action proposed.
4.12 Reinstatement
5.1 Submissions
reinstatement
Submit survey records within 1 week after completion of the survey. Provide each
neighbouring owner a copy of relevant portion of the survey as directed by the
Engineer.
5.3.1 General
Submit final records for each instrument incorporating any comments from
the Engineer within seven days of completion of installation of each
instrument.
(a) Instrument number and location (in eastern and northern co-ordinates
and level).
(b) Names of personnel responsible for installation.
(c) Time and date for commencement and completion of instrument.
(d) Plant and labour used.
(e) Ground conditions encountered (if applicable).
(f) Details of instrument installation (grout, fixings etc).
(g) Instrument readings during installation, calibration and immediately
after installation are completed.
(h) Location of instrument terminals, housings and any leads or cabling.
(i) Details of any splices, numbers of casings or joins.
(j) Details of any breakdowns or delays.
5.3.4.1 Frequency
5.4.1 Frequency
monitoring results twice a week during piling and excavation works, and
weekly throughout the construction activities.
Submit the post-completion survey for the Engineer for record. Follow the same
procedures as for the pre-condition survey unless otherwise required by the Engineer.
SECTION 01018
INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING
INDEX TO SPECIFICATION
CLAUSE PAGE
This specification section is the copyright of DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. No reproduction either in part or
in whole in any manner whoever is allowed without written permission from DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd.
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the Particular Specification, and all other contract documents.
This technical specification shall form part of the Contract and the Contractor shall allow for all
obligations, requirements, considerations, etc. to comply with the specification. The Contractor is
also deemed to have visited the site and fully acquainted himself as to the nature and
practicability of the works. No claims will be entertained as a result of his failure to do all of the
above.
The Consulting Civil and Structural Engineer is DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. The Contractor is to
note that when the term ‘Engineer’ in the following Specification means the representative of the
Consulting Engineer.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Engineer is referred to in the following specification,
such term shall be deemed to mean The Architect or Superintending Officer’s Representative (S.
O. Rep.) as defined in the Articles of Agreement or any other person designated in writing by the
Architect or the Superintending Officer (S.O.) from time to time to exercise the power of the
Architect or S.O.
The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Uniform Building By-
Laws of Malaysia, the Malaysian Standards and Codes of Practices, Malaysian Standards
Eurocodes current at the date of tender and to the satisfaction of the local Building Authorities
empowered to control the Works, the Specifications and drawings supplied to the Contractor and
any other instructions issued by the Engineer/Architect or their representative from time to time.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
Any reference in the Specifications to a Malaysian Standard (MS), Eurocodes (EC) or Code of
Practice (CP) shall imply the latest version at the time of tender of the applicable Standards or
Code of Practices. Should there be any discrepancy between these Specifications and the MS,
EC or CP, the more onerous requirement/s shall be adopted. The Engineer has the sole
discretion to modify or upgrade the specifications, drawings and documents to comply fully with
MS Eurocode requirements at no additional cost and time to the Contract.
1.1 Scope
Read this work section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the other work
sections as follows:
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, ensure all of the Works comply with the
relevant requirements of the Authorities, Regulations, Standards and Codes listed
below or referenced in the body of the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes
may be proposed for approval by the Engineer, provided it can be demonstrated that
the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the requirements of the standards
specified. All Standards and Codes quoted are the current version, unless specific
year references are noted.
In the event that the standards or codes are revised or superseded, refer to the latest
edition or the appropriate substitution for the relevant subjects.
Based on the information issue, propose and submit the following to the
Engineer for acceptance:
1.1.1.1. Select suitable make and model of the instrumentation for the
project.
1.1.1.3. Propose suitable schedule for the monitoring reading and records.
Co-ordinate with other contractors who may carry out other works at the
same time at the site. Take into account of site access, space occupation,
safety and safeguarding of adjoining properties and each other’s works.
Submit and work to a quality control plan as agreed with the Engineer.
Engage qualified crew of not less than two men to the Engineer’s
acceptance for the operation of each boring or drilling rig.
1.4.5.3 Installer
1.4.6 Safety
3.0 MATERIAL/EQUIPMENT
Refer to Section 01016 Particular Specification and Drawings for the schedule of
instrumentation including the minimum frequency of reading to be implemented for
the works.
Provide data acquisition set up as per requirement in the contract. Provide remote
data acquisition in compliance with the following:
boxes. Supply readout units together with leads for plugging into
the measuring device and readout boxes.
3.2.2.1 General
Use reliable and safe remote data collection systems with back-up
facilities in the event of mains power failure. Prove the reliability of
the logger prior installation by demonstration and records of
previous works.
Use a flex outlet without switches for all loggers when connected
to the mains electrical supply. Do not use plug sockets.
Logger stations are to collect the cabling from the various remotely
read instruments and from local terminal boxes, so that monitoring
can be conveniently carried out from a single position close to any
instrumented section.
Use cabling and connectors that are robust, water resistant and corrosion
resistant for instrumentation. Use only low smoke zero halon cabling for all
cables, which is durable and suitable for the proposed locations in the
works.
Use items that are extinguishable non-metallic and emit no toxic fumes in
the event of fire.
3.3.1 General
Inclinometers are to take the form of an access tube with four keyways (in
pairs at right angles), which shall be grouted in to a borehole.
The orientation of the keyways to be such that they are parallel to and
perpendicular to the orientation of any tunnel, excavation or wall or
otherwise as accepted by the Engineer.
3.3.3 Probe
Signal shall be emitted to confirm power failure and confirm that the battery
pack is operative.
When taking readings, insert the inclinometer probe in the tube. The
inclinometer shall travel along the whole length of the tube with its wheels
engaged in each pair of the keyways in turn to obtain deformation
measurements in both directions. A force balance accelerometer within the
probe shall respond to changes in alignment, which shall be displayed on a
portable readout unit.
Provide a calibration device with the instrument, which calibrates both the
probe and the portable readout unit to the acceptance of the Engineer.
3.3.7 Tubing
At the final ground level fit the inclinometer tubing with a removable cap
within a lockable vandal-proof cover set in a concrete surround.
The protection, cover and surround details shall be to the acceptance of the
Engineer.
3.4.1 General
3.4.2 Sensor
3.5.1 General
Set a datum magnetic ring at the base of the inclinometer tubing and also
within the instrument chamber base, located at the top of the borehole.
Check that the reading system is reliable and require minimal maintenance
over the required monitoring period. Thermal or other influences shall be
negligible.
Measure relative movement between the magnetic ring and the reference
magnetic ring at the top of the holes by a reed switch attached to a stainless
steel tape. Raise and lower the steel tape and reed switch assembly from
the top of the borehole.
3.6.1 General
Use rod extensometers in the form of a rod anchored at the remote end of
the borehole passing into a plastic tube fixed in a reference collar at the
open end of the hole.
Install no more than six rods in a single hole with each rod of a different
length so that displacements at various borehole depths may be recorded.
Where more than six rods are required, prepare another borehole as close
as possible to the initial hole and rods set at alternate depths in each hole.
3.6.3 Materials
Rods to be fabricated from stainless steel. The grade of steel rod shall suit
the environment and duration of the project. Make provision for threading
the anchor points onto the rod.
Measure relative movement between the end anchor and the reference
collar by an automated measurement device (an electrical transducer)
registering on the free end of the rod and by manual means using a system
to the acceptance of the Engineer.
Use a tape extensometer that is capable of being read to ±0.15 mm, and have a
range of 20 m. Demonstrate a repeatability of reading to ±0.15 mm prior to use.
Deep Levelling Datum to comprise of a 25mm galvanised steel rod cast into a 250mm
diameter grout filled steel casing positioned within a 300mm diameter steel casing.
Fill the annulus between the two casings with grease. The top of the 25 mm steel rod
shall be domed and centre punched.
3.9 Levels
3.10 Piezometers
Piezometers shall be in place and calibrated two weeks before any excavation work
starts. They shall be installed at about 1m from the external temporary wall system face,
if any, as soon as practicable after the wall system has been installed.
The piezometer shall measure pore water pressure with an accuracy of not less than
0.5% full scale 0.2m head of water and a resolution of 0.1m head of water.
3.10.1.1 Tube
3.10.1.2 Filter
3.10.1.3 Tip
Do not use.
A plan showing location of all vibration monitoring sensors must be prepared by the
Contractor’s PE. All buildings/structures likely to be affected by either the temporary
works, excavation or piling works must be included with sensors installed.
3.13 Tell-Tales
Tell tales to generally comprise of two clear plastic overlapping plates, one marked
with a millimetre scale the other with a cross-hair marking to allow reading on two
axis.
obstruction.
Install prism reflector targets at the locations shown in the drawings. Targets should
be durable, not damaged by rain and fixed so that they are not disturbed by vibration.
Ensure the working range of the sensors to be at least –40° Celsius to +60° Celsius
with an accuracy of ±1° Celsius. All sensors to be capable of being remotely
monitored and the data being downloaded to a computer in an ASCII file format.
3.16.1 General
The water level is measured normally by lowering a dipmeter probe from ground level.
The water standpipes shall be installed where possible, in sandy layers of high
permeability. Water standpipes shall be in place and calibrated two weeks before any
excavation work starts. They shall be installed at about 1m from the external
temporary wall system face, if any, as soon as practicable after the wall system has
been installed.
The water standpipe shall measure water level with an accuracy of not less than 0.01m
head of water.
The water table should not be reduced by more than 1m during excavation in any of the
water standpipes. Should the drop in water level approach this value, then the
Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer and the Contractor must take
immediate action to prevent damage to relevant structures.
Load cells are to be used for measuring forces in the struts and braces of a strutted
excavation. It is very important to ensure that struts and bracing are accepting loads
and performing their tasks; also whether these members accept greater than designed
loads (indicating that additional struts/bracing may be required).
4.1 General
Maintain all instruments, including readout and data loggers, required for
monitoring in a satisfactory working order for the duration of the monitoring
programme.
4.1.2 Storage
4.1.3.1 Grouting
Introduce the grout using a tremie pipe which is kept below the
surface of the grout as filling proceeds. Agree on methods to be
used where ground conditions make normal grouting
impracticable. Leave the area in a clean and tidy condition.
4.1.3.2 Testing
Fix the equipment such that it is capable of resisting vandalism and adverse
climatic conditions at surface locations. In addition, protect all instruments
by hoarding or barriers as directed.
Tag all external visible protective covers to equipment using aluminum rigid
nameplates of minimum size 2500 mm2, swg 24 or similar to the acceptance
of the Engineer, identifying the following:
Records of all readings have to be kept up to date on Site for inspection at any time.
Records shall be kept in the Contractor’s site office and at the office of the Resident
Engineer. All records/data must be certified by the Contractor’s PE and submitted to
the Engineer within one week. The Engineer shall be notified immediately in the event
an alert level is reached for any of the instruments.
Each instrument shall be assigned an identification number. This number shall also be
indicated on: -
Vary the frequency depending upon the stage of the works. In some cases
continuous logging will be required.
When planning for suitable methods and schedule for monitoring, take
account of the limits of movement and levels of vibration for the adjacent
buildings as set out in the Section 01016 Particular Specification and
Drawings.
Do not use any form of instrument which uses electrical resistance methods
for taking readings unless otherwise agreed.
Read all instruments as soon as possible after installation and at least once
per day for a period of two weeks thereafter. Where instruments appear not
to have stabilised, for example exhibiting a continued drift in the readings,
the cause shall be identified and the fault rectified and a new set of readings
provided. When all instruments are showing consistent results for a period
of 1 week, readings shall be averaged to provide a datum reading.
When recording instrumentation readings, record all site conditions that may
affect the results, including temperature and humidity readings.
Record also the instrument type, location reference, datum and time of
reading, personnel carrying out the readings and measuring instrument or
readout unit reference.
Take backup copies on a daily basis on two sets of disks; one set to be
stored remote from the site office.
Use the same recording devices, e.g. tape extensometers, level, EDM and
Theodolite, etc. at any given location throughout the monitoring programme.
4.3.1 General
4.3.2 Installation
4.3.3 Tubing
Provide the tubing with appropriate couplings for joining tube lengths to the
required borehole length. Cap the base of the tube.
Adequately fix and seal the cap and coupling joints so that the tube is grout-
and dirt-tight.
Lower the joined and sealed tubing into the borehole and grout the annulus
using a bentonite/cement grout tremied to the bottom of the hole. Fix the
tubing from rotation while being lowered.
Provide suitable means of measuring the position of the probe down the
borehole to an accuracy of ±10 mm from a reference point at the top of the
borehole.
Where inclinometers already exist and are to be extended, the new tubing
shall match the existing tubing.
Check stability and gain of the reading system at weekly intervals unless
otherwise agreed, and provide results to the Engineer.
Carry out spiral and inclination check prior to establishing the datum
reading.
4.4.1 General
4.4.2 Installation
4.4.3 Tubing
Provide the tubing with appropriate couplings for joining tube lengths to the
required borehole length.
Adequately fix and seal the cap and coupling joints so that the tube is grout-
and dirt-tight.
Lower the joined and sealed tubing into the borehole and grout the annulus
using a bentonite/cement grout tremied to the bottom of the hole. Fix the
tubing from rotation while being lowered.
4.4.4 Sensor
Check stability and gain of the reading system at weekly intervals by means
of three “dummy” electrolevels using precise resistors.
Carry out spiral and inclination checks prior to establishing the datum
reading.
4.5 Extensometers
(a) Fix a level survey point to the top of the reference head of the
extensometer to allow precise levelling back to a datum.
(b) Check the level survey point each time the instrument is read,
unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer.
Isolate each rod Individually by its own plastic sleeve and grout
the complete assembly in place, fixing the anchors to the ground
but allowing free movement of each rod within its sleeve.
Fix a level survey point to the top of the reference head of the
extensometer to allow precise levelling back to a datum.
Determine the lengths of rods using the level of the ground at the
hole location. For grout used for backfilling, use bentonite/cement
mix with just sufficient water to allow it to be tremied to the bottom
of the holes.
Adjust the tension of the tape and take the tape and calliper readings.
Use the same extensometer for each set of readings to maintain
consistency.
4.6.1 Installation
Install a 300mm diameter casing not less than 300 mm into firm ground.
Install the 250 mm diameter casing not less than 1500mm beneath the
300mm casing and fill with water cement grout that is just pumpable. Ensure
the founding depth of deep levelling datum to be such that the founding
strata is not affected by the construction activity.
4.6.2 Protection
Protect the top of the Deep Levelling Datum by a manhole cover and by a
surface protection barrier to the acceptance of the Engineer.
4.7 Piezometers
In placing the sand, ensure that no sand adheres to the soil in the sides of
an unlined hole. Where there is water in a hole, allow sufficient time for all
the sand to settle, and take measurements of the upper surface of the sand
from time to time to ensure this. Record the final elevation of the top of the
sand.
Tamp the bentonite seal formed of either stiff hard rolled balls or pellets over
the sand to a thickness of approximately 1500 mm. Backfill the hole with
bentonite/cement grout mix to the acceptance of the Engineer. Terminate
grout backfill at the base of the instrumentation chamber.
Check that the tip of each piezometer is air free and the porous stone of the
tip is fully saturated by submergence in clean de-aired water for a period of
at least 24 hours prior to installation.
4.7.7 Records
Take samples of ground water of not less than one litre from the standpipes
and piezometer when required.
Store the water samples in clean sealed containers; clearly label and deliver
to the laboratory for chemical tests.
The tests for sulphate content (% SO3), chloride content, acidity (pH value)
and degree of salinity shall be determined from the same sample.
Ensure strain gauges and cabling are compatible for their intended location. Protect
them against any disturbance from the site activities.
Attach the bars at two locations only to limit the bending induced in the bars
changes by less than 50µε.
4.10 Tell-Tales
Fix the overlapping plates securely so that a gap of not greater than 1 mm separates
them at the start of monitoring and so that the cross-hairs are zeroed. Record the
location, orientation and plate separation for each telltale on the reading sheets.
Typical details of acceptable installations for ground and building settlement points
are shown in the drawings.
Monitor and record the levels of ground survey and building settlement
points throughout the duration of the Works, using a precise level and staff
accurate to 0.5mm or better.
Keep adjacent roads, neighbouring properties and structures clear of equipment and
spoils and regularly inspect the surface of the ground, properties and structures.
4.13 Completion
Remove all specialist monitoring and make good all installations to the satisfaction of
the Engineer upon completion of the monitoring, or at other such times if accepted by
the Engineer.
5.1 Submissions
Submit detailed method statements for the installation of all instruments for
the acceptance of the Engineer prior to installation.
5.1.2.1 Content
Submit detailed drawings showing the precise location and depth for
instrument installation for the acceptance of the Engineer prior to
commencement of installations.
Submit full details of the proposed data management system for the
acceptance of the Engineer. These shall include proposed formats for data
acquisition, checking, processing, and subsequent reporting to the Engineer
for all instruments.
5.1.6 Calculations
Carry out periodic checks at appropriate intervals to confirm the validity of calibration
of equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and make any
necessary adjustments. Check instruments to have a validity of calibration at least 3
months after their last intended reading in the project.
Keep records of checks, errors recorded and whether any adjustment was
undertaken.
Retain copies of all certification and other records on site and make
available for the Engineer’s inspection when required.
5.3.1 General
Submit final records for each instrument incorporating any comments from
the Engineer within seven days of completion of installation of each
instrument.
(a) Instrument number and location (in eastern and northern co-ordinates
and level).
(b) Names of personnel responsible for installation.
(c) Time and date for commencement and completion of instrument.
(d) Details and records of boreholes.
(e) Plant and labour used.
(f) Ground conditions encountered (if applicable).
(g) Details of instrument installation (grout, fixings etc).
(h) Instrument readings during installation, calibration and immediately
after installation are completed.
(i) Location of instrument terminals, housings and any leads or cabling.
(j) Details of any splices, numbers of casings or joins.
(k) Details of any breakdowns or delays.
The registered surveyor shall establish the initial (datum) reading of each
survey point and submit records to the Engineer. Unless otherwise agreed,
submit the datum readings prior to any excavation and construction works.
5.3.6.1 Frequency
SECTION 01019
DEMOLITION AND SITE CLEARANCE
INDEX TO SPECIFICATION
CLAUSE PAGE
This specification section is the copyright of DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. No reproduction either in part or
in whole in any manner whoever is allowed without written permission from DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd.
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the Particular Specification, and all other contract documents.
This technical specification shall form part of the Contract and the Contractor shall allow for all
obligations, requirements, considerations, etc. to comply with the specification. The Contractor is
also deemed to have visited the site and fully acquainted himself as to the nature and
practicability of the works. No claims will be entertained as a result of his failure to do all of the
above.
The Consulting Civil and Structural Engineer is DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. The Contractor is to
note that when the term ‘Engineer’ in the following Specification means the representative of the
Consulting Engineer.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Engineer is referred to in the following specification,
such term shall be deemed to mean The Architect or Superintending Officer’s Representative (S.
O. Rep.) as defined in the Articles of Agreement or any other person designated in writing by the
Architect or the Superintending Officer (S.O.) from time to time to exercise the power of the
Architect or S.O.
The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Uniform Building By-
Laws of Malaysia, the Malaysian Standards and Codes of Practices, Malaysian Standards
Eurocodes current at the date of tender and to the satisfaction of the local Building Authorities
empowered to control the Works, the Specifications and drawings supplied to the Contractor and
any other instructions issued by the Engineer/Architect or their representative from time to time.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
Any reference in the Specifications to a Malaysian Standard (MS), Eurocodes (EC) or Code of
Practice (CP) shall imply the latest version at the time of tender of the applicable Standards or
Code of Practices. Should there be any discrepancy between these Specifications and the MS,
EC or CP, the more onerous requirement/s shall be adopted. The Engineer has the sole
discretion to modify or upgrade the specifications, drawings and documents to comply fully with
MS Eurocode requirements at no additional cost and time to the Contract.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for works involving the demolition of existing
buildings and other structures and general site clearance.
The Contractor shall demolish/modify the relevant works within the building
site. The Contractor shall engage a registered surveyor to survey the
existing steel and concrete elements, if any, and prepare existing survey.
The Contractor shall submit four (4) sets of the above drawings duly
endorsed by his registered surveyor upon completion of the works. All costs
related to these are deemed to be included in the Contractor’s quotation
price. No additional claims for cost or time shall be entertained on account
of the above.
Upkeeps and maintains the project site, hoardings, gates, earth control
measure plan, earth protection upon complete demolition for duration as
specified in the contract.
Read this section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of SECTION 01016
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, ensure all of the Works comply
with the relevant requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or
referenced in the body of the Specification. Alternative Standards and
Codes may be proposed for approval by the Engineer, provided it can be
demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the
requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Unless otherwise specified, the works shall comply with the relevant
sections of the following statutory requirements:
Do not vary methods on site from the agreed method statement without
prior acceptance. Notify the Engineer of any proposed variations to the
method statement within 14 days unless otherwise agreed.
Prices for all works of demolition are to include for labour, plant, tools, etc.
and materials where necessary for making good all work disturbed.
The whole of the works shall be carried out in a systematic manner and care
must be taken not to damage any property, not included in the demolition.
1.4.2.1 General
1.4.3 Supervision
1.4.3.1 Demolition
1.4.4 Qualifications
Provide evidence of past experience for all personnel to the Engineer for
acceptance prior to commencement of the Works.
Obtain from the Engineer and verify available information relevant to the
following:
Allow for conditions peculiar to the site and all other matters affecting the
proposed Work and allow as necessary for the types of materials to be
excavated.
Take cognizance of and co-ordinate with other contractors on site who may
be carrying out instrumentation and monitoring works to avoid duplication of
installation and readings.
Accept responsibility for the upholding of the adjoining buildings and roads,
footpaths etc., where applicable, together with the mains and services from
the time of taking possession of the site through the duration of the works.
Adequately maintain roads and footpaths within and adjacent to the site and
keep clear of mud and debris.
The Contractor shall examine the walls of all structures adjacent to the
structure which is to be demolished, such as, examination of the thickness
and method of support. Where there is a reason to believe that an adjacent
structure is unsafe or liable to become unsafe, because of demolition
operations, no demolition shall be carried out until there has been provided
sheet pilings, shoring, bracing or other such beams as may be required to
ensure the stability of the adjacent structure and to prevent such structure or
other property from collapsing.
1.4.8.1 General
Site safety shall comply with the Occupational Health and Safety
Act (OSHA) and its subsidiary legislations.
The Contractor shall provide and erect all protective screens, strutting,
shoring etc. that may be required to prevent damage, nuisance or
disturbance, any debris or dust to the existing building structure, public
roadways, persons or traffic passing nearby and all adjoining properties.
The Contractor shall engage his own Professional Engineer, PE(Civil) for
the design of temporary hoarding and submit to the Engineer for approval
before demolition work commences.
The Contractor shall provide, maintain and dismantle all necessary shoring,
strutting and other forms of support deemed necessary and also take all
other necessary precautions or adopt such other expedients as may be
necessary to preserve the stability of existing building structures and all
other properties including that of adjoining owners that may in any way be
endangered or affected by the works to be executed.
Masonry shall not be permitted to fall in such a manner that will endanger
human lives.
Where the contract works or access to the site requires diversion of existing
traffic, the contractor shall prepare, co-ordinate and seek approval of his
diversion plans from the relevant authorities. All costs and time associated
with implementing the traffic diversion including the preparation of plans and
seeking Authorities’ approval shall be deemed to be included within the
contract, price and time.
Maintain all necessary temporary access roads with drainage ditches over
their full length. Divert and reinstate the permanent drainage system.
1.4.13.1 General
Erect the hoarding at not less than 300mm away from any
permanent structure such as footway, drain, pipeline, etc. unless
otherwise agreed.
Visit and inspect the site to understand the conditions and characters of the
Works and to ascertain the exact position and full extent of the Works.
All materials arising from the demolition are to become the property of the
Contractor unless specifically identified in the contract and are to be carried
away from the site to a place provided by the Contractor.
Dispose all debris at approved tips. Take special care to prevent debris from
site being carried or blown onto surrounding areas. Clean vehicle wheels
before the vehicle leaves site.
1.4.16 Rubbish
Remove all rubbish, dirt and residues from voids and cavities before filling
or closing in.
1.4.18.1 General
1.4.18.2 Consents
Only trees indicated within the specified boundary and as required in the
Contract Documents shall be felled and up-rooted and shall be included in
this Contract. The Contractor is responsible in obtaining clearance or
approval from relevant Authorities before felling any tree within the specified
boundary.
Any treasure trove, coins or objects of antiquity which may be found at the
site in the execution of the works shall remain the property of the Employer.
The Contractor shall carefully take out and preserve all such objects and
shall immediately or as soon as conveniently possible after the discovery of
such articles deliver the same into the possession of the Engineer
uncleaned and as excavated.
On completion, the Contractor shall remove all debris from the site to leave
a tidy working space and reinstate all surface/excavation to as close to the
original conditions as possible. The Contractor is not allowed to dump waste
materials on other phases of the building. No burning of waste materials on
site is permitted. Any work disturbed by reasons of the execution of the
demolition shall be made good by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the
Engineer at his own expense.
1.4.24 Interference
Throughout the whole duration of demolition, the work shall be carried out in
such a manner that it will not interfere, interrupt or obstruct the daily lives of
the neighbourhood. It shall also be the Contractor's responsibility to restrict
his workmen to only those areas where the work is to be carried out and to
prevent them from wandering within or entering into other neighbouring
properties.
1.4.25 Security
Adequately safeguard the site, products, materials, plants and any existing
buildings affected by the Works from theft.
Engage a pest control operator who is registered with the relevant authority
having jurisdiction to provide comprehensive pest control and surveillance
work on the site.
Submit the name of the pest control operator to the Engineer for acceptance
prior to commencement of the Works.
Pest control and surveillance programmes shall comply with the relevant
authorities requirements and the following:
(a) Submit a detailed pest control and surveillance programme to the prior
to commencement of the work.
(b) Maintain a site register containing an up-to-date record of pest control
and surveillance that have been carried out. Make site register
available for inspection by the Engineer.
(c) Take all necessary measures to prevent the site (including vacant flats
where relevant) from becoming conducive to the breeding or
harbouring of vectors.
(d) Carry out site checks at least once a week to detect and remove
breeding and harbouring grounds.
1.4.27.1 General
Submit and work to a quality control plan as agreed with the Engineer.
1.5 Definition
(a) Temporary Works. All construction works that are not part of the Permanent
Works but are required in order to complete the Permanent Works.
Ensure that the hoarding erected is able to resist the design imposed
loading.
2.2 Falsework
2.2.1 Foundations
Take all necessary actions to ensure compliance with the latest noise control
regulations imposed by relevant authorities having jurisdiction. In the absence of any
guide the noise level (Maximum allowable equivalent continuous noise level
measured over a period of 5 minutes in dB) at the nearest occupied building outside
the Site is not to exceed the following maximum permissible noise level.
Types of
affected
7am 7pm 10pm 7am 7pm 10pm 7am 7pm 10pm
buildings
to to to to to to to to to
7pm 10pm 7am 7pm 10pm 7am 7pm 10pm 7am
(a) Hospital,
school,
75 55 75 55
home for
dBA dBA dBA dBA
the aged,
sick etc
No No Work
(b) Residential
Work
Buildings
located less
than 150m 90 70 55 90 70
from the dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA
construction
site
(c) Buildings
other than
90 70 90 70 90 70
those in (a)
dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA
and (b)
above
3.1 Falsework
Do not use the prohibited equipment and methods as stipulated in the contract.
4.0 WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Survey
Prior to the commencement of the Works, verify all available information. Carry out a
detailed visual survey and examination of the physical condition and structural
stability of the building(s) to be demolished and other surrounding buildings.
Carry out a further survey and examination of the structures on completion of the
Works.
Identify appropriate method for demolition by completing risk assessments for the
Works.
Establish and maintain safe working spaces and exclusion zones as appropriate.
Ensure all personnel are familiar with and trained in the use of the particular plant and
machinery that will be used.
Ensure that the removal of certain parts of the building or structure during demolition
will not affect the structural integrity of other parts.
If at any time, it appears that the other parts have become unsafe or the structural
integrity of the building is compromised, propose all necessary remedial actions to
provide adequate support to the building to prevent uncontrolled collapse.
Pre-determine where temporary supports will be needed. If the structure abuts other
buildings, provide such lateral support to prevent collapse.
4.4.1 Sequence
Demolish buildings and other structures in the reverse order to that of their
construction. The order of demolition for buildings should be progressive
storey-by storey, having regard to the type of construction.
4.4.2 Debris
Use only machines designed for arduous or heavy duty. Do not use cranes
with telescopic jibs, tower canes and other high reach machines for this
method.
The weight of the ball should not exceed 50% of the SWL (safe working
load) of the lifting machine at the working radius.
A rope from the second drum of the crane shall also be attached to the ball
to prevent an inadvertent increase in radius, which could cause an overload.
Carry out swinging using methods that do not overstress the jib or
compromise the stability of the machine.
Do not swing the ball in line with the jib where the angle of the jib exceeds
60° to the horizontal.
Use an anti-spin device on the hoist rope. A competent person shall inspect
the hoist rope, anti-spin device and all the attachments of the demolition ball
to the hoist rope by appropriate means at least twice a day.
Ensure that the ball is not trapped when drop-balling arches, floor slabs or
similar elements because a sudden collapse can result in the machine being
overloaded.
In the event that the ball is trapped, use a second machine with a suitable
attachment to release the trapped ball.
If this is not possible take it out of use immediately by removing all persons
from it and placing a barrier and warning sign at each access point.
Keep all such structures away from proposed roads, driveways, car parks and
services lines.
4.6 Excavation
Ensure the works do not cause damage to adjoining properties and do not leave
unnecessary or unstable projections.
Promptly repair any damage caused to adjoining properties by the Works. Make good
to ensure safety, stability, weather protection and security.
Cut away and strip out with care to reduce the amount of making good to a minimum.
Prevent debris from overloading any part of the structures to be retained.
4.9.1 Regulations
In general, notify the Commissioner for Workplace Safety and Health (WSH)
at least seven (7) calendar days prior to commencement of the work in
accordance to the WSH (asbestos) Regulations. A copy of the notification
shall be made available on site and produced as and when required by the
Engineer or the Authorities.
A visual inspection should be carried out to verify that the area is not
contaminated before setting up the site for asbestos-removal work. If
necessary, air monitoring can be conducted to establish the level of
asbestos concentration in the air to determine if respiratory protection is
necessary during site preparation.
Prior to covering the asbestos work area with a polyethylene sheet, the area
should be precleaned using a high efficiency particulate air (HEPA)-filtered
vacuum cleaner or wet wiped. Dry sweeping must never be used to collect
asbestos debris under any circumstances. All movable objects such as
furniture should be removed from the work area to prevent them from being
contaminated with asbestos. Non-movable objects which are to remain
within the work area such as circuit boxes and switch gears should be pre-
cleaned thoroughly with an industrial vacuum cleaner equipped with a
HEPA filter, or wet-wiped. They should then be sealed with two layers of
polyethylene sheets and securely taped down to protect them from
contamination. Any ventilation system serving or connected to the asbestos
work area should be disabled and the ventilation ducts leading to and from
the work area should be sealed for the whole duration of the asbestos-
removal work.
No person is allowed to enter the asbestos work area, except for those
involved in the asbestos removal work or authorized to enter the work area.
Workers whose work involves asbestos shall always put on the appropriate
personal protective equipment (PPE) such as disposable protective clothing
and respirators.
Take special care for demolition of tall buildings to ensure that no undue vibration or
concussion is caused which could result in damage to other properties, MRT
structures, pedestrian crossings, underground services or drains or other adjacent
properties by flying debris.
The Contractor shall be responsible to for preventing silt from being washed into
public drain by implementing effective Earth Control Measures for the construction
site. During the tender submission, Contractor shall submit the schematic Erosion and
Sediment Control Plan of the construction site for whole duration of the contract
period taking into account the different phases of construction activities. The
proposed Earth Control Measures shall comply with the requirements of authorities.
Contractor shall note that the Earth Control Measures are for the containment and
treatment of silty discharge due to the impact of rainwater, not meant for the treatment
of wastewater due to construction activities, which shall be treated to comply with the
requirements of authorities.
Before commence works on site, Contract shall obtain Engineer’s approval on ESCP,
and the installation of the works shall according to the approved design. During the
course of the construction works, Contractor shall review the ESCP proposal regularly
to meet the changing needs of the construction activities. Proper records detailing the
maintenance works, supported by dated photograph, shall be kept by the Contractor
for verification. Earth Control Measures shall not be removed until all works are
completed and upon the advice of Engineer.
During construction, Contractor shall minimize the formation of bare surfaces under
the ESCP. The plan shall depict graphically the activities, including sequence of work,
type and duration for each phase of construction activities to include the following
measure to:
a) Sequence and schedule of the earthwork in stages and progressively with the
subsequent construction activities and building works.
c) Pave up the bare surfaces and all construction access by concrete or milled
waste or other suitable materials
d) Protect the bare slope with close turfing, concrete grouting, and canvas or
erosion control blanket.
f) Restore ground cover over disturbed areas, which are or have become bare, as
soon as possible.
g) Cover up the active works surfaces with canvas sheet during rain or at the end
of the workday.
The Contractor shall put in place the ECM’s Sediment Control Plan, which aims to
capture the sediments washed down from the construction sites. Some of these
sediment control measures and facilities, which must be in place before the works
start, shall include but not limited to the followings:
a) Concrete lined cut-off drain along the perimeter of the construction sites.
b) Silt fence proposed installed and embedded into ground along the perimeter cut-
off drain (between the construction site and the cut-off drain).
d) A storage basin or tank may be required to temporary store the large amount of
rainwater falling on to the whole site before treatment.
e) A treatment system to treat silty discharge shall be provided before the discharge
points into public drain.
f) Turbidity curtains shall be installed along all the exposed slope/riverbanks for
works in or adjacent to water bodies, such as canals, rivers, sea or in
reclamation works. The silty discharge trapped within the turbidity curtain shall be
allowed to be settled or treated and removed.
The Contractor shall put in place a site monitoring and reporting system including but
not limited to the following:
The Contractor shall submit full basis of design with design calculation to show clearly
how the perimeter cur-off drain, silt fence, sediment basin and storage basin/tank are
designed and sized as well as the design efficiency. The contractor shall also submit
the design specifications on the treatment system which can effectively treat the silty
discharge from the construction site. The intensity of one in two-year storm shall be
adopted for the proposed design.
Inform the Engineer of any unrecorded tanks, chemicals etc. discovered during
demolition work. Agree with the Engineer methods for safe removal, filling etc.
Make the remaining sections of any retaining and buttress walls safe and secure.
Remove all organic material and soil from basements and other voids. Fill and
consolidate with material required under 02300 GENERAL EARTHWORKS
EXCAVATION AND FILLING.
4.15.1 Services
Reinstate and make good the affected Works and services in such a
manner that upon substantial completion they shall be in as good order and
condition as they were at the commencement of the contract.
4.16 Completion
Clean all rubbish, debris and surplus materials and leave the whole site clean and
tidy. Complete to the required final condition of the site as described in the contract.
Clean all loose stones, gravels, tree stumps and building debris in the areas indicated
for turfing on the drawings.
Loosen the top 100mm deep layer and grade to fall as indicated.
Comply with other project specific requirements or restrictions for the works as
described in the particular specifications if any.
Refer to the list and timing for required submissions for the works. Comply with the
details of the applicable submissions as outline below.
Submit method statements covering the following and describing how and
when the following tasks are carried out within 14 days from
commencement of the relevant work.
Submit a site layout plan to the Engineer indicating proposed locations of all
temporary structures for acceptance before their erection.
Prepare and submit the quality control plan for Engineer’s acceptance prior
to starting work.
After the completion of the demolition works, engage a registered Surveyor to carry
out a site survey of the site and immediate surround.
Submit copies of the survey plan as directed by the Engineer showing at least
information such as:
SECTION 02020
PRE-TREATMENT OF CAVITIES
INDEX TO SPECIFICATION
CLAUSE PAGE
This specification section is the copyright of DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. No reproduction either in part or
in whole in any manner whoever is allowed without written permission from DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd.
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the Particular Specification, and all other contract documents.
This technical specification shall form part of the Contract and the Contractor shall allow for all
obligations, requirements, considerations, etc. to comply with the specification. The Contractor is
also deemed to have visited the site and fully acquainted himself as to the nature and
practicability of the works. No claims will be entertained as a result of his failure to do all of the
above.
The Consulting Civil and Structural Engineer is DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. The Contractor is to
note that when the term ‘Engineer’ in the following Specification means the representative of the
Consulting Engineer.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Engineer is referred to in the following specification,
such term shall be deemed to mean The Architect or Superintending Officer’s Representative (S.
O. Rep.) as defined in the Articles of Agreement or any other person designated in writing by the
Architect or the Superintending Officer (S.O.) from time to time to exercise the power of the
Architect or S.O.
The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Uniform Building By-
Laws of Malaysia, the Malaysian Standards and Codes of Practices, Malaysian Standards
Eurocodes current at the date of tender and to the satisfaction of the local Building Authorities
empowered to control the Works, the Specifications and drawings supplied to the Contractor and
any other instructions issued by the Engineer/Architect or their representative from time to time.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
Any reference in the Specifications to a Malaysian Standard (MS), Eurocodes (EC) or Code of
Practice (CP) shall imply the latest version at the time of tender of the applicable Standards or
Code of Practices. Should there be any discrepancy between these Specifications and the MS,
EC or CP, the more onerous requirement/s shall be adopted. The Engineer has the sole
discretion to modify or upgrade the specifications, drawings and documents to comply fully with
MS Eurocode requirements at no additional cost and time to the Contract.
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the requirements for pre-treatment of cavity slump zones
and cavities before the installation of micro-piles, foundation bored piles, contiguous
bored piles, secant piles or diaphragm walls in Limestone area.
Read this section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the following work
sections:
1.3.1 Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, ensure all of the Works comply
with the relevant requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or
referenced in the body of the Specification. Alternative Standards and
Codes may be proposed for approval by the Engineer, provided it can be
demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the
requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
1.4.1 As part of this Contract, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing
pre-treatment of cavity slump zones and cavities before the installation of
1.4.3 The Contractor shall submit proposed methods and sequence for the cavity
pre-treatment program or procedure to the Engineer for approval.
1.4.4 The Contractor shall be the sole responsible party for the adequacy of the
pre-treatment program in order to perform his work satisfactorily. Any delay
in construction due to the inadequacy of the Contractor's program shall not
constitute any construction delay nor claims.
1.4.5 The Contractor shall allow a unit rate for probing of limestone strata to
establish the location, depth and size of fissures, cavities or soft layer within
the limestone bedrock below pile toe level for each pile socketed into the
limestone bedrock. All probes shall extend a minimum of 10 metres or the
depth spedfied by the Engineer. It is foreseeable that probing may exceed
the minimum length specified, the unit rate for probing shall a!low for this
contingency.
1.4.6 The size of drilled holes shall suit the compaction grouting system which
may be needed for grouting or plugging lhe cavities. The grout shall be
agreed dense cement grout with a minimum 28 days strength of 20 N/mm2.
If extra grout is required for purposes other than to fill up the core hole
formed by cavity probing as in the treatment of cavities etc, such additional
grouting work shall be measured separately. The unit rate for probing
should clearly differentiate between rotary drilling through either flat or
inclined rock surfaces,drilling through cavities, fissures and soft soil layers
between rock and drilling in soil. Cavities and soft soil layers between rocks
shall be paid as drilling in soil where such cavities and soft layers extend
through thicknesses greater than 1.5 metres.
1.4.7 For the purpose of the tender, the provisional numbers of cavity probes shall
be specified or computedon the basis of one (1) probe at each rock
socketed pile. It is foreseeable that the actual numbers of probes may
exceed the provisional quantity allowed at tender, in which case it is held
that the contractor has provided for this contingency in his construction
programme and that he shall not be entitled to extra time on this account.
The contractor shall keep proper records of the drill!ng works as specified in
BS 5930. The RQD of limestone is to be recorded.
1.4.8 Cavity probing shall be a separately measured item distinct from other soil
investigation works (additional exploratory boreholes for soil sampling, SPT,
pressuremeter test etc) which the Contractor may undertake.Contractor’s
Submissions and Proposals
.
2.0 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Where cavities are encountered, the Contractor shall propose for the Engineer's
agreement suitable methods of construction to ensure the proper formation of a pile
or secant pile can carry the specified working load.
The Contractor's proposal shall comprise proven system(s) which have been installed
successfully in similar Limestone area/conditions. The proposed system(s) shall take
into consideration the condition, size and type of cavity, whether it is active or
inactive, filled or unfilled, single layered or multi-layered, and if multi-layered, whether
connected or unconnected.
The successful treatment of cavities may involve but is not necessarily restricted to
one or a combination of the following methods:
The use of permanent casing may suit conditions where the cavity is
waterlogged, unfilled, large (extends vertically >2m) and connected. The
permanent casing shall span across the cavity space to form the side of pile.
The casing shall be extended a minimum of 1 m beyond the cavity at each ends.
The Contractor shall allow in the unit rate for permanent casing all provision for
supply and installation of the casing, including all material, labour and plant.
Permanent casing shall be thin walled mild steel cylindrical pipe section, spirally
welded or other similar construction. Where a permanent casing is to be made
from a series of a short sections, it shall be designed and placed so as to
produce a continuous water tight shaft. The dimensions and quality of the casing
shall be adequate to withstand without damage or distortion all handling,
construction and ground stresses to which they will be subjected, including the
pressure head exerted by concrete against the wall of casing during casting. The
casing shall have an internal diameter not less that the specified pile diameter
and shall be free from internal projections and encrusted concrete which might
prevent proper formation of the bored pile.
Where permanent casing is provided, the Contractor shall check the pile capacity
and if necessary, install an extra length of pile to compensate the loss of shaft
friction over the portion of encased pile.
The use of micro-piles may suit conditions where the cavity is multi-layered,
extremely large, fairly active or waterlogged. For the construction of micro-pile,
Contractor shall submit his method statement including relevant calculations etc,
for Engineer consideration and approval. Micro-piles shall span across the cavity
space to underpin the base of bored pile. Micro-piles shall be embedded a
minimum of 2 metres within the bored pile and socketed into a moderately strong
limestones bedrock for a length which shall be the greater of 5 metres or the
calculated anchorage bond length derived from accepted principles of good
foundation engineering.
For the purpose of the tender, the Contractor shall provide unit rates for the
installation of micro-piles with working capacities of 100 and 125 tonnes per
pile. The details of micro-piles shall be included in the submission of the tender
for the Engineer review. Among other things, the unit rates for micro-pile shall
allow for the provision of all materials labour and plant for the drilling and
installation of micro-pile
The use of grouting shall suit all cavity conditions including when the cavity is
multi-layered. The desired treatment of cavities shall create a stabilized zone for
sufficient rock socket and pile toe stability for subsequent pile installation. The
Contractor shall re-core the filled cavity using the probe hole to check the
effectiveness of grouting, and re-grout where necessary to a depth of 10 m below
the proposed toe of the pile.
Grout shall be injected under a grouting pressure not exceeding 25 kPa per
metre overburden height at the point of injection. The termination criterion for
grouting is achieved when the grout intake is less than ten (10) litres per minute
per stage of grouting, maintained for a period of ten minutes at an applied
grouting pressure of 10 bar. The actual pressure applied may be varied to suit
site conditions as encountered and shall be subject to the agreement of the
Engineer.
In the event that the grout intake has exceeded the theoretical volume of the pile
at the given grouting stage, the grouting shall be suspended for 24 hours for the
grout to harden. The grouting process can be repeated until the grouting
termination criterion is achieved.
The grout types which may be used in the treatment of cavities include neat
cement, sand-cement and cement-sodium silicate. The Young Modulus (E) for
the replace grouted column shall not be less than 20,000 MPa. For the purpose
of the tender, the mix proportions for each grout type shall be taken as follows:
or,
Minimum grade 20
w/c = 0.50
sand/cement = 3:1, sand shall be uniformly
graded 100% passing through 4.75 mm and
not more than 10% passing 200 m
Cement-sodium silicate grout 100 litre sodium silicate to 80 kg cement
Any proposed additive to the grouts shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer. The maximum slump of the mix shall not exceed 100 mm. The
Contractor shall take three cube samples of grout from a placement to be
nominated by the Engineer and arrange for the compressive strength and Young
Modulus tests at 28 days.
Trial grouting and re-coring to test the effectiveness of grout type and composition
shall be carried out by the Contractor for each case of cavity encountered. It is
foreseeable that the mix composition actually used for the works may vary from
the specified mix proportions, depending on the effectiveness of the grout. The
waiting period for the multistage grouting in the large cavities subjects to the
effectiveness of the trial mixes. It is held that the Contractor has included the
contingency of possible variation in mix proportions in his unit rates for each grout
type.
The Contractor shall submit unit rates shall be allowed for the provision of all
necessary materials, labour and plant for drilling, grouting (inclusive of grout pipes,
grout type and mix) re-coring, unconfined compression test on grout cores and re-
grouting.
The contractor shall keep proper records for each grout hole and shall submit two
signed copies of the records to the Engineer. Any unexpected drilling and grouting
shall be noted in the records.
ii) Method of drilling and any peculiar events (water loss, etc).
iv) Location, elevation, water table, depth, inclination and direction of each drill hole.
Date, time and duration of grouting, mix of grout, flow rate, volume of grout intake
and grouting pressure.
v) Direct Backfill;
In all cases of cavity treatment, the Contractor shall be required to submit for
agreement his proposed detailed method statement. The Contractor shall
schedule his submission ahead of his construction programme, giving due regard
to the time frame required by the Engineer for the review and approval of the
submission.
vi) Slump Zone Grouting And Jet Grouting Using High Pressure Injection;
Slump Zone Grouting and Jet Grouting (if any) shall be done using high pressure
injection technique.
The Contractor shall allow unit rates for slump zone grouting (compaction and jet
grouting). Such rates shall apply only when the presence of slump zones are
confirmed by probing.
Submit the trial mix proposal for the cement grout prior to construction of
Compaction Grouting/Jet Grouting.
SECTION 02300
GENERAL EARTHWORKS, EXCAVATION AND FILLING
INDEX TO SPECIFICATION
CLAUSE PAGE
This specification section is the copyright of DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. No reproduction either in part or
in whole in any manner whoever is allowed without written permission from DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd.
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the Particular Specification, and all other contract documents.
This technical specification shall form part of the Contract and the Contractor shall allow for all
obligations, requirements, considerations, etc. to comply with the specification. The Contractor is
also deemed to have visited the site and fully acquainted himself as to the nature and
practicability of the works. No claims will be entertained as a result of his failure to do all of the
above.
The Consulting Civil and Structural Engineer is DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. The Contractor is to
note that when the term ‘Engineer’ in the following Specification means the representative of the
Consulting Engineer.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Engineer is referred to in the following specification,
such term shall be deemed to mean The Architect or Superintending Officer’s Representative (S.
O. Rep.) as defined in the Articles of Agreement or any other person designated in writing by the
Architect or the Superintending Officer (S.O.) from time to time to exercise the power of the
Architect or S.O.
The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Uniform Building By-
Laws of Malaysia, the Malaysian Standards and Codes of Practices, Malaysian Standards
Eurocodes current at the date of tender and to the satisfaction of the local Building Authorities
empowered to control the Works, the Specifications and drawings supplied to the Contractor and
any other instructions issued by the Engineer/Architect or their representative from time to time.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
Any reference in the Specifications to a Malaysian Standard (MS), Eurocodes (EC) or Code of
Practice (CP) shall imply the latest version at the time of tender of the applicable Standards or
Code of Practices. Should there be any discrepancy between these Specifications and the MS,
EC or CP, the more onerous requirement/s shall be adopted. The Engineer has the sole
discretion to modify or upgrade the specifications, drawings and documents to comply fully with
MS Eurocode requirements at no additional cost and time to the Contract.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the following general earthworks items for
building works:
(a) Excavation
(b) Filling
(c) Site-won and imported fill materials
(d) Rock-fill
Read this work section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the other work
sections as follows:
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, ensure all of the Works comply
with the relevant requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or
referenced in the body of the Specification. Alternative Standards and
Codes may be proposed for approval by the Engineer, provided it can be
demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the
requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
NA to MS EN 1997
Other Standards
In the event that the standards or Codes are revised or superseded, refer to
the latest edition or the appropriate substitution for the relevant subjects.
Refer to the following technical reference for guidance in carrying out the
works.
(a) BRE Digest 251 (1995) Assessment of damage in low rise building
Co-ordinate with other contractors who may carry out other works at the
same time at the site. Take into account of site access, space occupation,
safety and safeguarding of adjoining properties and each other’s works.
Where applicable, prior to and upon completion of the site works, carry out a
condition survey to adjacent buildings in accordance with the requirements
of SECTION 01017 CONDITION SURVEY AND MONITORING
Submit all records to the Engineer and adjacent property owners where
directed.
Take cognisance of and co-ordinate with other contractors on site who may
be carrying out instrumentation and monitoring works to avoid duplication of
installation and readings.
Accept responsibility for the upholding of the adjoining buildings and roads,
roadside tables, footpaths, drain etc., where applicable, together with the
mains and services including water mains, gas pipes, cables, sewerage
systems and etc from the time of taking possession of the site through the
duration of the works.
Adequately maintain roads and footpaths within and adjacent to the site and
keep clear of mud and debris. Notify (in written) to the Engineer and
authorities immediately, if damage occurs and responsible to control, repair
and rectify the damage.
Visit the Site and fully acquaint with the existing Site conditions and in
particular the proximity of adjacent property or other aspects liable to affect
construction.
1.4.6.4 Contamination
Carry out trial pits whenever and wherever necessary to satisfy the
site and subsurface information that might affecting execution of
the contract works.
Survey the site and subsurface of all existing services and in particular the
proximity of adjacent property or other aspects liable to affect construction.
Notify the Engineer of any mains, pipes or conduits met with during the
excavation and where any excavation is carried out adjacent to or under any
existing cable, and the like. Prevent damage by subsidence of all existing
services affected by the works.
Protect all equipment and working area using barriers, fencing or other
methods as accepted.
Provide and maintain all necessary temporary access roads and divert and
reinstate the permanent drainage system.
Provide and maintain all weather access to and within the Site and reinstate
the Site and all works damaged or disturbed upon completion of the
Contract to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Provide all temporary roads with drainage ditches over their full length.
Contractor shall be responsible to for preventing silt from being washed into
public drain by implementing effective Earth Control Measures for the
construction site. During the tender submission, Contractor shall submit the
schematic Erosion and Sediment Control Plan of the construction site for
whole duration of the contract period taking into account the different
phases of construction activities. The proposed Earth Control Measures
shall comply with the requirements of authorities. Contractor shall note that
the Earth Control Measures are for the containment and treatment of silty
discharge due to the impact of rainwater, not meant for the treatment of
wastewater due to construction activities, which shall be treated to comply
with the requirements of authorities.
Before commence works on site, Contract shall obtain Engineer’s approval
on ESCP, and the installation of the works shall according to the approved
design. During the course of the construction works, Contractor shall review
the ESCP proposal regularly to meet the changing needs of the construction
activities. Proper records detailing the maintenance works, supported by
dated photograph, shall be kept by the Contractor for verification. Earth
Control Measures shall not be removed until all works are completed and
upon the advice of Engineer.
d) Protect the bare slope with close turfing, concrete grouting, and canvas
or erosion control blanket.
f) Restore ground cover over disturbed areas, which are or have become
bare, as soon as possible.
g) Cover up the active works surfaces with canvas sheet during rain or at
the end of the workday.
The Contractor shall put in place the ECM’s Sediment Control Plan, which
aims to capture the sediments washed down from the construction sites.
Some of these sediment control measures and facilities, which must be in
place before the works start, shall include but not limited to the followings:
b) Silt fence proposed installed and embedded into ground along the
perimeter cut-off drain (between the construction site and the cut-off
drain).
Contractor shall submit full basis of design with design calculation to show
clearly how the perimeter cur-off drain, silt fence, sediment basin and
storage basin/tank are designed and sized as well as the design efficiency.
The contractor shall also submit the design specifications on the treatment
system which can effectively treat the silty discharge from the construction
site. The intensity of one in two year storm shall be adopted for the
proposed design.
1.4.11 Obstructions
.
Remove obstructions such as existing fences, structures, foundation,
pilecaps/footings, boulders, reinforced concrete elements, concrete blocks,
steel piles, pipes, drains, driveways or ramp that encounter during
excavation.
Submit proposals for their removal for the Engineer 's acceptance.
Employ a Licensed Surveyor who shall be responsible for surveying the site
and submit the results to the Engineer. Any excavation shall be carried out
from existing ground level, following a survey of the Site executed by a
Licensed Surveyor in accordance to the Engineer's Drawings and
Specifications.
Should the Contractor intend to use well points or deep well pumps for
dewatering the Site, he has to comply with the following requirements:
Submit and work to a quality control plan as agreed with the Engineer.
1.4.15 Safety
1.5 Definitions
2.1 General
Carry out the earthworks in accordance with compliance to the requirement of local
authorities.
When carrying out detailed design for the temporary supports in clause 1.4.1.1,
ensure the temporary works will withstand all loads, including those due to the
hydrostatic pressure, earth pressure, surcharge loads, overburden, effects of
surrounding properties, varying load conditions due to different stages of
constructions and comply with the Authorities’ requirements.
Ensure the factor of safety and permissible wall deflection as stipulated are achieved
by taking into account the effects of the designed temporary strutting or anchoring
system.
Design, supply, fix and remove all planking and strutting for the excavation
as required. Ensure that the sides of pits and trenches remain stable at all
times against all anticipated loadings.
Ensure the safety of the workmen and to prevent damage to any adjoining
property.
Provide necessary protective measures to ensure the stability of slopes during the
whole duration of the construction period and in the long term if relevant.
Check slopes from both cut and fill against slip failure to achieve the required factors
of safety as directed.
For slopes stabilized by beams, check the stability of both the overall slope and
slopes between beams.
For slopes formed in weathered or fresh rock such that joints dip into the excavation
are exposed, form the slopes on a continuous profile parallel to the joints to prevent
wedge failure.
Before proceeding to higher fill at every stage of filling works, report the strength of
the underlying soil to the Engineer for review and consent to proceed.
2.5.1 Ground Movement and Vibration Control for Existing Critical Structures or
Services
“Top soil” shall mean the top layer of soil that can support vegetation.
“Unsuitable Material” shall mean other than Approved Material and shall
include:
3.1.4 Rock
Loose boulders of a volume not exceeding one cubic metre each, concrete,
reinforced concrete, brickwork, steel or timber piles, materials such as earth,
gravel, disintegrated or decomposed masses, geologically semi-formed rock
like very dense cemented sand and other such hard and complex materials
that can be excavated using ordinary earth moving machines shall not be
classified as rock. Such materials shall be classified as ordinary materials.
In general, granular fill material shall conform to the requirements of types 1 and 2
materials as delineated below:
3.2.1 Type 1
3.2.2 Type 2
3.2.3 Gradation
% By mass passing
BS Sieve Size
Type 1 Type 2
75 mm 100 100
20 mm 60 - 100 60 - 100
10 mm 40 - 70 40 - 100
5 mm 25 - 45 25 - 85
600 micron 8 - 22 8 - 45
75 micron 0 - 10 0 - 10
3.2.4.1 Type 1
3.2.4.2 Type 2
The material passing the 425 micron BS sieve, when tested in accordance
with BS 1377-2, shall be non-plastic for Type 1 granular material and shall
have a plasticity index of less than 6% for Type 2 granular material. Report
for each test the amount of material retained on the sieve.
When required in the project, special fill material may consist of suitable material of
which at least 95 per cent shall pass a 125 mm BS sieve and at least 90 per cent
shall pass the 75 mm BS sieve. Up to 5 per cent of the material may be made up from
isolated boulders of maximum dimensions not exceeding half the thickness of the
layer of material being placed, provided that the fill can be compacted in the manner
as specified in Clause 4.7.
The coefficient of uniformity shall be greater than 10. The fraction passing a 75µm BS
sieve shall be less than 20% by weight and shall have the following characteristics:
Provide clean well-graded quarry waste from sources outside the Site. The material is
to be resistant to weathering. The maximum size particles in the material shall pass
through a rigid 200 mm square grid and the largest dimension of any particle shall not
exceed 300 mm. The material shall not have more than 10% of its particles passing a
0.75mm BS sieve.
Rock used in rock fill embankments shall, except for any specified external cover to
slopes or within 500 mm of formation levels, be of such size that it can be deposited
in horizontal layers each not exceeding 450 mm loose depth and extending over the
full available width of the embankment.
3.5 Hardcore
Hardcore shall consist of any combination of the above, together with broken brick
free from plaster, concrete, block or other sound hard materials broken to a maximum
gauge of 50mm thick (in any direction) well consolidated in layers not exceeding
150mm thick to the Engineer’s acceptance. The surface shall be dense and well
watered.
For the purpose of compaction defined by Clause 4.0, materials are grouped as
follows:
Includes clays with up to 20 percent of gravel and moisture content not less
than the value of the plastic limit (determined in accordance with BS 1377
Test No. 3) minus 4.
Include clays containing more than 20 per cent of gravel and/or having a
moisture content less than the value of the plastic limit (determined in
accordance with BS 1377 Test No. 3) minus 4, and well-graded sands and
gravel with a uniformity coefficient exceeding 10.
Includes sands and gravel with a uniformity coefficient of 10 or less, and all
silts and pulverised fuel ashes. Any soil containing 80 per cent or more
material in the particle size range 0.06 - 0.002 mm will be regarded as silt
for this purpose.
Naturally occurring materials within the site that are non-suitable due only to
excessive moisture content may be spread and dried. The use of material treated in
this way shall subject to the acceptance of the Engineer.
Blinding layer to the surfaces receiving sheet overlays or concrete shall be:
Geotextiles shall not be susceptible to bacteria and fungus attack and shall be
resistant to chemical action and not affected by exposure to ultra-violet light.
4.1.1 General
Carry out at least the following in preparing the site for excavation or fill.
Confirm the extent of work before proceeding:
(a) Break out old foundations, beds, drains, etc. Seal off drain ends and
remove contaminated earth. Backfill as necessary.
(b) Remove existing fences, gates, walls, roads, paved areas and other
site features as required.
(c) Remove trees, shrubs and hedges as shown on the drawings. Cut
down, grub up main roots and fill voids. Dispose of all wood using
methods approved by the Authorities.
(d) Clear site of rubbish and vegetation. Grub up and dispose of large
roots.
(e) Remove unwanted materials from site.
Install and calibrate two weeks before any excavation work starts.
Measure and monitor of the forces using load cells for at least
20% of the struts or anchors installed. The frequency of monitoring
shall be twice a week during the excavation and substructure
construction works.
4.1.3 Topsoil
Remove all Top Soil to full depth (including turf) from the areas of cuttings
and embankments, and other areas shown on the drawings. Remove topsoil
also from existing embankments required to receive additional fill and from
areas of new ditches and watercourses.
Keep a copy of the site investigation report on site for verification of the
ground.
Gently slope the earth surface to temporary ditches to enable surface water
to run off. Any ponding evident after rain shall be immediately pumped dry
and the area filled and compacted with suitable materials
Install and lay damp proof membrane / vapour barrier on blinding concrete
to receive floor slabs with minimum 300mm laps.
Excavation for reduced levels, bases, trenches for pipes, drains, channels and pipes,
etc. shall be executed to the dimensions, depths or levels shown on the Drawings.
All excavation shall be carried out in a workmanlike manner to lines, levels and
grades indicated in the Drawings.
Bottoms of all excavations shall be kept free from mud and water, trimmed clean,
protected from the effects of weather and thoroughly compacted and consolidated in
an approved manner and means, subject to the requirements of compaction.
Record and submit on a plan the depth of every excavation when complete excavation.
4.2.1.1 General
Arrange for the rapid dispersal of water shed on to the site from
any source. Where practicable, discharge the water into the
permanent outfall for the drainage system. Provide adequate
means for trapping silt on temporary systems discharging into
permanent drainage systems.
4.2.2 Dewatering
4.2.2.1 General
Remove all surplus materials that are not specified to be spread and leveled
on site and dispose of to a suitable location.
The excavation line for each foundation shall be not less than 50mm below
the foundation soffit.
(a) Remove the last 150 mm of excavations above formation level just
before inspection. Trim, level, water and well ram by approved
mechanical means to the excavations to the required profiles and
levels. Remove all loose, soft and defective materials, cut out the
sections and fill with Grade 15 concrete to receive the concrete binding.
(b) Keep the bottom of all excavations free from mud and water, trim clean,
protect from the effects of weather and thoroughly compact and
consolidate by approved means.
(c) Unless otherwise specified, seal formations within 4 hours of inspection
with concrete or other agreed blinding. The bottom of excavations for
raft, pad and spread foundations shall be inspected and approved by the
Engineer. The approved bearing strata must be quickly protected
against damage by laying the minimum thickness of concrete grade 15
within 4 hours of inspection.
(d) Remove any pockets of soft material or loose rock at the bottom of
excavation and fill the resulting cavities and any large fissures with
Grade 15 concrete, liquefied soil stabilizer or otherwise fill with Suitable
Material compacted in layers as required to achieve the design bearing
and settlement.
Do not permit constructional traffic other than that required for the
excavation and trimming, on the surface of the bottom of a cutting unless
the cutting is in Rock or as agreed.
Make good any damage to the sub-grade arising from such traffic on the
surface with same materials or materials having the same characteristics.
Ensure that the construction sequence comply with the accepted design
proposals. Obtain the approval from the Engineer and the design PE for
temporary supports for every level of strut before proceeding with further
excavations to the next level of struts.
4.3.1 General
Ensure the sides of pits and trenches remain stable at all times.
Where required by the nature of the materials being excavated, provide all
necessary planking, strutting, shoring, ground anchoring and any necessary
stagings for upholding the face of the excavation.
Alternatively, subject to the prior agreement, suitably batter the face of the
excavation.
Ensure the gaps between the waler and the retaining wall are properly
wedged or packed to Engineer’s acceptance.
Trenches and pits shall not be wider than is necessary for the efficient
laying and jointing of pipes or for other works to be carried out. Do not
excavate more than the agreed length of trench at any one time.
Ensure the bottom of all excavations is to the correct levels as required. Fill
any over-excavation of foundation pits or trenches below the specified levels
with Grade 15 concrete to the specified levels.
Remove any pockets of soft material or loose rock at the bottom of footing,
pits and trenches and fill the resulting cavities and any large fissures with
Grade 15 concrete, liquefied soil stabilizer or otherwise fill with Suitable
4.3.6 Spoil
(a) Any excavation greater than the nett volume required for the Works as
described in the Contract.
(b) Any additional excavation at or below the formation level to remove
unsuitable material.
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, the top edges of cutting shall
be neatly rounded to the dimensions shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. Such work shall be deemed to be included in the Contractor's rate for
cutting work.
4.4.2 Undulations
4.4.4 Drainage
Ensure the working areas are adequately drained throughout the period of
construction.
4.4.5 Benching
Ensure the cut slopes achieve the stability as required in Clause 2.3.
Where shown on the Drawings, slopes on the cross sections represent the
estimated requirements for the expected types of materials and these
slopes shall be subject to re-determination by the PE according to his
assessment of the materials encountered.
4.5.1 General
4.5.3.1 General
When blasting operations are being carried out, close any road
affected to traffic and erect the appropriate signs in accordance
with the latest “Code of Practice for Temporary Traffic Control”
published by the Land Transport Authority.
4.6.1 General
Excavations shall only be backfilled after the permanent works therein have
been approved and after the removal of any building debris or deleterious
material from the excavations.
Ensure that the areas to be filled are free from loose soil, rubbish and
standing water.
Spread and level material in even horizontal layers over the full width laid in
thickness appropriate to the compaction plant used and compact as soon as
practical to the requirement as specified.
Lay differing materials separately so that only one type of material occurs in
each layer.
(a) Make good by removing the material off the fill either to tip or
elsewhere until it is in a suitable physical condition for re-use, and
replacing it with suitable materials or concrete grade 15;
(b) Make good the material by mechanical or chemical means to improve
its stability; or
(c) Cease work on the material until its physical condition is again such
that it can be compacted as described in the Contract.
Stop all filling works when the weather is judged by the Engineer as would
adversely affect the compaction of the fill.
4.6.6.2 Unless otherwise specified, the natural ground over which filling is
to be placed shall be cleared of all loose boulders, grass, topsoil,
bushes, trees, roots and other vegetation. If the Engineer
considers that any underlying material is unstable or unsuitable,
he may direct it to be removed and replaced with approved
material.
4.6.6.3 Any overhanging rock ledges or caves within the foundation area
shall be removed before the placing of fill commences.
4.6.6.5 The construction of any section of fill shall not commence until the
foundation of that section has been approved by the Engineer.
4.7.1 General
Upon completion and before overlaying, the surface of the layer shall be
free from ridges, cracks, loose material, potholes, ruts or other defects.
Rectify such defects to the full thickness of the layer before overlaying.
The depth of each compacted layer shall not be greater than the maximum
depth of the compacted layer stipulated for each type of compaction plant.
Max Depth of
Max Depth of
Smooth- Force
Wheel- (kN) per
ed 100mm
Roller Width:
Grid Force
Roller (kN) per
100mm
Width:
Un- Un-
2.6 - 5.2 150 10 150 10
suitable suitable
Un- Un-
5.3 - 7.8 150 8 125 12
suitable suitable
Un- Un-
> 7.8 150 4 150 12
suitable suitable
Pneuma Wheel
-tic Load
Tyred (ton):
Roller
Un- Un-
1 - 1.5 125 6 150 10*
suitable suitable
Un- Un- Un- Un-
1.5 – 2 150 5
suitable suitable suitable suitable
Un- Un-
2 - 2.5 175 4 125 12
suitable suitable
Un- Un-
2.5 - 4 225 4 125 10
suitable suitable
Un- Un-
4–6 300 4 125 10
suitable suitable
Un- Un-
6–8 350 4 159 8
suitable suitable
Un- Un-
8 – 12 400 4 175 8
suitable suitable
Un- Un-
> 12 450 4 175 6
suitable suitable
Well-Graded
Uniformly-
Cohesive Soil Granular and Dry
Max Depth of
Max Depth of
Vibrat- Force
ory (kN) per
Roller 100mm
Width:
Vibrat- Static
ory Pressure
Plate under
compact Base
or Plate
(kN/m):
Well-Graded
Uniformly-
Cohesive Soil Granular and Dry
Max Depth of
Max Depth of
Vibro- Mass
Tamper Kilo-
gramme
:
Power Mass
Rammer Kilo-
gramme
:
Un- Un-
100 150 4 150 6
suitable suitable
Un- Un-
> 100 275 8 275 12
suitable suitable
Tamp- More
ing than 40 225 4 150 12 250 4
roller kN
Drop- Drop of
ping hammer
weight of
compact weight
or over
5KN:
1m to
600 4 600 8 450 8
2m
Un- Un-
over 2m 600 2 600 4
suitable suitable
The number of passes is the number of times that each point on the surface
of the layer being traversed by the compaction plant (or struck in the case of
power rammers or dropping weight compactors).
The effective width of a pneumatic-tyred roller is the sum of the widths of the
individual wheeltracks together with the sum of the spacing between the
wheeltracks provided that each spacing does not exceed 230mm. Where
the spacing exceeds 230mm the effective width shall be taken as the sum of
the widths of the individual wheeltracks only.
The force per 100mm width of roll is the total weight on the roller divided by
the total roll width. Where a smooth-wheeled roller has more than one axle
the machine shall be assessed on the basis of the axle giving the highest
value of force per 100mm width.
Wheel load is the total weight of the roller divided by the number of wheels.
For items marked with an asterisk (*), the rollers shall be towed by track-
laying tractors. Self-propelled rollers are unsuitable.
(a) The depth of layer shall be that for the type of plant requiring the least
depth of layer
(b) The number of passes shall be that for the type of plant requiring the
greatest number of passes
Spread and level each layer of Rock fill and systematically compact by at
least 12 passes of either:
(a) A towed vibratory roller with a static load per metre width of roll of at
least 1800 kg, or
(b) A grid roller with a load per metre width of roll of at least 8000 kg, or
(c) Other approved plant.
If the rock contains sufficient soft material for satisfactory compaction to the
requirements of Table in 4.7.3 for well graded granular soil, compact the fill
according to the table.
(a) Make good by removing the deteriorated material and replace with
Suitable Material, or
(b) Make good the material by mechanical or chemical means to improve
its property, or
(c) Cease work on the material until its physical condition is again such
that it can be compacted as required.
4.8 Filling: Fill Adjacent to Bridge Abutments, Culverts and Retaining Walls
Use Special Fill Material as defined in Clause 3.2 within the zones as
stipulated in table 4.8.1 below.
Provide a filter drain layer when filling behind structures with weepholes.
The filter drain shall consist of clean, hard and durable broken stones or
hardcore conforming to the grading as set out in the table below.
Place the larger stones adjacent to the weep-holes and the smaller particles
behind and above the larger layer.
Do not place fill against concrete structures within 21 days after placing
concrete unless sufficient supports have been provided to the walls to
withstand the pressure by filling to the acceptance of the Engineer.
4.8.4 Compaction
Place fill in horizontal layers of thickness and compact using the appropriate
plant in compliance with Clause 4.7.
The degree of compaction shall be at least 95% of the maximum dry density
achievable of the material.
Do not use heavy compaction equipment close to the back of the wall.
4.9.1 Material
Ensure Suitable Materials are being used for embankment fill, including
materials which may be initially wetter than specified but become Suitable
after drying. For capping layers ensure specified material including topsoil
are placed to a consolidated thickness below the formation level.
4.9.3.2 Finishing
Fill surface voids with broken fragments before the next layer is
placed.
During construction, control constructional traffic uniformly over the full width
of the embankments.
Use material as in Clause 3.4. Provide thicker layer than specified if necessary to
make up levels from stripped site levels to underside of slabs.
4.11.1 General
(a) Protect from exposure to light, except for a maximum of 5 hours during
laying. Protect from all materials listed as potentially deleterious by the
manufacturer.
(b) Before commencing laying, remove humps and sharp projections from
the ground and fill hollows. Do not stretch or bridge the geotextile over
irregularities and ensure that the specified lap is maintained.
(c) Take care to avoid damage to geotextile by vehicles, plant or by tipping
material from excessive height. Do not allow construction traffic over
geotextiles until covered by the full thickness of fill.
(d) Temporarily weight edges of sheet with fill and lay a maximum of 15m
of geotextile before covering to prevent uplift. Place fill as soon as
possible after laying and within a maximum of 24 hours.
(e) Place geotextile patches over tears with minimum lap of 300mm
beyond extent of damage and cover immediately to retain in place.
4.1.1. Jointing
Trim and cultivate cut or filled areas that are to be turfed as soon as possible after
completion of the earthworks.
4.13.1 General
5.1 Submissions
Submit to the Engineer prior to the start of the Work unless otherwise
agreed.
Extend to the Engineer, a copy of the factual report for additional site
investigation conducted.
5.1.4.1 General
Prepare and submit the quality control plan for Engineer’s acceptance prior
to starting work.
(a) Intermediate inspections if the works are in place for more than 1 week.
(b) If there has been a change in loading conditions, including impact.
(c) After any adverse weather conditions.
Submit a method statement for acceptance indicating the proposed frequency and
details of the inspections.
At least 21 days before filling work commences, submit full details of the sources and
types of the proposed filling materials together with 25kg representative samples of
each type from each source.
Carry out the following tests on all proposed fill materials at the rate of one test for
each representative sample:
When directed, test all imported fill for compliance with specified limits on
contamination to ensure that material is 'clean' relative to the proposed end
use. Propose and submit the specific criteria, schedule and timing of tests
required to Engineer for acceptance.
SECTION 02370
BORED PILING
INDEX TO SPECIFICATION
CLAUSE PAGE
SECTION 02370
BORED PILING
INDEX TO SPECIFICATION
CLAUSE PAGE
5.8 Backfilling Empty Boring ...................................................................................................... 34
5.9 Grouting of Piles .................................................................................................................. 34
5.10 Tolerances ........................................................................................................................... 35
5.11 Protection to Piles ................................................................................................................ 36
5.12 Replacement of Piles ........................................................................................................... 36
5.13 Cleaning Up ......................................................................................................................... 37
5.14 Non-Performance of Working Piles ..................................................................................... 37
5.15 Cutting Off Pile Heads ......................................................................................................... 37
5.16 Tension Piles ....................................................................................................................... 37
5.17 Lateral Load Resisting Piles ................................................................................................ 38
5.18 Noise and Disturbance ........................................................................................................ 38
5.19 As Built Pile Penetration Length, Final Survey and As-Built Drawing ................................. 38
5.20 Removal on Completion ...................................................................................................... 38
This specification section is the copyright of DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. No reproduction either in part or
in whole in any manner whoever is allowed without written permission from DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd.
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the Particular Specification, and all other contract documents.
This technical specification shall form part of the Contract and the Contractor shall allow for all
obligations, requirements, considerations, etc. to comply with the specification. The Contractor is
also deemed to have visited the site and fully acquainted himself as to the nature and
practicability of the works. No claims will be entertained as a result of his failure to do all of the
above.
The Consulting Civil and Structural Engineer is DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. The Contractor is to
note that when the term ‘Engineer’ in the following Specification means the representative of the
Consulting Engineer.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Engineer is referred to in the following specification,
such term shall be deemed to mean The Architect or Superintending Officer’s Representative (S.
O. Rep.) as defined in the Articles of Agreement or any other person designated in writing by the
Architect or the Superintending Officer (S.O.) from time to time to exercise the power of the
Architect or S.O.
The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Uniform Building By-
Laws of Malaysia, the Malaysian Standards and Codes of Practices, Malaysian Standards
Eurocodes current at the date of tender and to the satisfaction of the local Building Authorities
empowered to control the Works, the Specifications and drawings supplied to the Contractor and
any other instructions issued by the Engineer/Architect or their representative from time to time.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
Any reference in the Specifications to a Malaysian Standard (MS), Eurocodes (EC) or Code of
Practice (CP) shall imply the latest version at the time of tender of the applicable Standards or
Code of Practices. Should there be any discrepancy between these Specifications and the MS,
EC or CP, the more onerous requirement/s shall be adopted. The Engineer has the sole
discretion to modify or upgrade the specifications, drawings and documents to comply fully with
MS Eurocode requirements at no additional cost and time to the Contract.
The Works under this section comprise the construction of small and large diameter
cast-in-place bored piles for the foundation of the proposed buildings.
1.1.1 This section covers the requirements for the construction of bored piles. The
piles may be used as foundations to support principally vertical loads, or
may be used to form embedded retaining walls resisting principally
horizontal loads, including:
1.1.3 The Contractor shall make allowance in his tender for compliance with all
the Specifications and other requirements necessary for proper execution
and completion of the Works to the Engineer's satisfaction.
1.1.4 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for achieving the required loading
capacity for each pile with appropriate factor of safety and compliance with
other performance Specifications contained herein.
1.1.5 Temporary linings shall be provided for the full depth of top soil, soft clays
and loosed sand unless boreholes are stabilised with bentonite. Linings
shall be withdrawn. Lost casings will not be paid for.
1.1.6 The Contractor shall make provisions in his tender and submit details, at the
time of tender, of his proposed method for the inspection by the Engineer of
the formation of every borehole prior to concreting. The method must be
approved by the Engineer.
1.1.7 Every borehole must be inspected and approved by the Engineer prior to
concreting. Engineer's approval does not absolve the Contractor of his sole
responsibility to achieve the required load capacity for the piles.
1.1.8 Notwithstanding the provisional lengths allowed for in the bills, the
Contractor shall submit detailed geotechnical calculations for his proposed
length of each type of pile, and shall be responsible to ensure that the piles
shall carry the specified ultimate loads based on the length proposed by the
Contractor.
1.1.9 All piles shall be concreted using 'Tremie' pipe irrespective of the presence
or absence of water in the borehole.
1.1.10 The Contractor shall submit with his tender the name and Curriculum Vitae
(CV) of qualified Geotechnical Engineer(s) who shall be full time on Site and
who shall propose the formation level of all piles. The proposed
Geotechnical Engineer shall possess local relevant experience in piling
works as specified in Section 01016 Particular Specification.
1.1.11 There shall also be at least one (1) Geotechnical Engineer on standby, in
the events the Geotechnical Engineer(s) referred in Clause 1.1.10 is unable
to perform his duties temporarily. The standby Geotechnical Engineer shall
possess local relevant experience with piling works as specified in Section
01016 Particular Specification.
1.1.12 The Contractor shall submit to the Resident Engineer for record and send to
the Engineer, if required, properly identified and labelled soil samples taken
at every change of stratum for each pile.
1.1.13 The Contractor shall, during the Contract, maintain at Site all necessary
apparatus and equipment to carry out unconfined compression tests on soil
samples taken at the formation level of each pile. The test records shall be
supplied to the Engineer together with the piling records.
1.1.14 The Contractor shall submit the as-built pile penetration records prior to pile
head trimming. Also refer to Clause 5.19.
Read this work section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the other work
sections as follows:
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, ensure all of the Works comply
with the relevant requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or
referenced in the body of the Specification. Alternative Standards and
Codes may be proposed for approval by the Engineer, provided it can be
demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the
requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Refer to the following technical reference for guidance in carrying out the
works:
Take into account of the design requirements as set out in Clause 2.1
below.
Submit the design to the Engineer for acceptance. Design proposals in (c)
and (d) are to be endorsed by a PE (Civil).
Submit the CV of the personnel to be engaged for the above including the
PE’s, for Engineer’s acceptance.
The set values shall not be less onerous than the ones set forth in the
Instrumentation and Monitoring drawings.
Where applicable, prior to and upon completion of the site works, carry out a
condition survey to adjacent buildings in accordance with the requirements
of Section 01017 Condition Survey and Monitoring. Submit all records to
the Engineer and adjacent property owners where directed.
Take cognisance of and co-ordinate with other contractors on site who may
be carrying out instrumentation and monitoring works to avoid duplication of
installation and readings.
Adequately maintain roads and footpaths within and adjacent to the site and
keep clear of mud and debris.
The soil report included in this Contract is for the reference of the
Contractor only. Neither the Consultants nor the Client accept
responsibility for its accuracy or implications if actual soil conditions
are found to be different during the progress of Works.
The Contractor may, at his own cost and with the written approval of
the Engineer, conduct additional soil tests if he so desires.
1.4.7.5 Contamination
The Contractor shall determine, probe and/or investigate the position of all
existing services within the Site and shall take all precautions to protect and
prevent damage to them. All damage caused to the active services shall be
reinstated by the Contractor at his own cost and time. The Engineer shall
provide to the Contractor, any information available to him for the guidance of
the Contractor only.
Any other unknown services which are found within the work areas shall be
either diverted or protected by the Contractor. The Contractor shall not be
entitled to any additional cost or time on account of unforeseen services found
within the contract boundaries which may affect the Contract Work.
The Contractor shall also refer to other parts of the Contract Documents on
the requirements to deal with existing services affected by the Works.
1.4.9 Protection
1.4.10 Obstructions
1.4.13 Safety
The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all slopes and
excavations, including bored holes for pile installation, and shall take all
necessary precautions for the safety of personnel in the area of piling
operations. Where rocks and hard material are encountered during boring
which require manual excavation with pneumatic tools, the Contractor shall
ensure that adequate linings are placed above the working level and that
sufficient ventilation is provided for the well-being of the workmen.
(a) BRE Digest 251 (1995) Assessment of damage in low rise building
(b) BS 8008: Guide to safety precautions and procedures for the
construction and descent of machine-bored shaft for piling and other
purposes
1.5 Definitions
(a) Pile Dimensions Piles dimension specified in pile layout drawing(s) / piling
schedule are the minimum acceptable dimensions
(b) Rock Material classified as grade I to III In table 10 “Scale of weathering grades
of rock mass” in BS 5930:1999+A2:2010.
(c) Rock Weathering classified as Grade I to IV in Table 2.2 and 2.3 in CP4:2003.
1.6.1 At the outset and before the commencement of installation of working piles,
make provision for trial piles / ultimate test piles (UTP), numbers and load
as specified in Section 01016 Particular Specification, shall be carried out
to confirm the frictional and end-bearing parameters for the design of
working piles in this Contract. Number of piles to be tested shall be one (1)
number or not less than 0.5% of the total number of working piles in this
Contract, whichever greater. The locations of the ultimate load tests shall be
decided by the Engineer. The Contractor shall carry out soil investigation
adjacent to the trial pile location to the depth 5m below the pile toe, and
submit the report to the Engineer for approval prior to the pile installation.
The test piles shall be fully instrumented (with at least 4 VW strain gauges
at each soil stratum layers [at least 5 layers of VW strain gauges], and 3
telltales installed in the pile) to determine the frictional and end-bearing
parameters.
1.6.3 The Contractor shall, at the time of his tender, submit the details of
proposed instrumentation and the method of installation and testing the
ultimate test piles. The ultimate load test shall be carried out using
kentledge and jacking method. The method and the extent of
instrumentation shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval. Any additional
instrumentation required by the Engineer shall be installed at no extra cost
or time to the Contract.
1.6.4 During the Contract, provisions shall also be made for carrying out working
load tests (WLT). Number of piles to be tested shall be two (2) numbers or
not less than 1.0% of the total number of working piles in this Contract,
whichever greater. The piles shall be tested to working load requirements at
locations decided by the Engineer. The provisional numbers of working load
tests to be carried out and their test loads are as specified in Section 01016
Particular Specification. These provisions may be changed at the
discretion of the Engineer.
1.6.5 All working load tests shall be carried out using kentledge and jacking
method within the Contract period. The Contractor shall submit details of the
load tests at the time of tender. The Contractor may also propose any other
appropriate means of carrying out these load tests, subject to the approval
of the Engineer.
1.6.6 In addition to the above, provisions shall also be made for carrying out Pile
Dynamic Analyser (PDA) tests and Pile Integrity Test (PIT) tests. Number of
piles to tested shall be two (2) numbers and not be less than 2.0% of the
total number of piles in this Contract, whichever greater, within the Contract
period. The provisional numbers of PDA and PIT tests to be carried out are
specified in Section 01016 Particular Specification. These provisions may
also be changed at the discretion of the Engineer.
1.7 Programme
1.7.1 The Contractor shall, with his tender, submit a detailed programme showing
the sequence and manner in which piling and other works are to be
executed. The actual construction would be carried out in a sequence and
to a programme agreed with the Engineer. Where a sequence is specified in
the Contract, it shall be adhered to.
1.8.1 Defective work shall be all work which, in the opinion of the Engineer, does
not fully comply with this Specification or the Drawings. The Contractor
shall make good or carry out such additional works at his own costs and
expenses as may be necessary to make good all defective work to the
Engineer's satisfaction.
The required working load and sizes of the piles are indicated in the drawings,
together with an indication of the required pile penetration depth.
The Contractor shall submit written evidence and details of personnel who
would supervise the Works, to satisfy the Engineer that his supervisory staff
has relevant experience.
Any of the piles, when under static or dynamic load test, is to satisfy the performance
criteria as set out below, unless otherwise specified in the Section 01016 Particular
specification.
2.2.1 The maximum permitted settlement at one time the Specified Working load
(SWL) is to be 7mm, increased by 2.2% for every meter depth of pile length
beyond 30m.
2.2.2 The maximum permitted settlement at two times SWL is to be 13mm for
SWL lesser than 65 tonnes, increasing by 0.2mm for every tonne above 65
tonnes, until maximum 25mm.
2.3.1 The Contractor shall submit, at the time of tender, drawings showing the
sizes and distribution of piles under each column if other alternatives are
proposed.
2.3.3 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the design and installation of
working piles which shall support the specified loads with the appropriate
factor of safety and partial factors in compliance with MS EN 1997-1 2004.
The Contractor shall guarantee that the differential settlement between any
two (2) piles shall be less than 5 mm.
2.3.4 The ultimate test pile shall be designed to fail beyond the ultimate
geotechnical capacity calculated by partial factors in compliance with MS
EN 1997-1 2004. The test load setup shall be designed accordingly.
2.3.6 Piles resisting lateral loads shall have a minimum safety factor of 2.5.
2.3.7 The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer with detailed design calculations
that his proposed design is satisfactory and will have to make whatever
modifications as required by the Engineer. Engineer's approval does not
relieve the Contractor of his sole responsibility as stipulated under this
Specification.
2.3.8 Round links or helix of appropriate size and spacing in accordance with the
Code shall be provided but shall not be less than 10 mm diameter and
space at not more than 12 times the diameter of the vertical reinforcement.
2.4.1 Notwithstanding the provisional depths shown in the tender documents, the
Contractor shall submit at the time of tender, calculations showing the depth
of penetration for each type of pile.
2.4.2 In the case of rock is encountered during bored pile installation, the
Contractor shall ensure sufficient socketing length into rock. There will be no
additional time and cost in such cases. The socketing depth are indicated in
the contract drawings for each pile type and at each zone.
2.4.3 Should the results of ultimate load test and working load tests prove that the
penetration of piles proposed by the Contractor are inadequate, the
Contractor shall install longer pile penetrations and/or bigger sizes of piles
to achieve the specified geotechnical capacities as directed by the
Engineer, with no time implications.
2.4.4 Where on the instructions of the Engineer during execution of Works, the
piles are required to penetrate deeper than the Contractor's proposed and
approved levels, the Contractor will be paid for this length.
2.5.3 No working piles shall be installed until the ultimate load tests on the test
piles have been conducted and approved by the Engineer.
The system and equipment offered by the Contractor shall be capable of sinking
bored holes between the ranges of 150mm to 300mm in diameter for micropiles
and 500 mm to 2500 mm in diameter for bored piles and to such depths as
necessary to achieve the required capacity of each pile. This would generally include
depths from 30m to 60m, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
2.6.1 The equipment may generally include bucket auger, flight auger or grab
type system and shall be capable of being modified to deal with whatever
soil conditions encountered during the progress of Works. This shall include
but not limited to the followings: -
2.6.2 The system should be able to sink and remove casings for the support of
the bored hole to whatever depth that may be required and without
disturbance to the ground surrounding the piles. Lost casings shall not be
paid for.
Based on the results of the Building Damage Assessment as set out in Clause 1.4.2,
propose the allowable ground settlement and vibration limits due to the Works taking
into account the vulnerability and sensitivity of the adjacent properties.
State the values for alert and work suspension levels in the submission in accordance
with the requirements of Building Control Act and Building Control Regulations.
Notwithstanding the above, ensure that the ground movements and vibrations
generated by the works comply with the following if more stringent:
Sections of the report relating to individual owners of the nearby and adjacent
buildings/properties must be distributed to the respective owners prior to commencing
any Works on Site.
Any delays in the issuance of the Permit to Commence Piling/Building Works due to
either an incomplete report, or a report unacceptable to the Authorities remains the full
responsibility of the Contractor.
Provide adequate record to identify changes that occurred and to allow changes to
methods of the construction works such as to avoid or minimise damage to the
Surveyed Buildings.
When planning for suitable methods and instrumentation for the survey, take account
of the limits of movement and levels of vibration, as well as in the respective
specifications relevant to the other construction works. Also take account of the
frequency of monitoring as indicated in the respective sections.
Take all necessary actions to ensure compliance with the latest noise control
regulations imposed by the authority having jurisdiction. In the absence of any
guidelines, the values shown in the table herein shall be adopted. The noise level
(maximum allowable equivalent continuous noise level measured over a period of 5
minutes in dB) at the nearest occupied building outside the Site is not to exceed the
following maximum permissible noise level.
Types of
affected
7am 7pm 10pm 7am 7pm 10pm 7am 7pm 10pm
buildings
to to to to to to to to to
7pm 10pm 7am 7pm 10pm 7am 7pm 10pm 7am
(a) Hospital,
school,
75 55 75 55 No Work
home for
dBA dBA dBA dBA
the aged,
sick etc
No
(b) Residential
Work
Buildings
located less
than 150m 90 70 55 90 70
from the dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA
construction
site
(c) Buildings
other than
90 70 90 70 90 70
those in (a)
dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA
and (b)
above
3.1 General
3.1.1 The Contractor shall programme his work in such a way that the ultimate
load test pile can be installed and tested prior to commencement of working
piles.
3.1.2 The installation of all working piles shall not commence until the completion of
trial/preliminary ultimate test pile and approval of the Engineer in writing has
been obtained.
3.1.3 The Contractor shall make provision for Ultimate Load Tests and Working
Load Tests as specified under Clause 1.6.
3.1.4 The Contractor shall submit detailed proposals of the method of testing for
the Engineer's approval.
3.1.5 The Contractor shall allow for all costs and expenses for building up the
piles and pile caps or other means, where the pile has a deep cut-off and
the testing is proposed from existing ground level.
3.1.6 The Contractor should also allow for any special excavation of a temporary
cofferdam as appropriate around the test pile so that friction from the top
soil above the true cut-off level can be excluded and to allow the pile cap
construction.
3.2.1 All test loads shall be monitored by the Engineer and arrangements for
testing approved by him, before commencement.
3.2.2 Settlement readings shall be taken by means of two (2) dial gauges to an
accuracy of 0.01 mm. Additional readings shall be taken by means of an
accurate dumpy level on a minimum of two scales reading to 0.5 mm
accuracy. Reference datum shall be two benchmarks, established for this
purpose on firm supports.
3.2.3 The Contractor will provide all equipment, facilities and competent
personnel to assist the Engineer in taking readings and monitoring testing.
3.2.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of the testing
equipment and shall provide calibration certificates for the jacking, load cell
and dial gauge equipment, prior to the commencement of load test.
3.3.1 The piles generally shall be tested by means of kentledge, load cell and
jacking. Testing with other methods may be permitted subject to approval of
Contractor's proposal by the Engineer. In such cases, the Contractor will
have to make whatever modifications that are required by the Engineer at
no extra cost.
3.3.2 For working piles, the test load shall be twice the working load. For larger
piles, this load factor may be reduced at the Engineer’s discretion. The
Engineer reserves the right to modify the loading sequence and load factor
at no cost and time implication to the Contract.
3.3.3 Boring and installation of piles shall be suspended during a load test unless
prior approval from the Engineer is obtained.
3.3.5 The test load shall be applied by means of a jack of capacity not less than
two and half times the working load and capable of measurement to within
one tonne of accuracy, against a kentledge which shall be to the approval of
the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of the
testing equipment and will provide calibration certificate for all jacking
equipment. The Engineer will supervise the performance of the test. The
Contractor shall provide skilled staff to assist in taking and recording
readings of settlement and jack pressure gauges.
3.3.6 All readings of settlement shall be taken from a minimum of two (2) dial
gauges to an accuracy of 0.05 mm. Additional readings shall be taken from
a minimum of two (2) scales and two (2) benchmarks to an accuracy of 0.5
mm. The Contractor shall keep full records of load tests as directed by the
Engineer. Two (2) sets of such records must be submitted, including load
settlement curves.
3.3.7 The test load shall be applied by means of a jack of capacity not less than
three times the working load and capable of measurement to within one
tonne of accuracy, against a kentledge which shall be to the approval of the
Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of the testing
equipment and will provide calibration certificates for all jacking equipment.
The Engineer will supervise the performance of the test. The Contractor
shall provide skilled staff to assist in taking and recording readings of
settlement and jack pressure gauges.
3.3.8 All readings of settlement shall be taken from a minimum of two (2) dial
gauges to an accuracy of 0.01 mm. Additional readings shall be taken from
a minimum of two (2) scales and two (2) benchmarks to an accuracy of 0.5
mm. The Contractor shall keep full records of load tests as directed by the
Engineer. Two (2) sets of such records must be submitted, including load
settlement curves.
3.4.1 Install, prior to the commencement of piling work, the full instrumented trial
piles as stipulated in Clause 1.6 in this Contract. This pile shall not be a
working pile and is for the purpose of conducting an ultimate load test. The
position of such trial pile will be decided by the Engineer.
3.4.2 The trial piles shall therefore be installed to depths which will give ultimate
bearing resistance of at least three (3) times the nominal working load of the
pile. The onus for installing piles to achieve the ultimate bearing capacity
shall rest with the Contractor. Notwithstanding, the Engineer reserve the
right to amend the parameters if the Engineer, in his opinion, are not
representative of the results, with no time and cost
3.4.3 The Contractor shall submit detailed method statements for bored pile
installation and the carrying out of pile testing.
3.4.4 The Contractor shall conduct soil investigations with boreholes adjacent to
trial pile location. The depth of the borehole shall terminate at at least 5m or
at 3 times the trial pile diameters. The soil investigation shall obtain the soil
samples at each layer, with SPT conducted at 3m spacing in each of the
ultimate test piles.
3.4.5 The base of the pile shall be thoroughly clean, sound and free from loose
sand deposit, laitance, silt prior to concreting. The Contractor shall clean the
base using air lift and/or other approved method. All piles bases shall be
post grouted as per Specification.
3.4.6 The purpose of the ultimate load test is to determine the factor of safety for
the nominal working load specified and/or penetration depths to which all
subsequent working piles shall be installed. The trial pile is to be of the
same material and dimensions as the working piles and installed with the
same type of boring method, cleaning as stipulated in Clause 5.3.1.8 and
5.5, and casting by the same method and the same workmanship of working
piles which are to be installed later.
3.4.7 If it is deemed necessary, at the completion of the ultimate load test, the
Engineer shall vary the soil design parameters for shaft and end bearing of
the working piles. The Contractor shall not claim for any extra payment as a
result of this change.
3.4.8 The trial pile shall be capable of sustaining a test load of not less than three
(3) times the nominal working load before ultimate failure.
3.4.9 The trial pile shall be loaded in cumulative equal increments of 25, 50, 75,
100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275 and 300 percent of the nominal
working load of the pile until ultimate failure. An increment of load shall be
permitted only if the settlement due to the previous increment has reached
equilibrium, i.e. 0.1mm settlement in 60 minutes. The trial pile shall be
deemed to have reached ultimate failure when the pile continues to settle
without an increase in the test load.
3.4.10 Cyclical loading consisting of three (3) cycles will be used at the discretion
of the Engineer. The first cycle of loading shall be loading the pile to 150
percent of the nominal working load in six equal increments and unloading
to zero percent of the nominal working load in 6 equal decrements. The
second cycle of loading shall be loading the pile in eight (8) equal
increments of 25 percent each up to 200 percent of the nomimal working
load of the pile and unloading fully in eight (8) equal decrements to zero
percent of the nominal working load.
3.4.11 The third cycle of loading shall be loading the pile in twelve (12) equal
increments up to 300 etc percent of the nominal working load of the pile until
ultimate failure is reached.
3.4.12 Test load for ultimate load shall be at least 3.0 times the working load or the
load under which the pile fails, whichever is greater. The required test load
should be estimated before installing the testing equipment.
3.5.1.1 Load incrementally up to 1.5 times the working load and maintain
test load for 24 hours (1st cycle) or until equilibrium is reached,
whichever is greater. Levels and dial gauge readings will be
recorded hourly during this period. The pile would then be
unloaded in similar decrements and the residual settlement noted.
3.5.1.3 After minimum 12 hours wait, reload the pile incrementally to twice
the working load. Maintain the test load for at least 24 hours (2nd
cycle) or until equilibrium is reached, whichever is greater, with
hourly settlement readings. The pile will then be unloaded in
similar decrements and the residual settlement noted.
3.5.1.4 Unload the pile in decrements and note any residual settlement.
3.5.2 In the course of piling operations, the Engineer will select a number of piles
which shall be load tested as described in the Specification. The actual
number of tests to be carried out shall be decided by the Engineer and the
rates quoted by the Contractor for the load testing in his tender shall apply,
except where additional tests are necessary due to the abandonment of the
pile tests or because of the failure of piles.
3.5.3 The working test piles shall be subjected to a test load of two (2) times the
working load, i.e. total load to be carried by each pile excluding its
selfweight. If the Engineer has any doubts about the carrying capacity of
any pile, the period of loading shall be extended at his discretion at the
Contractor's costs and expenses.
3.5.4 A working pile will be considered as having failed to satisfy the test if the
test is not meeting the performance criteria as stipulated in Clause 2.2 and
3.7.
3.6.1 Should any test (ultimate load test or working load test) have to be
discontinued due to: -
then the Contractor will have to carry out two (2) further tests entirely at his
own expense as directed by the Engineer.
The test shall be abandoned and the Contractor shall, entirely at his own cost
and expense, carry out two (2) further tests to the Engineer's instructions. The
cost of the abandoned test shall be borne by the Contractor.
3.7.1 A working test pile shall be deemed to have failed if its maximum settlement
at the pile cut-off level under the test load exceeds the performance criteria
as stated in the Contract.
3.7.2 A working test pile, loaded to 2.0 times working load, shall also be deemed
to have failed if the residual settlement exceeds 40% of the settlement
under test load or 10 mm whichever is less, even if the settlement under test
load is satisfactory.
3.7.3 Ultimate failure of a test pile shall be deemed to be at that loading under
which the trial test pile continues to settle or sink without addition to, or
increase of, the test load applied to the pile. The nominal working load shall
be deemed to be one-third of that load which causes ultimate failure.
3.7.4 An ultimate load test pile shall also be deemed to have failed under loading
test when any one of the following observations is recorded: -
(a) Any portion of the test pile is found to have cracked, crumbled,
distorted from its original shape or alignment or deflected from its
original position, etc.
(b) The pile under test load continues to settle or sink without any increase
in the load applied.
(c) The loading test is abandoned due to instability of the kentledge, or
altering or tampering of the reference benchmarks or datum, or scales
or dial gauges, or surveyor's levels by the Contractor.
(d) Any portion of the pile shaft shows any signs of failure such as cracks,
distortion or deflection, etc.
(e) The head of the pile settles 10% or more of the pile diameter, or 50 mm
whichever is less.
(f) The criteria for performance criteria as stated in the Contract for the
first two cycles for working test piles is exceeded, and/or 25mm at 2.5
times the nominal working load and/or test discontinued.
A further test shall then be carried out on another trial pile or working pile at
the Contractor's costs and expenses including any consequent standing
time.
3.7.5 Should the ultimate capacity of a trial pile fail to reach three (3) times the
nominal working load of the pile, the trial pile shall be deemed to have failed
to achieve the required bearing capacity. The Contractor shall then install an
additional trial pile to a new depth and repeat the ultimate load test to
determine the depth and driving criteria to which working piles shall be
installed to sustain a load equal to at least three (3) times the nominal
working load of the pile.
3.7.6 Should the additional trial pile again fail to achieve the required bearing
capacity, two (2) new trial piles shall be installed and the ultimate load tests
repeated until the specified acceptance criteria is achieved. The time and
cost of installing all additional trial piles and carrying out further ultimate load
tests as a result of failure of the first trial pile shall be borne entirely by the
Contractor.
3.8.1 For every working or ultimate pile that fails the test under Clause 3.6 and/or
Clause 3.7, the Contractor shall have to carry out two (2) further tests
including the installation of additional test piles, entirely at his own costs and
expenses and time, to the satisfaction of the Engineer and as directed.
3.8.2 In the event that eight or more piles fail then it shall be deemed that the
entire piling works has failed. All direct and consequential damages and/or
losses suffered due to failure of this part of the Contract will have to be
borne by the Contractor.
3.8.3 In the event of the working test pile failure, the Engineer may require
installation of additional and/or compensating piles as he deems fit and
entirely at the Contractor's costs and expenses. Engineering design costs
and the associated structural costs of remedial works shall also be at the
Contractor's costs and expenses.
In the event that a pile fails a lateral working load test, carry out remedial
measures as follows:
3.8.4.2 Excavation of all materials for a distance of not less than 5 metres
from pile face around the entire pile to minimum 1m below the
level of the pile cap soffit. The width of excavation is to be the
same on all sides of the pile.
3.8.4.3 Backfilling and compaction of the excavation hard against the pile
and testing and re-testing as appropriate. Finally, completion of
backfilling and compaction to the level of the top of the pile cap.
4.0 MATERIALS
Do not change sources of supply until it has been demonstrated that the materials
from the new source can meet all the specified requirements.
Remove from Site any material that fails to comply with the Specifications.
Drilling fluid including Bentonite supplied to the site and prior to mixing is to
be in accordance with API Specification 13A 5th Edition (1993) Drilling Fluid.
4.3 Water
Water used for the construction is to be clean and free from harmful matter in solution
or suspension.
4.4 Concrete
Concrete for piles shall be in accordance with the Concrete Section of this
Specification.
4.4.1 Concrete shall be an approved mix, having characteristic strength at the age
of 28 days of 35 MPa unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, with
minimum slump of 100 mm. All materials for making concrete shall be of
best quality and shall comply with current issues of appropriate European
Standards (EN). The water/cement ratio shall at all times be the minimum
required to produce concrete of a workability appropriate to the method of
placing and compaction and to avoid softening of clay due to excess water
in the concrete, and in no event greater than 0.5.
4.4.2 Design Mixes: Mix design to comply with requirements as set out in Table 1.
C45/55
C40/50
C35/45
C32/40
C25/30
C20/25
C16/20
C12/15
Strength Class
Characteristic Strength at
50 45 40 35 32 25 20 16 12
28 days, fck (N/mm2)
Characteristic Strength at
60 55 50 45 40 30 25 20 15
28 days, fck,cube (N/mm2 )
Maximum water/cement
0.4 0.4 0.45 0.45 0.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.7
ratio
relevant European Standards, and the results shall be sent to the Engineer
for his approval, prior to the commencement of Work.
4.4.4 The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's approval his proposals on
concrete mixes and suppliers of materials, including results of preliminary
tests on concrete prior to commencing work on Site.
4.4.5 In cases where it is intended that the temporary linings are to be withdrawn
without the assistance of the mechanical oscillation methods, a retarding
additive to concrete shall be used provided it is approved by the Engineer
and is used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
4.4.9 Sulphates
4.5.1 The Contractor shall furnish the name of the intended concrete supplier for
approval. The Engineer reserves the right to inspect the supplier's facilities
and to require samples of cement, fine and coarse aggregates and prepared
admixtures for testing. The cost of such tests shall be borne by the
Contractor.
4.5.2 The Contractor shall take full responsibility, notwithstanding the Engineer's
approval, to ensure that all ready-mixed concrete conforms to BS 1926 and
this Specification. Concrete which does not comply shall be rejected and
shall be immediately removed from the Site.
4.5.3 The Contractor shall furnish a valid copy of the Certificate of Conformity to
MS EN 206, prior to the commencement of Works.
4.5.5 The Contractor shall furnish at least one day in advance the date set for
each casting of concrete.
4.5.6 For each truck load of concrete delivered, the following information shall
appear on the delivery docket:
4.5.7 The Contractor shall complete the following items of information on the
delivery docket after the discharge of each batch of concrete:
4.5.8 One copy of the docket shall be given to the Engineer's representative on
delivery which shall show the time when water was added to the mix, to
ensure the concrete can be placed in position without exceeding the two (2)
hour time limit following addition of water to the mix.
4.5.9 The Engineer reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to change the
supplier due to unsatisfactory performance or to rescind his approval for
further use of ready-mixed concrete during the progress of the Works, if any
of the requirement has, in his opinion, not been satisfactorily complied with.
4.5.10 No water shall be added to the concrete on the Site to increase its
workability.
4.5.12 The concrete shall be placed in its final position and left undisturbed within
two (2) hours from the time when the water was added to the mix.
4.6 Grout
Grout containing fine aggregate may be used in place of concrete. Constituents are to
be water, ordinary Portland cement, fine aggregate where permitted and admixtures
subject to agreement.
4.7 Reinforcement
4.7.1 General
The reinforcement shall be high tensile strength steel to MS 145: 2006 and
MS 146: 2006, free from rust, scale, paint and grease, bent and placed in
accordance with the Engineer's Drawings. Cages and placing shall be
arranged so as not to interrupt concreting for more than twenty minutes.
4.7.3 Spacers
Check that spacers are designed and manufactured using materials, which
will not lead to reinforcement corrosion or spalling of the concrete cover.
Detail, supply and fix all spacers, in accordance with MS EN 1992-1-1. Seek
Engineer’s acceptance for spacers where the concrete will be exposed
subsequently. Mortar spacers to have durability and strength characteristics
not less than the surrounding concrete.
Comply with ISO 1460 and ISO 1461 after cutting and bending. Thickness
of galvanized coating to be in accordance with SO 1460 and ISO 1461.
To BS 6744, Type 304 S31 and 316 S33, strength Grade 250 for plain
round bars and Grade 500 for deformed high yield steel bars.
Welded or lap splices for vertical reinforcing steel shall not be permitted for
bars larger than T32 in size. For bars greater than T32, mechanical couplers
meeting Type 2 splice requirements in accordance with ACI 318-2002,
ICBO evaluation service acceptance criteria AC 133 mechanical connectors
for steel bar reinforcement (effective 1 October 2002), and ICC evaluation
service, shall be permitted.
Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer, temporary casings of accepted quality or
an accepted alternative method is to be used to maintain the stability of pile
excavation. Propose to Engineer’s acceptance, the depth, size and thickness of
casing to be provided.
Temporary casings are to be free from significant distortion. They are to be of uniform
cross-section throughout each continuous length. During concreting they are to be
free from internal projections and encrusted concrete, which might prevent proper
formation of the piles.
When permanent casings are required, use S275 steel sections in compliance with
MS EN 10210.
5.0 WORKMANSHIP
Ensure the equipment set up and installation procedures are in conformance with MS
EN 1997-1:2004.
For all piles indicated as end bearing in the drawings or schedules, form a
socket of depth at least 3m or 2 times diameter, whichever is larger, into the
material that meets the founding conditions, unless indicated in the
drawings or modified as a result of the verification check in Clause 1.4.1 and
2.2, as approved by the Engineer.
Adopt a construction method, which ensures that the soil below the pile is
not softened. Ensure that no drilling fluid or slurry remains at the base of the
pile.
The Contractor shall employ an approved licensed surveyor to set out the
grids based on the setting out plan provided by the Engineer. Piles shall be
set out from grid lines or from the building line where necessary. Setting out
must be agreed between the Contractor and the Engineer in writing prior to
the commencement of Work. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all
costs and delays arising from incorrect setting out, including any
consequential losses suffered by the Employer.
Where piles touch the building line, the Contractor must ensure that these
are installed within such restricted lines. Any special tolerances required
must be agreed with the Architect before Commencement of Work.
Conduct trial bores to confirm the ground conditions and the feasibility of the
proposed method of installation.
Agree with the Engineer on the location, depth and size of the trial bores.
5.3.1 General
5.3.1.2 The sides of the bores must be kept intact and water free by use
of linings, supplemented by external grouting where appropriate.
5.3.1.5 Each bored hole shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer
or his representative before any concrete is placed. The
Contractor shall provide all facilities including full depth temporary
lining, safety harness and breathing apparatus for the Engineer's
inspection.
5.3.1.6 If ground water is found in any bored hole or if the sides of the
shaft tend to collapse, then steel casing and/or an approved
bentonite solution of sufficient strength to maintain the sides shall
be utilised, as appropriate. The Contractor will have to adopt all
measures as directed by the Engineer at no extra cost or time to
the Contract.
5.3.1.8 The bases of all the piles under this Contract shall be cleaned using
air-lift and/or other approved sophisticated means to ensure that the
pile bases are clean and sound, before concrete is placed.
Do not bore so close to piles that have been recently cast which contain
workable or partially set concrete that a flow of concrete or instability could
be induced or damage sustained by any previously formed piles.
When socketting through rock has been called for or in the event of
encountering obstructions below ground level during boring, use reverse
circulation drilling method, chiselling or propose other means for Engineer’s
acceptance to bore through the obstruction or rock.
Should the reverse circulation drilling method fail to clear the obstruction or
rock, propose and employ other methods including predrilling with coring to
assist in the clearing of the obstructions.
Do not pump from a pile excavation unless a casing has been placed into a
stable stratum, which prevents the flow of water from the other strata in
significant quantities into the boring, or unless it can be shown that pumping
will not have detrimental effect on the surrounding soil or property.
True cut-off levels generally vary and would go up to about 15m below
ground. Therefore, where empty boring occurs, the Contractor shall take all
precautions not to contaminate the concrete at the head or elsewhere in the
pile.
The Contractor shall be responsible and pay for the removal and re-casting
of all concrete which is contaminated at or below the true cut-off level.
Propose for the Engineer’s acceptance for the need to use drilling fluid. If
acceptable, propose suitable type and method of drilling fluid to be used.
5.4.2 Storage
5.4.3 Use
5.4.4 Mixing
Mix drilling fluid thoroughly with clean fresh water to make a suspension,
which will maintain the stability of the pile excavation for the period
necessary to place concrete and complete construction.
Where the use of drilling fluid is accepted for maintaining the stability of a
boring, maintain the level of the fluid in the excavation so that the fluid
pressure always exceeds the pressures exerted by the soils and
groundwater. Use an adequate temporary casing in conjunction with the
method to ensure the stability of the strata near ground level until the
concrete has been placed.
Maintain the fluid level at a level not less than 2m above the level of the
groundwater unless otherwise agreed.
In the event of a rapid loss of drilling fluid from the pile excavation, backfill
the excavation without delay and inform the Engineer immediately. Obtain
directions from the Engineer before excavation at that location is resumed.
Take all reasonable steps to prevent the spillage of drilling fluid suspension
on the site in areas outside the immediate vicinity of boring. Remove
discarded drilling fluid from the site without delay. Disposal of drilling fluid is
to comply with the regulations of the appropriate authority.
On completion of boring and immediately prior to casting, remove all loose, disturbed
or remoulded soil or rock from the base of the pile while avoiding disturbance to the
ground below the base. Maintain the stability of the bore at all times, using
appropriate levels of support fluid as required.
5.6 Reinforcement
5.6.1 General
Store reinforcement clear of the ground, and protect from mud, oil and other
substances that may adversely affect its use in the works.
Make up cages and fix securely in accordance with the reinforcement detail
drawings to provide adequate rigidity and to ensure that the specified cover
and required fit within the mould are achieved.
5.6.2 Fixing
Keep the number of joints in the longitudinal bars to a minimum. Arrange the
joints such that the full strength of each bar is effective.
5.6.3 Placing
Lower the steel reinforcement accurately into position with sufficient spacer
blocks to ensure the correct cover is maintained at all times. Spacer blocks
are to be of suitable durability. Allow a vertical tolerance of +150/-50mm on
the level of the reinforcement projecting above the cut-off level.
Concrete shall be placed in one continuous operation from bottom to top and the top
3.0m below cut-off level shall be vibrated as the concrete is placed.
For the purpose of this Contract, all piles shall be concreted using a tremie pipe
whether the borehole contains water or not.
For concreting of all piles 1500 mm or larger in diameter, minimum two tremie pipes
must be used. Concreting using both the pipes must be simultaneous.
5.7.1 General
Place the concrete without such interruption as would allow the workability
of the previously placed batch to have deteriorated significantly. The method
of placing is to be accepted by the Engineer. If necessary, incorporate an
accepted set retarding additive into the mix in order to ensure extended
workability of the concrete after placement.
Take all precautions in the design of the mix and placing of the concrete to
avoid arching of the concrete in a casing.
Use slump testing for mixes with workability type A as in Table 5.7.2 below.
Use flow testing as an alternative workability test for higher workability
mixes if practical, submit proposals for Engineer’s acceptance.
Slump measured at the time of discharge into the pile shaft or at the time of
discharge into the concrete pump hopper is to be in accordance with the
standards shown in the table below, unless otherwise agreed.
Do not use a concrete pump to place tremie concrete directly into the pile
shaft.
Table 5.7.2
Slump
Class of Target Flow
Min Max Typical Condition of Use
Workability (mm)
(mm) (mm)
5.7.3 Compaction
If the pile shaft is completely dry and stable, allow concrete to be discharged
directly into the borehole. Before placing of concrete, clean out all loose
materials.
Use a hopper and a length of rigid delivery tube of not less than 3m to
ensure the concrete falls centrally down the shaft. The lower end of delivery
tube must be no more than 10m above the bottom of the reinforcement
cage. At no time must the concrete be allowed to free-fall more than 10m.
Place concrete under water or drilling fluid using a tremie concrete pipe. Do
not engage alternative methods of underwater placement such as the use of
a drop bottom bucket or hose from a concrete pump unless otherwise
accepted.
Take a sample of the drilling fluid suspension from the top and the base of
the boring using an accepted sampling device. If the specific gravity of the
suspension exceeds 1.25 or does not comply in any respect with the stated
limits for the particular material, do not proceed with the placing of concrete.
In this event, modify or replace the drilling fluid as agreed to meet the
Specification.
Check that the hopper and pipe of the tremie is clean and watertight
throughout.
Extend the pipe to the base of the boring and place a sliding plug or
barrier in the pipe to prevent direct contact between the first charge
of concrete in the pipe of the tremie and the water or drilling fluid. If
the plug or barrier is sacrificial, do not retain it in the mass of the
concrete.
Keep the tremie pipe outlet at least 2 m below the surface of the
concrete at all stages in the pour to prevent the re-entry of slurry
into the pipe and do not withdraw until concreting is complete.
Develop a system of level checks for the concrete and pipe outlet to
ensure that this requirement is met.
In the event of the ground water level being higher than the required
pile head casting level shown on the Drawings, submit proposals for
5.7.8.2 Piles Cast in Dry Bores with Permanent Lining Tubes or Casings
Where permanent lining tubes or casings are used to where the cut-
off is in stable ground below the base of any casing used, cast pile
heads to a level above the specified cut-off so that a sound concrete
connection can be made after trimming. The casting level is to be
0.75 to 1.0m above the cut-off level.
5.7.9.1 General
Do not place concrete in the boring once the bottom of the casing
has been lifted above the top of the concrete; place it continuously
as the casing is extracted until the desired head of concrete is
obtained.
5.7.10 Overbreak
remedial measures including load tests justifying the capacity of the piles for
Engineer’s acceptance.
After each pile has been cast, backfill any empty bore remaining carefully as soon as
possible with acceptable materials. Ensure the method of discharging is accepted by
the Engineer and in a manner that will not affect the integrity of the completed pile.
Refer to the contract drawings for the need for pile grouting.
Where the base or sides of the pile are to be pressure grouted, construct
the piles with grout tubes and all other necessary equipment for grouting.
5.9.2 Grout
5.9.2.1 Batching
5.9.2.2 Mixing
5.9.2.3 Transporting
Test the tubes to ensure that leakage at the joints does not occur
under pressure. Protect the tops of the tubes during and after
grouting.
5.10 Tolerances
Establish all lines, levels and be responsible for the correct positions of all
piles. Carry out setting out from the main grid lines of the proposed
structure. Immediately before installation of the pile, mark the pile position
with suitable identifiable pins or markers.
Check the casing position during and after placing the casing.
5.10.1.2 Boring
The shaft shall not deviate from vertical by more than 1 in 100, and
shall be measured on Site using a plumb line at ground level and
rechecked at the cut-off level.
5.10.2 Position
The maximum permitted deviation at cut off level of the pile centre from the
centre point shown on the setting out drawing is to be 75 mm in any
direction except piles up to 700 mm diameter where maximum tolerance is 50
mm. The centre of the pile at cut-off level shall be the theoretical centre. A
survey of the eccentricity of each pile and the pile group is to be carried out
by a Licensed Surveyor, with the results submitted to the Engineer within 14
days or as directed after the pile has been trimmed to its cut-off level.
5.10.3 Verticality
For vertical piles, the maximum permitted deviation of the finished pile from
the vertical is 1 in 100.
5.10.4 Rake
For raked piles, the piling rig is to be set and maintained to attain the
required rake. The maximum permitted deviation of the finished pile from
the specified rake is 1 in 25.
The angle between the sloping (upper) surface of the base and the
axis of the pile is not to exceed 35° and at the specified diameter of
the base at the perimeter the thickness of the base is not to be less
than 150mm.
5.10.6 Cut-Off
The permissible tolerance in the true cut-off level will be plus or minus 25 mm,
upon final trimming.
The Contractor will be responsible for all additional works such as pile caps,
tie beams, installation of compensating pile etc, including Cost of Redesign,
resulting from tolerances outside those specified herein. All corrective
redesign of the structure shall be carried out by the Engineer at the
Contractor's cost and expense and time. The cost of redesign by the Engineer
shall be based on the hourly rates listed in the Particular Specification.
5.10.7 Reinforcement
The as-installed location of reinforcement cages for the piles including the
projecting reinforcement at the cut-off level shall be within plus or minus 25
mm of the specified position on plan.
Ensure that, during the course of the work, no damage or displacement, which could
impair performance or durability, occurs to the completed piles.
Do not bore nor drive pile casing nearer than five times its diameter (measured centre
to centre) from an unfilled pile excavation or from an uncased concrete pile where the
concrete has been in place less than 24 hours.
Do not subject installed piles to any forces (direct or indirect) prior to their
incorporation into the superstructure unless accepted by the Engineer.
Propose the details of modification of design to the pile caps, any required
compensating piles, and other measures as necessary. All proposals are to
be endorsed by a PE.
5.13 Cleaning Up
Remove from the site periodically during the works and on completion all
unnecessary plant, rubbish and debris resulting from the activities.
All excavated material from boreholes shall be removed off-site to the approval of the
Engineer.
Notify the Engineer if the performance of any pile is expected to be less than that of a
similar pile whose test behaviour has been accepted.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the soundness of pile heads at cut-off level,
the specified level at which piles are required to terminate.
The concrete shall be clean, sound, uncontaminated by any foreign matter and free
from laitance.
On completion of installation of piles, cut-off the piles to the required level as shown
on the Drawings and to a tolerance of plus or minus 20 mm unless otherwise agreed.
Where a pile has been formed below the required cut-off level, build up the deficient
portion and ensure the reinforcement is to project for a minimum length as stipulated
below. Submit the method of cutting the pile heads for Engineer’s acceptance.
Take care to avoid shattering or otherwise damaging the rest of the pile. Cut away
any cracked or defective concrete and make good with new concrete properly bonded
to the old.
When piles are subjected to net uplift, these shall be designed to provide a minimum
safety factor of 1.4 against maximum uplift during temporary condition.
The frictional parameters adopted to develop shaft friction shall be proven and a
partial safety factor applied to the proven ultimate skin friction parameters which shall
not be less than 3.5.
Reinforcement in tension piles shall be provided for the full length with adequate
tension splices (mechanical couplers) and lateral reinforcement to provide a durable
uplift-resistant system.
Reinforcement in the piles shall be provided for the full length with adequate tension
splices and lateral reinforcement to provide a durable lateral resistant system.
The lateral deflection of the pile at cut-off level shall be limited to 12mm at one time
working load.
The Contractor shall submit the proposed design of the lateral load resisting piles and
the method statement for carrying out the load test at the time of tender submission.
Carry out the work in such a manner as to minimise noise, vibration and other
disturbance.
5.19 As Built Pile Penetration Length, Final Survey and As-Built Drawing
The Contractor shall update and submit progressively to the Engineer, the as-built
records, including the penetration length calculations and drawings. The as-built
records shall be submitted to the Engineer fortnightly and no later than 14 days after
each and every pile installed.
After installation of the piles, the Contractor shall employ a licensed surveyor to
prepare a layout plan showing offsets of all installed piles from the theoretical
locations, and shall submit such drawings in triplicate to the Engineer. Inclinations of
all the piles shall also be surveyed and submitted as soon as possible.
Allow for the survey plans to be taken in batches and to carry out the survey work on
several visits. Submit within timing and format as directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall also submit six (6) certified copies plus six (6) nos. of CD-Rom
with the drawing showing the as-installed length and cut-off level of each pile within
14 days from the completion date. These as-built drawings shall be certified by
Contractor's own PE.
On completion of all pile testing, all temporary works and equipment shall be removed
by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer.
6.1 Submissions
(a) All relevant details of the method proposed during tender, including
details of the method of transporting and placing concrete in piles and
how the specified casting level tolerance will be achieved.
(b) Method of overcoming any obstructions encountered and drilling
through hard rock and ensuring no soil collapse within the borehole.
Include details of the reversed circulation drilling, chiselling or other
method as proposed.
(c) Methods to achieve the specified maximum permitted verticality of pile.
Method of checking the verticality and corrective actions to be taken if
the deviation exceeds the maximum permitted limits.
(d) Methods for installing piles in ground which exhibits Artesian conditions
at depth.
(e) Details of proposed plant and boring equipment
(f) Details of proposed monitoring equipment
(g) Details of specialists used for grouting
(h) Details of concrete and grout mixes
(i) Methods of concreting and grouting
(j) Methods of handling reinforcement
(k) Details of spacers to be used on reinforcement cage
(l) Details of permanent casing and the method of installation
(m) Details and properties of support fluid.
(n) Do not commence work for working piles before proposed methods are
accepted.
Submit the details for the As-Built Drawings for the piling works on A1 size
drawings including at least the following details:
(a) Final setting out plan, pile depths, pile sizes, pile capacities, pile
eccentricities, pile lengths and cut-off levels.
(b) Location of piles which have been discarded and not in use, e.g.
abandoned piles, unused existing foundation, rejected piles and
preliminary test piles.
(c) Location and type of pile load tests.
Prepare and submit the quality control plan for Engineer’s acceptance prior
to starting work.
6.2.1 General
Provide the Engineer with test certificates, analyses and mill sheets. Ensure
that adequate notice is given to the Engineer when the processes can be
inspected or tests can be witnessed.
Inspect each pile bore prior to the placing of concrete in it. Provide suitable
equipment to the Engineer’s acceptance for carrying out the inspection.
Inspect each pile bore prior to the placing of concrete in it. Provide suitable
equipment to the Engineer’s acceptance for carrying out the inspection.
Where the borehole is dry inspect from ground level to ensure that:
6.3 Tests
6.3.1.1 General
▪ Tensile test
▪ Bend and Re-bend test
▪ Weldability test.
Each sample is to comprise of six cubes, three for testing at seven days and
three for testing at 28 days after casting.
Propose the frequency of testing drilling fluid and the method and procedure
of sampling prior to the commencement of the work. The frequency may
subsequently be varied as required, depending on the consistency of the
results obtained.
Establish a suitably equipped and maintained site laboratory for testing the
support fluid. Provide skilled staff and all necessary apparatus to carry out
the sampling and testing.
6.4.4 Testing
Carry out the tests until a consistent working pattern has been
established, take account of the mixing process, any blending of
freshly mixed drilling fluid suspension and previously used drilling
fluid suspension and any process which may be used to remove
impurities from previously used drilling fluid suspension.
When the results show consistent behaviour, the tests for shear
strength and pH value may be discontinued, and tests to determine
density and viscosity is to be carried out as agreed. In the event of a
change in the established working pattern, tests for shear strength
and pH value is to be re-introduced for a period, if required.
6.5.1 Keep records of the installation of each pile with information as below.
Submit two copies of these records to the Engineer the next working day
after the pile was installed or as directed. Note any unexpected boring
conditions in the record.
(a) Contract
(b) Dsignation of piles and pile reference number (location)
(c) Pile type
(d) Nominal cross-sectional dimensions or diameters
(e) Nominal diameter of underream
(f) Length of preformed pile
(g) Standing groundwater level
(h) Date and time of boring
(i) Date of concreting
(j) Ground level at commencement of installation of pile
(k) Working level
(l) Depth from working level to pile toe
(m) Toe level
(n) Depth from working level to pile head level
(o) Depth of boring
(p) Length of temporary casing
(q) Length of permanent casing
(r) A log of soil type encountered from start to finish of excavation and
observed water levels.
(s) Length and details of reinforcement
(t) Concrete mix
(u) Volume of concrete supplied to pile where this can be measured in
practice
(v) A graph of theoretical and placed concrete volumes with depth.
(w) Concrete test cube numbers
(x) Concrete slump
(y) Level of concrete in pile before and after withdrawal of lining or tube
(z) All information regarding obstructions/delays and other interruptions to
the sequence of work
6.5.3 The Contractor will be required to supply three copies of such records free
of charge to the Engineer by sending them once a week.
Applicable for piles with characteristic unit end bearing resistance more than
10MPa.
Unless otherwise specified in the drawings, all piles with size larger than
1800 mm in diameter shall be tested for profile.
The Engineer may change these requirements at his sole discretion, with no time and
cost impact.
SECTION 02483
SECANT PILE WALL
INDEX TO SPECIFICATION
CLAUSE PAGE
This specification section is the copyright of DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. No reproduction either in part or
in whole in any manner whoever is allowed without written permission from DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd.
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the Particular Specification, and all other contract documents.
This technical specification shall form part of the Contract and the Contractor shall allow for all
obligations, requirements, considerations, etc. to comply with the specification. The Contractor is
also deemed to have visited the site and fully acquainted himself as to the nature and
practicability of the works. No claims will be entertained as a result of his failure to do all of the
above.
The Consulting Civil and Structural Engineer is DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. The Contractor is to
note that when the term ‘Engineer’ in the following Specification means the representative of the
Consulting Engineer.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Engineer is referred to in the following specification,
such term shall be deemed to mean The Architect or Superintending Officer’s Representative (S.
O. Rep.) as defined in the Articles of Agreement or any other person designated in writing by the
Architect or the Superintending Officer (S.O.) from time to time to exercise the power of the
Architect or S.O.
The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Uniform Building By-
Laws of Malaysia, the Malaysian Standards and Codes of Practices, Malaysian Standards
Eurocodes current at the date of tender and to the satisfaction of the local Building Authorities
empowered to control the Works, the Specifications and drawings supplied to the Contractor and
any other instructions issued by the Engineer/Architect or their representative from time to time.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
Any reference in the Specifications to a Malaysian Standard (MS), Eurocodes (EC) or Code of
Practice (CP) shall imply the latest version at the time of tender of the applicable Standards or
Code of Practices. Should there be any discrepancy between these Specifications and the MS,
EC or CP, the more onerous requirement/s shall be adopted. The Engineer has the sole
discretion to modify or upgrade the specifications, drawings and documents to comply fully with
MS Eurocode requirements at no additional cost and time to the Contract.
The work under this section comprises the design of the penetration depths and
construction of the earh retaining system comprising cast in-situ secant pile walls with
ground anchors or strutting for the proposed works.
1.1.1 This section covers the requirements for the construction of secant pile wall.
The secant pile wall may be used principally an earth retaining system
resisting lateral earth pressure or as part of the building foundations system
to support vertical loads.
1.1.3 The Contractor shall make allowance in his tender for compliance with all
the Specifications and other requirements necessary for proper execution
and completion of the Works to the Engineer's satisfaction.
1.1.4 A notional design of the earth retaining system, comprising secant pile wall
with strutting is included with tender drawings for the Contractor’s
information. The earth retaining system as shown in the tender drawings are
design solely to resist the permanent stage loadings only. The Contractor
shall satisfy himself of the wall adequacy for excavation stages and any
other transient stages of the Contractor’s work, and shall allow for all
necessary enhancement with respect to design, materials and workmanship
to complete the Works in accordance with the drawings and the
specification.
1.1.5 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the complete design of the
secant pile walls required to carry both the permanent and temporary stage
applicable horizontal and vertical loads. These shall be installed to sufficient
depths to carry the applicable loads with the required safety factors.
1.1.6 The Contractor shall submit the final secant pile wall with the intended
shoring design and drawings for the Engineer’s approval prior to
construction.
1.1.7 The Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected the site and assessed
the geotechnical conditions applicable to his work. The work shall be carried
out on the basis of ground as found and no additional cost will be paid for
handling hard materials or other obstructions encountered during the works.
1.1.8 The Contractor shall be responsible for producing the detailed shop
drawings and layouts for all the secant pile wall included in the contract. The
drawings shall include plans, sections and elevations of all the wall panels,
including the reinforcement details.
1.1.9 Notwithstanding the provisional lengths allowed for in the bills, the
Contractor shall submit detailed geotechnical calculations for his proposed
length of each type of secant pile wall. The Contractor shall be responsible
to ensure that all the secant pile wall as designed and installed shall be able
to retain the lateral earth pressure and gravity loads based on the depth
proposed by the Contractor.
1.1.10 The Contractor shall submit with his tender the name and CV of a qualified
Geotechnical Engineers experienced in the design and installation of secant
pile wall, and who will be placed full-time on site and he/she shall propose
the formation level of all secant pile walls.
Read this work section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the other work
sections as follows:
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, ensure all of the Works comply
with the relevant requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or
referenced in the body of the Specification. Alternative Standards and
Codes may be proposed for approval by the Engineer, provided it can be
demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the
requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Refer to the following technical reference for guidance in carrying out the
works:
Take into account of the design requirements as set out in Clause 2.1
below.
Submit the design to the Engineer for acceptance. Design proposals in (c)
and (d) are to be endorsed by a PE (Civil).
Submit the CV of the personnel to be engaged for the above including the
PE’s, for Engineer’s acceptance.
The set values shall not be less onerous than the ones set forth in the
Instrumentation and Monitoring drawings.
Where applicable, prior to and upon completion of the site works, carry out a
condition survey to adjacent buildings in accordance with the requirements
of Section 01017 Condition Survey and Monitoring. Submit all records to
the Engineer and adjacent property owners where directed.
Take cognisance of and co-ordinate with other contractors on site who may
be carrying out instrumentation and monitoring works to avoid duplication of
installation and readings.
Adequately maintain roads and footpaths within and adjacent to the site and
keep clear of mud and debris.
The soil report included in this Contract is for the reference of the
Contractor only. Neither the Consultants nor the Client accept
responsibility for its accuracy or implications if actual soil conditions
are found to be different during the progress of Works.
The Contractor may, at his own cost and with the written approval of
the Engineer, conduct additional soil tests if he so desires.
1.4.7.5 Contamination
The Contractor shall determine, probe and/or investigate the position of all
existing services within the Site and shall take all precautions to protect and
prevent damage to them. All damage caused to the active services shall be
reinstated by the Contractor at his own cost and time. The Engineer shall
provide to the Contractor, any information available to him for the guidance of
the Contractor only.
Any other unknown services which are found within the work areas shall be
either diverted or protected by the Contractor. The Contractor shall not be
entitled to any additional cost or time on account of unforeseen services found
within the contract boundaries which may affect the Contract Work.
The Contractor shall also refer to other parts of the Contract Documents on
the requirements to deal with existing services affected by the Works.
1.4.9 Protection
1.4.10 Obstructions
1.4.13 Safety
The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all slopes and
excavations, including bored holes for pile installation, and shall take all
necessary precautions for the safety of personnel in the area of piling
operations. Where rocks and hard material are encountered during boring
which require manual excavation with pneumatic tools, the Contractor shall
ensure that adequate linings are placed above the working level and that
sufficient ventilation is provided for the well-being of the workmen.
(a) BRE Digest 251 (1995) Assessment of damage in low rise building
(b) BS 8008: Guide to safety precautions and procedures for the
construction and descent of machine-bored shaft for piling and other
purposes
1.5 Definitions
(a) Pile Dimensions Piles dimension specified in pile layout drawing(s) / piling
schedule are the minimum acceptable dimensions
(b) Rock Material classified as grade I to III In table 10 “Scale of weathering grades
of rock mass” in BS 5930:1999+A2:2010.
(c) Rock Weathering classified as Grade I to IV in Table 2.2 and 2.3 in CP4:2003.
1.6 Programme
1.6.1 The Contractor shall, with his tender, submit a detailed programme showing
the sequence and manner in which piling and other works are to be
executed. The actual construction would be carried out in a sequence and
to a programme agreed with the Engineer. Where a sequence is specified in
the Contract, it shall be adhered to.
1.7.1 Defective work shall be all work which, in the opinion of the Engineer, does
not fully comply with this Specification or the Drawings. The Contractor
shall make good or carry out such additional works at his own costs and
expenses as may be necessary to make good all defective work to the
Engineer's satisfaction.
The required working load and sizes of the piles are indicated in the drawings,
together with an indication of the required pile penetration depth.
The Contractor shall submit written evidence and details of personnel who
would supervise the Works, to satisfy the Engineer that his supervisory staff
has relevant experience.
Sections of the report relating to individual owners of the nearby and adjacent
buildings/properties must be distributed to the respective owners prior to commencing
any Works on Site.
Confirm in writing to Building & Construction Authority (BCA) when this requirement
has been complied with.
Any delays in the issuance of the Permit to Commence Piling/Building Works due to
either an incomplete report, or a report unacceptable to the Authorities remains the full
responsibility of the Contractor.
Provide adequate record to identify changes that occurred and to allow changes to
methods of the construction works such as to avoid or minimise damage to the
Surveyed Buildings.
When planning for suitable methods and instrumentation for the survey, take account
of the limits of movement and levels of vibration, as well as in the respective
specifications relevant to the other construction works. Also take account of the
frequency of monitoring as indicated in the respective sections.
Take all necessary actions to ensure compliance with the latest noise control
regulations imposed by the authority having jurisdiction. In the absence of any
guidelines, the values shown in the table herein shall be adopted. The noise level
(maximum allowable equivalent continuous noise level measured over a period of 5
minutes in dB) at the nearest occupied building outside the Site is not to exceed the
following maximum permissible noise level.
Types of affected
buildings 7am 7pm 10pm 7am 7pm 10pm 7am 7pm 10pm
to to to to to to to to to
7pm 10pm 7am 7pm 10pm 7am 7pm 10pm 7am
(a) Hospital,
school, home
75 55 75 55 No Work
for the aged,
dBA dBA dBA dBA
sick etc
No
(b) Residential
Work
Buildings
located less
than 150m 90 70 55 90 70
from the dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA
construction
site
3.0 MATERIALS
Do not change sources of supply until it has been demonstrated that the materials
from the new source can meet all the specified requirements.
Remove from Site any material that fails to comply with the Specifications.
Drilling fluid including Bentonite supplied to the site and prior to mixing is to
be in accordance with API Specification 13A 5th Edition (1993) Drilling Fluid.
3.3 Water
Water used for the construction is to be clean and free from harmful matter in solution
or suspension.
3.4 Concrete
Concrete for piles shall be in accordance with the Concrete Section of this
Specification.
3.4.1 Concrete shall be an approved mix, having characteristic strength at the age
of 28 days of 35 MPa unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, with
minimum slump of 100 mm. All materials for making concrete shall be of
best quality and shall comply with current issues of appropriate European
Standards (EN). The water/cement ratio shall at all times be the minimum
required to produce concrete of a workability appropriate to the method of
placing and compaction and to avoid softening of clay due to excess water
in the concrete, and in no event greater than 0.5.
3.4.2 Design Mixes: Mix design to comply with requirements as set out in Table 1.
C45/55
C40/50
C35/45
C30/37
C25/30
C20/25
C16/20
C12/15
Strength Class
Characteristic Strength
50 45 40 35 30 25 20 16 12
at 28 days, fck (N/mm2)
Characteristic Strength
at 28 days, fck,cube (N/mm2 60 55 50 45 37 30 25 20 15
)
Minimum cement
content in kg/m3 of fully 485 475 425 375 350 350 300 270 205
compacted concrete
Maximum cement
content in kg/m3 of fully 550 550 550 550 550 550 550 550 550
compacted concrete
Maximum water/cement
0.4 0.4 0.45 0.45 0.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.7
ratio
3.4.4 The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's approval his proposals on
concrete mixes and suppliers of materials, including results of preliminary
tests on concrete prior to commencing work on Site.
3.4.5 In cases where it is intended that the temporary linings are to be withdrawn
without the assistance of the mechanical oscillation methods, a retarding
3.4.9 Sulphates
3.5.1 The Contractor shall furnish the name of the intended concrete supplier for
approval. The Engineer reserves the right to inspect the supplier's facilities
and to require samples of cement, fine and coarse aggregates and prepared
admixtures for testing. The cost of such tests shall be borne by the
Contractor.
3.5.2 The Contractor shall take full responsibility, notwithstanding the Engineer's
approval, to ensure that all ready-mixed concrete conforms to BS 1926 and
this Specification. Concrete which does not comply shall be rejected and
shall be immediately removed from the Site.
3.5.3 The Contractor shall furnish a valid copy of the Certificate of Conformity to
MS EN 206, prior to the commencement of Works.
3.5.5 The Contractor shall furnish at least one day in advance the date set for
each casting of concrete.
3.5.6 For each truck load of concrete delivered, the following information shall
appear on the delivery docket:
3.5.7 The Contractor shall complete the following items of information on the
delivery docket after the discharge of each batch of concrete:
3.5.8 One copy of the docket shall be given to the Engineer's representative on
delivery which shall show the time when water was added to the mix, to
ensure the concrete can be placed in position without exceeding the two (2)
hour time limit following addition of water to the mix.
3.5.9 The Engineer reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to change the
supplier due to unsatisfactory performance or to rescind his approval for
further use of ready-mixed concrete during the progress of the Works, if any
of the requirement has, in his opinion, not been satisfactorily complied with.
3.5.10 No water shall be added to the concrete on the Site to increase its
workability.
3.5.12 The concrete shall be placed in its final position and left undisturbed within
two (2) hours from the time when the water was added to the mix.
3.6 Grout
Grout containing fine aggregate may be used in place of concrete. Constituents are to
be water, ordinary Portland cement, fine aggregate where permitted and admixtures
subject to agreement.
3.7 Reinforcement
3.7.1 General
The reinforcement shall be high tensile strength steel to MS 145: 2006 and
MS 146: 2006, free from rust, scale, paint and grease, bent and placed in
accordance with the Engineer's Drawings. Cages and placing shall be
arranged so as not to interrupt concreting for more than twenty minutes.
3.7.3 Spacers
Check that spacers are designed and manufactured using materials, which
will not lead to reinforcement corrosion or spalling of the concrete cover.
Detail, supply and fix all spacers, in accordance with MS EN 1992-1-1. Seek
Engineer’s acceptance for spacers where the concrete will be exposed
subsequently. Mortar spacers to have durability and strength characteristics
not less than the surrounding concrete.
Comply with ISO 1460 and ISO 1461 after cutting and bending. Thickness
of galvanized coating to be in accordance with SO 1460 and ISO 1461.
To BS 6744, Type 304 S31 and 316 S33, strength Grade 250 for plain
round bars and Grade 500 for deformed high yield steel bars.
Welded or lap splices for vertical reinforcing steel shall not be permitted for
bars larger than T32 in size. For bars greater than T32, mechanical couplers
meeting Type 2 splice requirements in accordance with ACI 318-2002,
ICBO evaluation service acceptance criteria AC 133 mechanical connectors
for steel bar reinforcement (effective 1 October 2002), and ICC evaluation
service, shall be permitted.
Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer, temporary casings of accepted quality or
an accepted alternative method is to be used to maintain the stability of pile
excavation. Propose to Engineer’s acceptance, the depth, size and thickness of
casing to be provided.
Temporary casings are to be free from significant distortion. They are to be of uniform
cross-section throughout each continuous length. During concreting they are to be
free from internal projections and encrusted concrete, which might prevent proper
formation of the piles.
When permanent casings are required, use S275 steel sections in compliance with
MS EN 10210.
4.0 WORKMANSHIP
Ensure the equipment set up and installation procedures are in conformance with MS
EN 1997-1:2004.
For all piles indicated as end bearing in the drawings or schedules, form a
socket of depth at least 3m or 2 times diameter, whichever is larger, into the
material that meets the founding conditions, unless indicated in the
drawings or modified as a result of the verification check in Clause 1.4.1 and
2.2, as approved by the Engineer.
Adopt a construction method, which ensures that the soil below the pile is
not softened. Ensure that no drilling fluid or slurry remains at the base of the
pile.
The Contractor shall employ an approved licensed surveyor to set out the
grids based on the setting out plan provided by the Engineer. Piles shall be
set out from grid lines or from the building line where necessary. Setting out
must be agreed between the Contractor and the Engineer in writing prior to
the commencement of Work. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all
costs and delays arising from incorrect setting out, including any
consequential losses suffered by the Employer.
Where piles touch the building line, the Contractor must ensure that these
are installed within such restricted lines. Any special tolerances required
must be agreed with the Architect before Commencement of Work.
Conduct trial bores to confirm the ground conditions and the feasibility of the
proposed method of installation.
Agree with the Engineer on the location, depth and size of the trial bores.
4.3.1 General
4.3.1.2 The sides of the bores must be kept intact and water free by use
of linings, supplemented by external grouting where appropriate.
4.3.1.5 Each bored hole shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer
or his representative before any concrete is placed. The
Contractor shall provide all facilities including full depth temporary
lining, safety harness and breathing apparatus for the Engineer's
inspection.
4.3.1.6 If ground water is found in any bored hole or if the sides of the
shaft tend to collapse, then steel casing and/or an approved
bentonite solution of sufficient strength to maintain the sides shall
be utilised, as appropriate. The Contractor will have to adopt all
measures as directed by the Engineer at no extra cost or time to
the Contract.
4.3.1.8 The bases of all the piles under this Contract shall be cleaned using
air-lift and/or other approved sophisticated means to ensure that the
pile bases are clean and sound, before concrete is placed.
Do not bore so close to piles that have been recently cast which contain
workable or partially set concrete that a flow of concrete or instability could
be induced or damage sustained by any previously formed piles.
When socketting through rock has been called for or in the event of
encountering obstructions below ground level during boring, use reverse
circulation drilling method, chiselling or propose other means for Engineer’s
acceptance to bore through the obstruction or rock.
Should the reverse circulation drilling method fail to clear the obstruction or
rock, propose and employ other methods including predrilling with coring to
assist in the clearing of the obstructions.
Do not pump from a pile excavation unless a casing has been placed into a
stable stratum, which prevents the flow of water from the other strata in
significant quantities into the boring, or unless it can be shown that pumping
will not have detrimental effect on the surrounding soil or property.
Propose for the Engineer’s acceptance for the need to use drilling fluid. If
acceptable, propose suitable type and method of drilling fluid to be used.
4.4.2 Storage
4.4.3 Use
4.4.4 Mixing
Mix drilling fluid thoroughly with clean fresh water to make a suspension,
which will maintain the stability of the pile excavation for the period
necessary to place concrete and complete construction.
Where the use of drilling fluid is accepted for maintaining the stability of a
boring, maintain the level of the fluid in the excavation so that the fluid
pressure always exceeds the pressures exerted by the soils and
groundwater. Use an adequate temporary casing in conjunction with the
method to ensure the stability of the strata near ground level until the
concrete has been placed.
Maintain the fluid level at a level not less than 2m above the level of the
groundwater unless otherwise agreed.
In the event of a rapid loss of drilling fluid from the pile excavation, backfill
the excavation without delay and inform the Engineer immediately. Obtain
directions from the Engineer before excavation at that location is resumed.
Take all reasonable steps to prevent the spillage of drilling fluid suspension
on the site in areas outside the immediate vicinity of boring. Remove
discarded drilling fluid from the site without delay. Disposal of drilling fluid is
to comply with the regulations of the appropriate authority.
On completion of boring and immediately prior to casting, remove all loose, disturbed
or remoulded soil or rock from the base of the pile while avoiding disturbance to the
ground below the base. Maintain the stability of the bore at all times, using
appropriate levels of support fluid as required.
4.6 Reinforcement
4.6.1 General
Store reinforcement clear of the ground, and protect from mud, oil and other
substances that may adversely affect its use in the works.
Make up cages and fix securely in accordance with the reinforcement detail
drawings to provide adequate rigidity and to ensure that the specified cover
and required fit within the mould are achieved.
4.6.2 Fixing
Keep the number of joints in the longitudinal bars to a minimum. Arrange the
joints such that the full strength of each bar is effective.
4.6.3 Placing
Lower the steel reinforcement accurately into position with sufficient spacer
blocks to ensure the correct cover is maintained at all times. Spacer blocks
are to be of suitable durability. Allow a vertical tolerance of +150/-50mm on
the level of the reinforcement projecting above the cut-off level.
Concrete shall be placed in one continuous operation from bottom to top and the top
3.0m below cut-off level shall be vibrated as the concrete is placed.
For the purpose of this Contract, all piles shall be concreted using a tremie pipe
whether the borehole contains water or not.
For concreting of all piles 1500 mm or larger in diameter, minimum two tremie pipes
must be used. Concreting using both the pipes must be simultaneous.
4.7.1 General
Place the concrete without such interruption as would allow the workability
of the previously placed batch to have deteriorated significantly. The method
of placing is to be accepted by the Engineer. If necessary, incorporate an
accepted set retarding additive into the mix in order to ensure extended
workability of the concrete after placement.
Take all precautions in the design of the mix and placing of the concrete to
avoid arching of the concrete in a casing.
Use slump testing for mixes with workability type A as in Table 5.7.2 below.
Use flow testing as an alternative workability test for higher workability
mixes if practical, submit proposals for Engineer’s acceptance.
Slump measured at the time of discharge into the pile shaft or at the time of
discharge into the concrete pump hopper is to be in accordance with the
standards shown in the table below, unless otherwise agreed.
Do not use a concrete pump to place tremie concrete directly into the pile
shaft.
Table 5.7.2
Target Slump
Class of Flow
Min Max Typical Condition of Use
Workability
(mm) (mm) (mm)
4.7.3 Compaction
If the pile shaft is completely dry and stable, allow concrete to be discharged
directly into the borehole. Before placing of concrete, clean out all loose
materials.
Use a hopper and a length of rigid delivery tube of not less than 3m to
ensure the concrete falls centrally down the shaft. The lower end of delivery
tube must be no more than 10m above the bottom of the reinforcement
cage. At no time must the concrete be allowed to free-fall more than 10m.
Place concrete under water or drilling fluid using a tremie concrete pipe. Do
not engage alternative methods of underwater placement such as the use of
a drop bottom bucket or hose from a concrete pump unless otherwise
accepted.
Take a sample of the drilling fluid suspension from the top and the base of
the boring using an accepted sampling device. If the specific gravity of the
suspension exceeds 1.25 or does not comply in any respect with the stated
limits for the particular material, do not proceed with the placing of concrete.
In this event, modify or replace the drilling fluid as agreed to meet the
Specification.
Check that the hopper and pipe of the tremie is clean and watertight
throughout.
Extend the pipe to the base of the boring and place a sliding plug or
barrier in the pipe to prevent direct contact between the first charge
of concrete in the pipe of the tremie and the water or drilling fluid. If
the plug or barrier is sacrificial, do not retain it in the mass of the
concrete.
Keep the tremie pipe outlet at least 2 m below the surface of the
concrete at all stages in the pour to prevent the re-entry of slurry
into the pipe and do not withdraw until concreting is complete.
Develop a system of level checks for the concrete and pipe outlet to
ensure that this requirement is met.
In the event of the ground water level being higher than the required
pile head casting level shown on the Drawings, submit proposals for
acceptance prior to placing concrete. Do not leave the pile head
below the ground water level unless acceptable precautions are
taken.
4.7.8.2 Piles Cast in Dry Bores with Permanent Lining Tubes or Casings
Where permanent lining tubes or casings are used to where the cut-
off is in stable ground below the base of any casing used, cast pile
heads to a level above the specified cut-off so that a sound concrete
connection can be made after trimming. The casting level is to be
300 mm above the cut-off level.
4.7.9.1 General
Do not place concrete in the boring once the bottom of the casing
has been lifted above the top of the concrete; place it continuously
as the casing is extracted until the desired head of concrete is
obtained.
4.7.10 Overbreak
4.8 Tolerances
Establish all lines, levels and be responsible for the correct positions of all
piles. Carry out setting out from the main grid lines of the proposed
structure. Immediately before installation of the pile, mark the pile position
with suitable identifiable pins or markers.
Check the Guide Wall position during and after placing the casing.
4.8.1.2 Boring
The shaft shall not deviate from vertical by more than 1 in 100, and
shall be measured on Site using a plumb line at ground level and
rechecked at the cut-off level.
4.8.2 Position
4.8.3 Verticality
For vertical piles, the maximum permitted deviation of the finished pile from
the vertical is 1 in 100.
The angle between the sloping (upper) surface of the base and the
axis of the pile is not to exceed 35° and at the specified diameter of
the base at the perimeter the thickness of the base is not to be less
than 150mm.
4.8.5 Cut-Off
The permissible tolerance in the true cut-off level will be plus or minus 25 mm,
upon final trimming.
The Contractor will be responsible for all additional works such as pile caps,
tie beams, installation of compensating pile etc, including Cost of Redesign,
resulting from tolerances outside those specified herein. All corrective
redesign of the structure shall be carried out by the Engineer at the
Contractor's cost and expense and time. The cost of redesign by the Engineer
shall be based on the hourly rates listed under Clause 1.6.
4.8.6 Reinforcement
The as-installed location of reinforcement cages for the piles including the
projecting reinforcement at the cut-off level shall be within plus or minus 25
mm of the specified position on plan.
Ensure that, during the course of the work, no damage or displacement, which could
impair performance or durability, occurs to the completed piles.
Do not bore nor drive pile casing nearer than five times its diameter (measured centre
to centre) from an unfilled pile excavation or from an uncased concrete pile where the
concrete has been in place less than 24 hours.
Do not subject installed piles to any forces (direct or indirect) prior to their
incorporation into the superstructure unless accepted by the Engineer.
Propose the details of modification of design to the pile caps, any required
compensating piles, and other measures as necessary. All proposals are to
be endorsed by a PE.
4.11 Cleaning Up
Remove from the site periodically during the works and on completion all
unnecessary plant, rubbish and debris resulting from the activities.
All excavated material from boreholes shall be removed off-site to the approval of the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the soundness of pile heads at cut-off level,
the specified level at which piles are required to terminate.
The concrete shall be clean, sound, uncontaminated by any foreign matter and free
from laitance.
On completion of installation of piles, cut off the piles to the required level as shown
on the Drawings and to a tolerance of plus minor of 20 mm unless otherwise agreed.
Where a pile has been formed below the required cut-off level, build up the deficient
portion and ensure the reinforcement is to project for a minimum length as stipulated
below. Submit the method of cutting the pile heads for Engineer’s acceptance.
Take care to avoid shattering or otherwise damaging the rest of the pile. Cut away
any cracked or defective concrete and make good with new concrete properly bonded
to the old.
Carry out the work in such a manner as to minimise noise, vibration and other
disturbance.
4.14 As Built Pile Penetration Length, Final Survey and As-Built Drawing
The Contractor shall update and submit progressively to the Engineer, the as-built
records, including the penetration length calculations and drawings. The as-built
records shall be submitted to the Engineer fortnightly and no later than 14 days after
each and every pile installed.
After installation of the piles, the Contractor shall employ a licensed surveyor to
prepare a layout plan showing offsets of all installed piles from the theoretical
locations, and shall submit such drawings in triplicate to the Engineer. Inclinations of
all the piles shall also be surveyed and submitted as soon as possible.
Allow for the survey plans to be taken in batches and to carry out the survey work on
several visits. Submit within timing and format as directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall also submit six (6) certified copies plus six (6) nos. of CD-Rom
with the drawing showing the as-installed length and cut-off level of each pile within
14 days from the completion date. These as-built drawings shall be certified by
Contractor's own PE.
On completion of all pile testing, all temporary works and equipment shall be removed
by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer.
5.1 Submissions
(e) Methods adopted for ensuring a seal at the bottom of casings prior to
concreting and safe guards to be adopted if tremie pipes are used for
concreting.
(f) Calculations for pile lengths including the socketed lengths and
adopted parameters for bearing and skin friction.
(g) Details of method of avoidance of critical services.
(h) Work programme indicating the anticipated time required for installation
of the soft and hard piles from (commencement of site works/start of
excavation) to completion.
(i) Track records showing evidence of experience of this type of work.
(j) General methods for control of the piling works.
(k) Confirm that the ground investigation information provided is adequate
for the piling works and design verification. List any concerns in the
tender.
(l) Details of the action that would be taken to stabilise an excavation if for
any reason the completion to the excavation of the concreting is
delayed or prevented.
(a) All relevant details of the method proposed during tender, including
details of the method of transporting and placing concrete in piles and
how the specified casting level tolerance will be achieved.
(b) Method of overcoming any obstructions encountered and drilling
through hard rock and ensuring no soil collapse within the borehole.
Include details of the reversed circulation drilling, chiselling or other
method as proposed.
(c) Methods to achieve the specified maximum permitted verticality of pile.
Method of checking the verticality and corrective actions to be taken if
the deviation exceeds the maximum permitted limits.
(d) Methods for installing piles in ground which exhibits Artesian conditions
at depth.
(e) Details of proposed plant and boring equipment
(f) Details of proposed monitoring equipment
(g) Details of specialists used for grouting
(h) Details of concrete and grout mixes
(i) Methods of concreting and grouting
(j) Methods of handling reinforcement
(k) Details of spacers to be used on reinforcement cage
(l) Details of permanent casing and the method of installation
(m) Details and properties of support fluid.
(n) Do not commence work for working piles before proposed methods are
accepted.
Submit the details for the As-Built Drawings for the piling works on A1 size
drawings including at least the following details:
(a) Final setting out plan, pile depths, pile sizes, pile capacities, pile
eccentricities, pile lengths and cut-off levels.
(b) Location of piles which have been discarded and not in use, e.g.
abandoned piles, unused existing foundation, rejected piles and
preliminary test piles.
(c) Location and type of pile load tests.
Prepare and submit the quality control plan for Engineer’s acceptance prior
to starting work.
5.2.1 General
Provide the Engineer with test certificates, analyses and mill sheets. Ensure
that adequate notice is given to the Engineer when the processes can be
inspected or tests can be witnessed.
Inspect each pile bore prior to the placing of concrete in it. Provide suitable
equipment to the Engineer’s acceptance for carrying out the inspection.
Inspect each pile bore prior to the placing of concrete in it. Provide suitable
equipment to the Engineer’s acceptance for carrying out the inspection.
Where the borehole is dry inspect from ground level to ensure that:
5.3 Tests
5.3.1.1 General
▪ Tensile test
▪ Bend and Re-bend test
▪ Weldability test.
Each sample is to comprise of six cubes, three for testing at seven days and
three for testing at 28 days after casting.
Propose the frequency of testing drilling fluid and the method and procedure
of sampling prior to the commencement of the work. The frequency may
subsequently be varied as required, depending on the consistency of the
results obtained.
Establish a suitably equipped and maintained site laboratory for testing the
support fluid. Provide skilled staff and all necessary apparatus to carry out
the sampling and testing.
5.4.4 Testing
Carry out the tests until a consistent working pattern has been
established, take account of the mixing process, any blending of
freshly mixed drilling fluid suspension and previously used drilling
fluid suspension and any process which may be used to remove
impurities from previously used drilling fluid suspension.
When the results show consistent behaviour, the tests for shear
strength and pH value may be discontinued, and tests to determine
density and viscosity is to be carried out as agreed. In the event of a
change in the established working pattern, tests for shear strength
and pH value is to be re-introduced for a period, if required.
strength)
5.5.1 Keep records of the installation of each pile with information as below.
Submit two copies of these records to the Engineer the next working day
after the pile was installed or as directed. Note any unexpected boring
conditions in the record.
(a) Contract
(b) Dsignation of piles and pile reference number (location)
(c) Pile type
(d) Nominal cross-sectional dimensions or diameters
(e) Nominal diameter of underream
(f) Length of preformed pile
(g) Standing groundwater level
(h) Date and time of boring
(i) Date of concreting
(j) Ground level at commencement of installation of pile
(k) Working level
(l) Depth from working level to pile toe
(m) Toe level
(n) Depth from working level to pile head level
(o) Depth of boring
(p) Length of temporary casing
(q) Length of permanent casing
(r) A log of soil type encountered from start to finish of excavation and
observed water levels.
(s) Length and details of reinforcement
(t) Concrete mix
(u) Volume of concrete supplied to pile where this can be measured in
practice
(v) A graph of theoretical and placed concrete volumes with depth.
(w) Concrete test cube numbers
(x) Concrete slump
(y) Level of concrete in pile before and after withdrawal of lining or tube
(z) All information regarding obstructions/delays and other interruptions to
the sequence of work
5.5.3 The Contractor will be required to supply three copies of such records free
of charge to the Engineer by sending them once a week.
The Engineer may change these requirements at his sole discretion, with no time and
cost impact.
SECTION 02500
SEWER WORKS
INDEX TO SPECIFICATION
CLAUSE PAGE
This specification section is the copyright of DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. No reproduction either in part or
in whole in any manner whoever is allowed without written permission from DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd.
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the Particular Specification, and all other contract documents.
This technical specification shall form part of the Contract and the Contractor shall allow for all
obligations, requirements, considerations, etc. to comply with the specification. The Contractor is
also deemed to have visited the site and fully acquainted himself as to the nature and
practicability of the works. No claims will be entertained as a result of his failure to do all of the
above.
The Consulting Civil and Structural Engineers are DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. The Contractor is
to note that when the term ‘Engineer’ in the following Specification means the representative of
the Consulting Engineers.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Engineer is referred to in the following specification,
such term shall be deemed to mean The Architect as defined in the Articles of Agreement or any
other person designated in writing by the Architect from time to time to exercise the power of the
Architect as required.
The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of The Eurocodes, Malaysia
Standards and Codes of Practice current at the date of tender, the Building Regulations and local
By-laws and to the satisfaction of the local Building Authorities empowered to control the Works,
the Specifications and drawings supplied to the Contractor and any other instructions issued by
the Engineer/Architect or their representative from time to time.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
Any reference in the Specifications to a Malaysia Standard (MS), Eurocodes (EC) or Code of
Practice (CP) shall imply the latest version at the time of tender of the applicable Standard or
Code of Practice. Where the requirements of the Specifications are more onerous or stringent, it
shall take precedence over the requirements of MS, EC or CP. The Engineer has the sole
discretion to modify or upgrade the specifications, drawings and documents to comply fully with
Eurocode requirements at no additional cost and time to the Contract.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the installation of pipelines for sewers, force
mains, delineated in these Contract Documents, and for providing all labour, materials
and equipment necessary for the installation of those works.
The following terms shall have the meaning hereby assigned to them expect where
the Contract clearly renders these meaning inapplicable:-
i. Pipe Means pipe or pipes, bends, junctions and other specials and
fittings, including joints and jointing parts.
iii. Pipeline Means those parts of the Works comprising pipes, manholes
and fittings.
The section covers the civil engineering aspects of the construction of sewers outside
of buildings, such as setting out, earthworks, concreting, ground monitoring and etc.
For requirements of piping works, pumps, vents and system testing etc., as well as
sanitary works within the building, refer to Mechanical specifications.
Read this work section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the other work
sections as follows:
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, ensure all of the Works comply with the
relevant requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the
body of the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for
approval by the Engineer, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative
Standards and Codes comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All
Standards and Codes quoted are the current version, unless specific year references
are noted.
Malaysia Standards
MS 881 Specification for pre-cast concrete pipes and fittings for drainage and
sewerage
Other Standards
BS 65 Specification for vitrified clay pipes, fittings and ducts, also flexible
mechanical joints for use solely with surface water pipes and fittings.
BS EN 295-1 Vitrified clay pipes and fittings and pipe joints for drains and sewers –
requirements.
BS EN 295-7 Vitrified clay pipes and fittings and pipe joints for drains and sewers.
Requirements for vitrified clay pipes and joints for pipe jacking.
BS EN 598 Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for sewerage
applications – requirements and test methods.
BS EN 681 Elastomeric Seal. Materials requirement for pipe joint seals used in
water and drainage applications.
BS EN 682 Elastomeric Seal. Materials requirement for pipe joint seals used in
pipes and fitting carrying gas hydrocarbons fluids.
In the event that the Standards or Codes are partially superseded or become
obsolete, refer to the latest edition or the approved substitution for the relevant
clauses.
The Contractor may, at his cost, employ the services of specialist firm to
assist the Engineer as he may require in any matter connected to pipe,
manholes and fittings including the inspection of materials and workmanship
and the witnessing of test at any stage (including manufacture) during the
execution and maintenance of the Works. Such independent tests may be
carried out during any stage during the execution and Defects Liability
period of the Works, but they shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his
own obligations under the Contract.
To the extent ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide labour,
plant and materials (but not special equipment) for direct assistance to the
specialist firm in their inspection and independent testing and for any further
work of investigation and repair which the Engineer considers necessary as
a result of such inspection or testing.
The cost of providing labour, plant and materials as aforesaid shall be borne
by the Contractor if the inspection test or further investigation shows that
materials and/or workmanship provided by the Contractor does not comply
with the specified requirements.
1.4.2 Tools
The Contractor shall supply suitable tools for cutting, chamfering, jointing,
testing and any other requirement or satisfactorily installing the pipelines.
Pipes may be stored in the open, but shall be placed on adequate timber
bearers to prevent damage. Pipes may be stacked one above the other up
to three pipes high provided suitable protective packing is placed between
them.
Co-ordinate with other contractors who may carry out other works at the
same time at the site. Take into account of site access, space occupation,
safety and safeguarding of adjoining properties and each other’s works.
Where applicable, prior to and upon completion of the site works, carry out a
condition survey to adjacent buildings in accordance with the requirements
of SECTION 01017 CONDITION SURVEY AND MONITORING. Submit all
records to the Engineer and adjacent property owners where directed.
Take cognisance of and co-ordinate with other contractors on site who may
be carrying out instrumentation and monitoring works to avoid duplication of
installation and readings.
Accept responsibility for the upholding of the adjoining buildings and roads,
footpaths etc., where applicable, together with the mains and services from
the time of taking possession of the site through the duration of the works.
Adequately maintain roads and footpaths within and adjacent to the site and
keep clear of mud and debris.
Verify and be satisfied that the information including the invert levels
and top levels of existing/proposed manholes given in the existing
site survey plans provided are accurate. Engage a registered
Surveyor to carry out additional site survey before commencing any
work.
Contamination
Protect all equipment and working area using fencing or other methods as
accepted.
1.4.12 Obstructions
Employ a registered surveyor throughout the Contract Period for the setting-
out of alignment and levels of the sewer line. Develop the details for the
setting-out based on the information given in the drawings.
The Contractor shall submit for approval detailed shop drawings of the pipes, joints,
reinforcement and all pipe specials, together with laying diagrams showing the
followings:-
3.0 MATERIALS
All vitrified clay pipe and fittings shall be Extra Strength, conforming to the
requirements of BS EN 295. They shall be provided with rubber-ring flexible
joint to BS EN 681 and BS EN 682. All pipes and fittings shall be free of
injurious cracks, checks, blisters, broken ends and other imperfection.
All ductile iron pipes and fittings are to comply with BS EN 598. They are to
be internally lined with high alumina cement (HAC) mortar in accordance
with BS EN 598 or alternatively, sulphate resisting cement (SRC) complying
with the type tested for chemical resistance and abrasion resistance as
specified in BS EN 598 for HAC. They are also to be externally coated with
a layer of metallic zinc and covered by a bituminous coating finishing.
3.1.3.4 Rejection
3.2.1 Manhole
Brick manholes shall not be used, due to high risk of excessive infiltration.
Details of manhole types and construction are shown in MSIG Volume III.
Straight back type taper top shall be used while reducing slabs type are
Manhole covers and frames shall comply with the specification in MSIG
Volume III and BS EN 124. Manhole cover and frames shall be capable to
bearing wheel load up to 400 kN and, as such, shall meet the test load
requirement for Class D400 manhole covers and frames given in BS EN
124. The material of manhole covers and frames shall be of spheroidal or
nodular graphite iron (otherwise known as ductile iron) complying with the
requirement specified in BS EN 1563 for Grade 500/7.
3.3 Paving
4.1 General
In planning and executing the works, be guided by the requirements as set out in BS
EN 1610.
A copy of the soil investigation report prepared by the specialist for the project is
available for the Contractor’s information. The report is intended solely as preliminary
and approximate guide to the nature of ground stratification as it is known to the
Engineer. Neither the completeness nor accuracy of the information provided is
guaranteed. No responsibility is assumed by the Employer or Engineer for any
opinion or conclusion five in the soil report. Trial holes shall be excavated well ahead
of the trench excavation to such depth as necessary to determine and confirm the
alignment for the trench.
Reinstatement of trial holes shall be carried out immediately after the required holes
are carried out to the approval of the Engineer and to the requirements of the relevant
Authority.
4.1.1. General
Trench excavation shall be carried out by such methods and to such lines,
dimensions and depths as shall allow for the proper construction of the
Works. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any rock in trench excavation shall
be so excavated that the clearance between the pipe when laid and the rock
sides and bottom of the trench is kept to the minimum limit necessary to
provide for the specified thickness of bedding and concrete protection of the
pipe. Socket holes and depressions for couplings, valves and the like shall
be excavated the same distance below these installations. The materials
excavated shall be used in the backfill or removed and disposed by the
Contractor, as required by the Engineer and as specified. The trench shall
be dug only so far in advance of pipe laying as the Engineer shall permit.
Minimum trench width shall be as required for proper assembly and joint
inspection, but in no case less than 300mm greater than nominal pipe
diameter. Maximum trench width shall not be greater than 1200mm. No
trench excavation shall commence until the pipe and fitting to be laid in that
length are available on the site.
The line and level of trenches shall be as shown on the drawings. Before
commencing trench excavations, the route of the trench shall be pegged out
accurately and the natural ground level shall be agreed with the Engineer.
Strong sight rail shall then be fixed and maintained at each change of
gradient, and at as many intermediate points as may be necessary. On
these rails shall be marked the center line and the level to which the
excavation is to be carried out, such rails being not more than 15 meter
apart.
In the event obstruction not shown on the plans are encountered during the
progress of the work which will require alteration to the plans, the Engineer
shall have the authority to change the plans and order the necessary
deviation from, the line and/or grade. The Contractor shall not make any
deviation from the specified line and/or grade without approval by the
Engineer. Should any deviations in line and/or grade be permitted by the
Engineer in order to reduce the amount of rock excavation or for other
similar convenience to the Contractor, any additional costs for the thrust
blocks, extra pipe footage, manholes or other appurtenances or additional
costs shall be borne by the Contractor. The Contractor shall include in his
unit rate in the Tender, provisions to cover any deviation from the invert
grade shown on the plans to facilitate extra depth required to eliminate
possible conflicts between culverts and other utilities with the force and
sewer mains.
All trench excavation and other work carried out within the limits of any
highway or roads shall be completed as rapidly as possible and the
Contractor shall make every effort to ensure that not more than half of the
width of the carriageway shall be obstructed at one time. Road drains and
curbs shall be kept free from obstruction.
The Engineer may direct that trench excavation in highways shall be located
in footpath or in verges rather than in the carriageway. If that is the case,
trench excavation shall wherever practicable be carried out such a way that
every part of the excavation is at least 900mm clear of the existing edge of
the carriageway.
In any event, the Contractor shall take special precautions from the time
when excavation has begun until the refilling of the trench is completed to
ensure that there is no disturbance of the adjacent road or road foundation.
Excavated material shall be removed from the site at the end of a day’s
work. Where excavated material has temporary been deposited on an
adjacent surface, the surface shall on completion of refilling be restored
entirely to its original condition and left free of loose stones.
All excavation carried out in the carriageway and footpath must be backfilled
with clean sand to be compacted in layers of not more than 230mm.
Backfilled excavation within carriageway shall be temporary covered with
M.S plate or surfaced with original road metaling or other approved hard
material emanating from trench excavation and a layer of premix 40mm
thick. Final reinstatement works shall be carried our soonest possible as
specified.
Trench excavation in surfaces other than roads shall include all surfaces
expect those asphalt surfaces, which require road reinstatement. These
surfaces include but not limited to fields, paddy fields, pasture land and the
like, footpaths, verges, non-asphalt roads, lanes, alleys and all private land.
Trench excavation located in fields shall in if the Engineer so requires have
temporary fencing erected around the length.
The Contractor is hereby notified that generally all sewer and force main
alignments not in streets, which are covered with a vegetation growth, must
be removed and disposed off the site of work. The Contractor shall have
particular regard to the safety of livestock in fields or which may be
introduced to the field, and shall ensure that all open excavations access
routes and steep or loose slopes arising from the Contractor’s operations in
these field are adequately fenced and protected. After the erection of
temporary fencing where required, the Contractor shall remove top soil to
such depth and over such area as may be necessary to provide sufficient
material to ensure adequate surface reinstatement of the working areas
occupied by the Contractor for construction of the pipeline.
provide space for such support and for any other working space. If for any
reason any portion of trench excavation shall give way, the Contractor shall
at his own expenses take all necessary remedial measures including the
excavation and removal of all the ground thereby disturbed.
When the specified levels of trench excavations are reached, the Engineer
will inspect the ground exposed and if he consider that any part of the
ground is by its nature unsuitable, he may direct the Contractor to excavate
further and to refill the further excavation with such material as he may
direct. Should the bottom of any trench excavation while acceptable to the
Engineer at the time of his inspection subsequently become unacceptable
due to exposure to weather conditions or due to flooding or have become
puddled, soft or loosing during the progress of the Works, the Contractor
shall remove such damaged, softened or loosened material and excavate
further by hand. In this case, the cost of the extra excavation and of the
additional foundation materials required will be the Contractor’s
responsibility.
Any excavated material not required for or not suitable for use as refilling as
aforesaid or use elsewhere in the Works shall become the property of the
Contractor and he shall be entirely responsible for its removal from the Site
and for its ultimate disposal. The Contractor is reminded that when working
along carriageway it is often not possible to stack or place excavated
materials along the trench and they may be required to remove such
materials required for backfill to temporary sites to be provided by the
Contractor and to return these materials on completion of pipe laying.
reasonably practicable after the pipe have been laid and jointed. Pipe laying
shall follow closely upon the progress of trench excavation, and the
Contractor shall not permit unreasonably excessive lengths of trench
excavation to remain open while awaiting testing of the pipeline. Length of
the trench excavation shall be not more than 15 meters ahead of the pipe
laying operation.
4.1.11. Of Water
All excavation and placement of backfill and fill shall be carried out in dry
conditions. The Contractor shall furnish, install and operate all necessary
machinery, appliances and equipment to keep excavations free from water
during construction, and shall dewater and dispose of the water so as not to
cause injury to public or private property, or to cause it nuisance or a
menace to the public. He shall at all times have on hand sufficient pumping
equipment and machinery in good working condition for all ordinary
emergencies, including power outage, and shall have available at all times
competent workmen for the operation of the pumping equipment. During
excavation, construction of manholes, etc., installation of pipelines and
sewers, placing of structure and trench backfill and the placing and setting
of concrete, excavations shall be kept free of water. The Contractor shall
control surface runoff so as to prevent entry or collection of water in
excavations. The static water level shall be drawn down a minimum of one
foot below the bottom of the excavation so as to maintain the undisturbed
state of the foundation soils and allow the placement of any fill or backfill to
the required density. The dewatering system shall be installed and operated
so that the ground water level outside the excavation is not reduced to the
extent that would damage or endanger adjacent structures or property.
Before commencement of dewatering, the Contractor shall file for record
purposes only with the Engineer the method, installation and details of the
dewatering systems he proposes to use.
hand or by suitable hand operated plant. No fill material shall be placed and
no compaction shall be permitted adjacent to concrete for fourteen days
following placing of the concrete.
Where trench excavation is carried out close to or across the line of sewers,
pipes, cables and other services, the Contractor shall where necessary
provide temporary supports or slings and where such sewer, pipe, cable or
other service is temporarily disturbed it shall be replaced. Where in the
opinions of the Engineer, construction of the pipeline cannot reasonably be
carried out unless the sewer pipe or other service is permanently diverted or
permanently supported by concrete he shall order the Contractor to
undertake such work. Notwithstanding any relevant information furnished by
the Employer or Engineer, the Contractor shall be responsible for
ascertaining from his own inspection of the Site and the respective supply
Authorities and other public bodies the position of all mains, pipes and
cables whether underground or overhead, within or near the Site.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all the additional
measures necessary for the proper construction of the pipeline crossing
underneath or over rivers, culverts and other watercourses including
maintaining the full flow of water.
In general, thrust blocks will be placed at all changes in pipe direction greater than
seven (7) degree. Each thrust block shall be designed to have a sufficient point.
Thrust devices shall be cast-in- place concrete metal harness, or other suitable
devices. Thrust blocks shall be constructed of 20 N/mm 2 Portland cement concrete
and shall be placed between fitting and trench wall or trench bottom, as the case may
be. The bearing faces of the block shall be placed against freshly cut and undisturbed
trench wall or bottom of sound material. If the thrust exceeds the bearing value of the
surrounding soil, the soil shall be pre-compacted before placing concrete. Formwork
shall be constructed wherever necessary to confine the concrete to the prescribed
dimensions for the block. All formwork shall be removed prior to testing.
4.5.1 General
The Contractor shall, after excavating the trench and preparing the proper
bedding for the pipe, furnish all necessary facilities for properly lowering and
placing sections of the pipe in the trench without damage and shall properly
install the pipe. The sections of pipe shall be fitted together correctly and
shall be laid true to line and grade in accordance with the bench marks
established by the Contractor. After the trench for the pipe has been
excavated to the proper line and grade in the manner before specified, the
pipe shall be laid therein in the following manner and the contractors shall
submit one set of 'as-built' intermediate tracing to the Engineer.
Prior to laying of pipes, the Contractor shall carry out independent survey on
the invert levels of the existing manholes or/and sewer line where the new
line will be connected. Such record of survey shall be submitted to the
Engineer for record.
No pipe shall be rolled into place for lowering into the trench. Before laying,
each pipe shall be cleaned out and inspected for defects. Any defective,
damaged or unsound pipe shall be rejected. Before any pipe is lowered into
place, the bedding shall be prepared so that each length of pipe shall have
a firm and uniform bearing over the entire length of the barrel. The pipes
shall be laid in straight lines, both in the horizontal and vertical planes,
between manholes or, where directed in the case of force mains and larger
diameter sewers to regular curves. Each pipe shall be plumbed to its correct
line and directed and accurately sighted by means of boning rods and sight
rails fixed to secure posts which shall be set up and maintained at each end
of the sewer to be laid and not more than 15 meter apart. Sight rails shall be
clearly painted in contrasting colour and be not less than 150mm deep,
straight and level. Boning rods shall be of robust construction clearly painted
and accurately made to the various lengths required, the lower end being
provided with a shoe of sufficient projection to rest on the invert of the pipe
as laid. The boning rod shall be complete with a vertical spirit level. Boning
rods and sight rails shall not be removed until the pipeline has been
checked and approved by the Engineer.
Whenever the work ceases for any reasons, the unfinished end of the
pipelines shall be securely closed with a tight fitting plug or cover. The
interior of each pipe after being laid shall be thoroughly cleaned. Each pipe
shall be carefully lowered onto its prepared bed by means of necessary
slings and tackle. A recess shall be left in the prepared bed to permit the
sling to be withdrawn. If the prepared bed is damaged the pipe shall be
raised and the bed made good before pipe laying is continued. Pipes shall
be laid upgrade. Any pipe which is not in true alignment, both vertical and
horizontal, or shows any undue settlement after laying, shall be taken up
and re-laid correctly by the Contractor at his own expense. All pipelines
adjoining structures (including manholes) shall have a mechanical joint
(flexible) within or at 300mm from the face of such structure. Where sub-soil
water is encountered it shall be kept below the sockets when adjoining by
pumping or other means. In no case shall pipes be jointed before being
lowered into position. If any damaged should occur to any pipes through
failure of the Contractor to comply with these conditions, the damage shall
be made good at the Contractor's expense.
The surface shall be firm and true to grade. If soft, spongy, unstable, or
other unsuitable material is encountered upon which the bedding material or
pipe is to be placed, this unsuitable material shall be removed to a depth
ordered by the Engineer and replaced with suitable densified crushed rock
bedding material and paid for at the unit rate in the Bill of Quantities.
Bedding shall be in accordance with details on the drawings.
For the purpose of reducing the angular deflections at pipe joints, and for
closure sections, the Contractor shall be permitted to install pipe sections of
less than standard length. Closing courses and short sections of pipe shall
be fabricated and installed by the Contractor as found necessary in the field.
Where closing pieces are required, the Contractor shall make all necessary
measurements and shall be responsible for the correctness thereof.
A change of direction to deflect force mains from a straight line, either in the
vertical or horizontal planes to avoid obstruction or where long radius curves
are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that
required for satisfactory connection of the joint and shall be approved by the
Engineer. Where a change of direction cannot be made by deflection at the
joints of ordinary straight pipes, bends shall be used. The locations of such
bends and other specials are indicated upon the drawings and their exact
positions will be determined by the Engineer on the Site.
The measurement for payment for sewer installation will be taken from
center-to-center of manholes and all eyes and specials will be included in
the linear measurement. The Contractor shall arrange his pipe lengths to
the best advantage for installation of sewer laterals. No extras will be
allowed for cutting pipes to waste on account of sewer laterals or for pipe
closures at manholes as detailed on the drawings.
4.6 Manholes
At each change of gradient or direction at each intersection with other sewers and at
such other points as shown on the drawings, a manhole shall be constructed in
accordance to the drawings. Channel inverts shall be accurately laid to meet pipe
invert elevations at the same time as the sewer pipes are laid, the bends being as
"slow" as possible by sitting the manholes "off-centre" at changes in direction. Short
lengths of not more than 300mm of pipe with flexible joints shall be provided at entry
and exit to manholes. Manhole floor shall be constructed with concrete formed to the
required shapes with concrete channel inverts including half round concrete channels,
bends, tapers, junctions and double junctions. The top of the in-situ benching shall be
sloped back at 1 in 12. Provision shall be made for future sewer connections to
manholes by laying one length of pipe sealed by a stopper or end capped where
ordered. The pipes shall be laid at the levels, slopes and in the directions instructed
by the Engineer.
Approved manhole covers shall be set to the road profile and be flush with the road
surface, Manhole covers located in unimproved areas shall be set at an elevation to
prevent the entry of surface water as directed by the Engineer. Drop of manholes
shall be as shown on the drawings and shall be formed where the upstream length of
sewer enters a manhole at a higher level than the manhole invert level. All manholes
shall be watertight on completion and where leakage is discovered the Contractor
shall perform such work and provide all materials as are necessary to make good
such faulty work. The Contractor shall take all necessary preventive measures and
ensure that the pipelines and manholes are clear of any rubbish and debris.
Hard material such as broken rock and original road metaling shall normally
be used only for the surface reinstatement of roads as specified, but where
it is suitable and available in sufficient quantity, it may be used in place of or
as well as the aforesaid coarse material.
Where necessary, the Contractor shall adjust the moisture content of the
refill material either drying out or by adding water to assist the compaction of
the material. During compaction, the backfill shall have a uniform moisture
content equal to or a little above the optimum moisture content recorded in
the Compaction Test. Backfill shall be compacted to a dry density of not less
than 90 percent of the maximum dry density when tested in accordance with
these specifications.
Should the material being placed as refilling, while acceptable at the time
when approved, become unacceptable to the Engineer due to exposure to
weather conditions or due to flooding or have become puddle, soft or
segregated during the progress of works, the Contractor shall at his own
expense remove such damaged, softened or segregated material and
replace it with fresh approved material. To permit the proper consolidation of
backfill into the voids behind trench sheeting and supports, trench sheeting
shall be withdrawn gradually as backfill progresses in depth and along the
trench. On no account shall any excavated material be dozed back when
refilling trenches in roads and no backfilling shall be carried out unless in the
opinion of the Engineer, sufficient mechanical rammers are in operation on
that portion of the work.
4.7.2 Reinstatement
4.7.2.1 General
As the work proceeds replace and maintain the surface soil and turf,
kerbs, paving, apron or other material to restore the disturbed
surfaces to their original state or condition to the Engineer’s
acceptance.
Replace and restore all fences and hedges with matching material
or as directed.
4.7.2.5 Cleaning Up
4.7.2.5.3 Cleaned, grease and oil all equipment and fittings and
make all necessary adjustments to ensure their full
working efficiency.
4.7.2.5.4 Sweep clean and dry all site roads, paths and drains
and remove all construction plant and materials from
site.
5.1 Submission
5.1.1.1 General
Provide a detailed method statement to the Engineer for acceptance
prior to commencement of the works.
5.1.2 Programme
Submit the setting-out plan for the sewer line as endorsed by the registered
surveyor to the Engineer for acceptance prior to commencing the field
works.
5.2 Testing
Submit for the Engineer's approval details of his proposed methods and program for
testing (including details of test equipment) and shall arrange for all tests to be
witnessed by the Engineer and/or Authority.
5.2.3.1 General
Tests for line, level and freedom from obstruction shall be carried
out by means of a mirror at one end and a light source at the
other. These tests shall be carried out whenever deemed
necessary by the Engineer or his representative.
5.2.3.5 Record
SECTION 02700
ROAD WORKS
INDEX TO SPECIFICATION
CLAUSE PAGE
This specification section is the copyright of DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. No reproduction either in part or
in whole in any manner whoever is allowed without written permission from DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd.
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the Particular Specification, and all other contract documents.
This technical specification shall form part of the Contract and the Contractor shall allow for all
obligations, requirements, considerations, etc. to comply with the specification. The Contractor is
also deemed to have visited the site and fully acquainted himself as to the nature and
practicability of the works. No claims will be entertained as a result of his failure to do all of the
above.
The Consulting Civil and Structural Engineer is DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. The Contractor is to
note that when the term ‘Engineer’ in the following Specification means the representative of the
Consulting Engineer.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Engineer is referred to in the following specification,
such term shall be deemed to mean The Architect or Superintending Officer’s Representative (S.
O. Rep.) as defined in the Articles of Agreement or any other person designated in writing by the
Architect or the Superintending Officer (S.O.) from time to time to exercise the power of the
Architect or S.O.
The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Uniform Building By-
Laws of Malaysia, the Malaysian Standards and Codes of Practices, Malaysian Standards
Eurocodes current at the date of tender and to the satisfaction of the local Building Authorities
empowered to control the Works, the Specifications and drawings supplied to the Contractor and
any other instructions issued by the Engineer/Architect or their representative from time to time.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
Any reference in the Specifications to a Malaysian Standard (MS), Eurocodes (EC) or Code of
Practice (CP) shall imply the latest version at the time of tender of the applicable Standards or
Code of Practices. Should there be any discrepancy between these Specifications and the MS,
EC or CP, the more onerous requirement/s shall be adopted. The Engineer has the sole
discretion to modify or upgrade the specifications, drawings and documents to comply fully with
MS Eurocode requirements at no additional cost and time to the Contract.
1.1 Scope
(b) Subbase Course The layer(s) of the specified material built up to the
required designed thickness immediately overlaying
the subgrade. It serves as an aid to disperse the load
from the base course before transmitting it to the
subgrade.
(d) Surface Course All the bound layer(s) within the pavement i.e.
wearing course, intermediate course and binder
course are, embodied under this general terminology.
This layer forms an impermeable and flexible lining of
high elastic modulus.
(e) Binder Course The bound layer(s) overlaying the base course. Apart
from supporting and dispersing the traffic load, it also
resists shear.
(f) Wearing Course The topmost layer of the surface course. It is in direct
contact with the traffic and consequently, it must
resist abrasion and prevent skidding.
Read this work section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the other work
sections as follows:
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, ensure all of the Works comply
with the relevant requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or
referenced in the body of the Specification. Alternative Standards and
Codes may be proposed for approval by the Engineer, provided it can be
demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the
requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Malaysian Standards
Other Standards
BS 594 Part 1: Hot rolled Asphalt for roads and other paved
areas. Specification for constituent materials and
Asphalt mixtures
The intended layout, design and details for the proposed road, footpath and
paving works including the type of paving, levels and alignments for the
project are shown in the drawings. Based on the information given engage
qualified and experienced personnel to propose the following for the works
to the Engineer’s acceptance:
Co-ordinate with other contractors who may carry out other works at the
same time at the site. Take into account of site access, space occupation,
safety and safeguarding of adjoining properties and each other’s works.
Where applicable, prior to and upon completion of the site works, carry out a
condition survey to adjacent buildings in accordance with the requirements
of section 01017 Condition Survey and Monitoring. Submit all records to
the Engineer and adjacent property owners where directed.
Take cognisance of and co-ordinate with other contractors on site who may
be carrying out instrumentation and monitoring works to avoid duplication of
installation and readings.
Accept responsibility for the upholding of the adjoining buildings and roads,
footpaths etc., where applicable, together with the mains and services from
the time of taking possession of the site through the duration of the works.
Adequately maintain roads and footpaths within and adjacent to the site and
keep clear of mud and debris.
Verify and be satisfied that the information given in the existing site
survey plans provided are accurate. If necessary, engage a
registered Surveyor to carry out additional site survey before
commencing any work.
1.4.6.4 Contamination
Provide and maintain all necessary temporary access roads and divert and
reinstate the permanent drainage system to the satisfaction of the relevant
authority.
Provide all temporary roads with drainage ditches over their full length.
1.4.9 Obstructions
Employ a registered surveyor throughout the Contract Period for the setting-
out and levelling of the horizontal and vertical alignments, and all other
ancillary works.
Develop the details for setting-out for horizontal and vertical alignment
based on the information given in the drawings.
When carrying out the contractor’s proposals as set out in clause 1.4.1, take into
account the following performance requirements:
Ensure the achievement of the strength and density requirements for the
sub-grade, sub-base and bases as stipulated below.
Achieve the strength and other property requirements for the various types
of pavement as indicated in the drawings or specified below.
3.1 Subgrade
3.1.1 General
3.1.2 Materials
Material for the top 300mm of subgrade shall have a minimum soaked
laboratory California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of 5% when compacted to 95% of
the maximum dry density determined in the BS 1377 Compaction Test
(4.5kg Heavy Rammed Method). Throughout the top 300mm of subgrade,
the material shall be compacted to not less than 95% of the maximum dry
density determined in the BS 1377 Compaction Test (4.5kg Heavy Rammed
Method).
In cut area, the top 300mm of the subgrade shall be sacrificed and
recompacted to 95% of the maximum dry density determined in the BS
1377 Compaction Test (4.5kg Heavy Rammed Method). If the S.O. is fully
satisfied that the subgrade in its natural state possesses a density
exceeding the requirements, then the surface of the subgrade shall be
trimmed and rolled to obtain a smooth finish. Where the material in cut area
is found to be unsuitable for use in the top 300mm of subgrade or to a
suitable level to be determined by the S.O., it shall be removed and
replaced with suitable material which shall be compacted as indicated
above. Alternatively, stabilizing agent may be used subjected to the S.O.
approval.
The subgrade shall be finished in a neat and workmanlike manner, and the
width of embankments and cuts shall be everywhere at least of those
specified or shown in the Drawings on both sides of the centerline. The top
surface of the subgrade shall have the required shape, superelevation,
levels and grades and shall be finished everywhere to within +10mm and -
30mm of the required level.
Where rock surfaces extend over the whole width of the formation, the rock
surface shall be trimmed to a free draining profile, at or below formation
levels. No high spot shall protrude above the formation level. Any voids or
cavities more than 0.5 meter below the formation level shall be filled up with
approved lean concrete having 7-days cube strength greater than 7 N/mm2.
The rock surface shall then be brought up to the formation levels with
approved crushed rock or gravel, regulated and blinded.
Where rock outcrop over part of the formation only, the rock outcrop shall be
cut down to at least the formation level.
3.2.1 General
This work shall consist of furnishing, placing, compacting and shaping lower
subbase material on a prepared and accepted subgrade in accordance with
this Specification and the lines, levels, grades, dimensions and cross-
sections shown on the Drawings and/or as required by the S.O.
3.2.2 Materials
Lower subbase shall be placed over the full width of the formation to the
required thickness as shown on the Drawings or directed by the S.O. in one
layer or more, each layer not exceeding 200mm compacted thickness.
Where two or more layers are required, they shall be of approximately equal
thickness and none shall be less than 100mm compacted thickness.
The lower subbase shall be finished in a neat and workmanlike manner, and
shall have an average thickness over any 100 meter length not less than the
required thickness. The top surface of the lower subbase shall have the
require shape, super elevation, levels and grades, and shall be everywhere
within the tolerances specified in Section 5.
3.3 Subbase
3.3.1 General
3.3.2 Materials
9.5mm 30 – 65 40 – 75 50 – 85 60 – 100 - -
425 um 8 – 20 15 – 30 15 – 30 25 – 45 20 – 50 30 – 70
75 um 2–8 5 – 20 5 – 20 5 – 20 6 – 20 8 – 25
Subbase shall be placed with equipment approved by the S.O. over the full
width of the formation to the required thickness as shown on the Drawings
or directed by the S.O. in one layer or more each layer not exceeding
200mm compacted thickness. Where two or more layers are required, they
shall be of approximately equal thickness and none shall be less than
100mm compacted thickness.
The subbase shall be finished in a neat and workmanlike manner. Its width
shall be everywhere at least that specified or shown on the Drawings on
both sides of the center-line, and its average thickness over any 100 meter
length shall be not less than the required thickness. The top surface of the
subbase shall have the required shape, superelevation, levels and grades,
and shall be everywhere within the tolerances specified in Section 5.
3.4.1 General
This work shall consist of furnishing, placing compacting and shaping gravel
surfacing material on a prepared and accepted subgrade or lower subbase
in accordance with this Specification and the lines, level grades, dimensions
and cross-sections shown on the Drawings and/or as required by the S.O.
3.4.2 Material
12.5mm 45 – 75 55 – 85 60 – 100 -
4.75mm 30 – 60 35 – 65 50 – 85 55 – 90
2.00mm 20 – 45 25 – 50 40 – 70 40 – 70
425 um 15 – 30 15 – 30 25 – 45 20 – 50
75 um 8 – 20 8 – 20 8 – 20 8 – 25
The gravel surfacing shall be finished in a neat and workmanlike manner its
width shall be everywhere at least that specified or shown on the Drawings
on both sides of the center-line. And its average thickness over any 100
meter length shall be not less than the required thickness and its minimum
thickness at any point shall be not less than the required thickness minus
20mm. The top surface of the gravel surfacing shall have the required
shape, superelevation, levels and grades, and shall be everywhere within
10mm if the required plan or such higher, approximately parallel plane, as
the S.O. shall approve.
3.5.1 General
3.5.2 Materials
The materials shall conform to the following physical and mechanical quality
requirements:
Compaction Test (4.5kg rammer method) and soaked for 4 days under a
surcharge of 4.5 kg.
g. The gradation shall comply with the envelope shown in Table 3.3 for the
type specified.
28.0mm - 70 – 100
20.0mm 60 – 80 60 – 90
10.0mm 40 – 60 40 – 65
5.0mm 25 – 40 30 – 55
2.36mm 15 – 30 -
2.0mm - 20 – 40
600um 8 – 22 -
425um - 10 – 25
75um 0–8 2 – 10
Prior to placing any crushed aggregate road base material, the underlying
subgrade, lower subbase or subbase shall have been shaped and
compacted in accordance with the provisions of the appropriate Section of
this Specification. Notwithstanding any earlier approval of finished subgrade
or lower subbase or subbase, any damage to or deterioration of the
subgrade or lower subbase or subbase shall be made good to the
satisfaction of the S.O. before crushed aggregate road base is constructed.
where rolling shall begin at the lower edge and progress uniformly towards
the higher edge. In all cases compaction shall be carried out in such a
manner that each section receives equal compactive effort, all to the
satisfaction of the S.O.
3.6.1 General
This work shall consist of the careful and thorough cleaning of the surface of
a prepared and accepted crushed aggregate road base, and the furnishing
and application to the cleaned road base surface of a bituminous priming
material, all in accordance with this Specification and the lines, dimensions
and cross-sections shown on the Drawings and/or as required by S.O.
3.6.2 Material
3.6.3 Equipment
a. Power Broom
The distributor shall have a suitable capacity and shall be equipped with
a gas or oil fired heating system capable of heating a full charge of
bituminous material to 180°C. The beating system shall be such that
overheating of the bituminous material will not occur and shall be of a
type in which flames from the burner do not come into direct contact with
the casing of the tank containing the bituminous material. The tank shall
be insulated in such a manner that when filled with bituminous material
at 180°C and not heated, the drop in temperature shall be less than 3°C
per hour. A thermometer shall be provided to measure continuously the
temperature of the bituminous material in the tank and shall be so
arranged that the highest temperature in the tank is measured. The tank
shall be fitted with an accurately calibrated dipstick or contents gauge,
and the pipe for filling the tank shall be fitted with an easily replaceable
filter.
The distributor shall run on pneumatic tyred wheels of such width and
number that the load produced on the road surface when the vehicle is
fully charged shall not exceed 12kg/mm of tyre width. The vehicle shall
be equipped with a ‘fifth wheel’ tachometer system to accurately
measure its forward speed during spraying operations.
a. General Conditions
Bitumen prime coat work shall only be carried out in dry, warm weather
when the surface to be treated is essentially dry.
Prior to applying the prime coat, the crushed aggregate road base shall
have been shaped and compacted in accordance with the provisions of
Sub-Section 3.5. Notwithstanding any earlier approval of finished
crushed aggregates road base, any damage to or deterioration of the
road base shall be made good to the satisfaction of the S.O. before
prime coat is applied.
Immediately prior to applying the bituminous material, the full width of the
surface to be treated shall be swept using a power broom followed by a
compressed air blower and, if necessary, scarped using hand tools to
remove all dirt, dust and other objectionable material, all to the
satisfaction of the S.O.
The bituminous priming material shall be sprayed onto the cleaned road
base surface by means of a pressure distributor. Any areas inaccessible
to the distributor spray bar shall be treated using the distributor’s hand
spraying system. The rate or rates of application shall be as directed by
the S.O. based on the results of test applications, but shall usually be in
the range 0.5 to 1.0 liter/m2. The temperature of cutback bitumen shall
be maintained in the range 50°C to 70°C during spraying operations. For
bitumen emulsions, the spraying temperature shall be in the range 25°C
to 45°C.
The surfaces of structures, road furniture and tress adjacent to the areas
being sprayed shall be protected in such a manner as to prevent their
being spattered or marred by bituminous material. Bituminous materials
shall not be discharged into road
Prime coat shall normally be left undisturbed for at least 24 hours after
application and shall not be opened to traffic until, in the opinion of the
S.O., it has penetrated the road base and cured sufficiently so that it will
not be picked up by the wheels of vehicles.
The Contractor shall maintain the prime coat, all to the satisfaction of the
S.O., until the overlying pavement course is constructed, which shall not
be within 24 hours after the application of the bituminous priming
material nor within such longer period as is required, in the opinion of the
S.O., for the prime coat to achieve maximum penetration of the road
base and become fully cured.
3.7.1 General
This work shall consist of the careful and thorough cleaning of the surface of
a prepared and accepted bituminous or bitumen primed pavement course,
and the furnishing and application to the cleaned surface of a bituminous
tack coat prior to the construction of an overlying bituminous pavement
course, all in accordance with this Specification and the lines, dimensions
and cross-sections shown on the Drawings and/or as required by the S.O.
3.7.2 Material
3.7.3 Equipment
a. General Conditions
Traffic shall be kept off the tack coat at all times, and the Contractor shall
maintain the tack coat, all to the satisfaction of the S.O., until the
pavement course is constructed.
3.8.1 General
This work shall consist of the careful and thorough cleaning of a prepared
and accepted bituminous or bitumen primed pavement the furnishing and
placing an the cleaned surface of one or two of bituminous material and
cover aggregate, all in accordance with this Specification and the lines,
dimensions and cross-sections shown on the Drawings and/or as required
by the S.O.
3.8.2 Material
a. Bituminous Material
6.3mm - - 0 – 20 85 – 100
3.8.3 Equipment
a. Power broom
f. Tip-Trucks
The roller shall have nine wheels equipped with smooth treaded tyres all
of the same size and construction, and capable of operating at inflation
pressures of up to 0.9 N/mm2. Five wheels shall be on the driven axle
and four on the steering axle, all equally spaced on both axles and
arranged so that the tyres on the steering axle track midway between
those on the driven axle with a small overlap. The roller shall be
equipped with water tanks, sprinkler systems and pads of coconut
matting to keep all tyres evenly wetted during operation. The roller shall
be equipped with means of adjusting its total weight by ballasting so that
the load per wheel can be varied in the range 1.0 to 2.0 tonnes. In
operation, the ballasted weight and the tyre inflation pressure shall be
adjusted to meet the requirements of each particular operation. Each tyre
shall be kept inflated at the specified pressure such that the pressure
difference between any two tyres shall not exceed 0.04 N/mm2. Means
shall be provided for checking and adjusting tyre pressures at all times at
the place of the works.
The Contractor shall provide the S.O. with a calibration chart for the roller
showing the relationship between the quantity or depth of ballast and
total weight, and also a chart showing the relationship between wheel
load, tyre inflation pressure and contact pressure.
a. General conditions
The rate of application shall be checked for each spraying run from
measurements of the quantities of aggregate in the trucks and the area
treated, or by sampling and measuring the aggregate spread on the
road. Any bare or insufficiently covered areas shall be made good by
hand spreading as quickly as possible. Aggregate in excess of the rate
prescribed shall be evenly distributed over the surface or removed as
quickly as possible, all to the satisfaction of the S.O.
Rolling shall generally begin at the outer edge of surface dressing and
progress uniformly towards the center on each side except on
superelevated curves where rolling shall begin at the lower edge and
progress uniformly towards the higher edge. Consecutive roller passes
shall generally overlap by about one half of the roller's width.
When, in the opinion of the S.O., the bituminous material has hardened
sufficiently to prevent the dislodgement of embedded aggregate by the
action of the power broom, all loose aggregate shall be swept from the
treated surface using the power broom and compressed air blower and
disposed of to the satisfaction of the S.O. Where the dressing so
prepared is the first application of a double bituminous surface dressing.
Construction of the second application of bituminous material and cover
aggregate shall then proceed as soon as is practicable.
e. Opening to traffic
3.9.1 General
3.9.2 Material
a. Aggregates
37.5mm - - 100
28.0mm - - 80 – 100
14.0mm 80 – 95 70 – 95 58 – 82
10.0mm 68 – 90 56 – 81 50 – 75
5.0mm 52 – 72 40 – 65 36 – 58
3.35mm 45 – 62 32 – 58 30 – 52
1.18mm 30 – 45 20 – 42 18 – 38
425 µm 17 – 30 12 – 28 11 – 25
150 µm 7 – 16 6 – 16 5 – 14
75 µm 4 – 10 4–8 3-8
The gradation envelopes in the above Table are purposely wider than
the tolerances for good works control of asphaltic concrete mixes. For
each type of mix required in the Works, the Contractor shall establish a
job mix formula gradation which shall consist of a single definite
percentage passing for each sieve size in the above Table and shall
produce a smooth curve within and essentially parallel to the appropriate
gradation envelope. This job mix formula gradation, with the allowable
tolerances for a single test as specified in Sub-Section 3.9.3.c, then
becomes the job control envelope and this job control envelope must be
tot any within the limits of the appropriate gradation envelope in the
above Table.
b. Mineral Filler
Mineral filler shall be finely divided mineral matter such as rock dust,
limestone dust, hydrated lime, hydraulic cement, or such other suitable
material as the S.O. shall approve. At the time of mixing with bitumen it
shall be sufficiently dry to flow freely and shall be essentially free from
agglomerations. Not less than 70% by weight shall pass the B.S. 75 µn
sieve.
c. Bituminous material
d. Anti-stripping agent
Accordingly, the Contractor shall carry out bitumen stripping tests with
the proposed aggregates to demonstrate to the complete satisfaction of
the S.O. that the aggregates will perform satisfactorily in service with the
specified bitumen binder. Such tests shall be carried out in accordance
with AASHTO Test Method T 182, or such other test methods as the
S.O. shall direct or approve. When AASHTO Test Method T 182 is used,
the coated area at the end of the mixture's period of immersion in water
shall be not less than 95%.
Where, in the opinion of the S.O., ordinary Portland cement does not
perform satisfactorily as an anti-stripping agent, the Contractor may
propose to use another adhesion and anti-stripping agent in addition to,
or wholly or partially instead of, the ordinary Portland cement specified
above. Such agent shall be of a type approved by the S.O. and shall be
thoroughly mixed with the bituminous binder, all in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. In such a case, the agent shall be added to
the bitumen binder used in the bitumen stripping tests in the appropriate
amount and manner.
A sample of each trial mix (i.e. each combination of trial gradation and
bitumen content) shall be subject to a comprehensive Marshall Method
test and analysis as follows:
For each trial mix conforming to a proposed job mix formula, the
parameters of the above tests and analyses shall conform to the
requirements of the appropriate type of mix as given in Table 3.10.
Air voids shall be defined as the small pockets of air between the coated
aggregate particles in a compacted asphaltic concrete mix. The portion
of the bitumen absorbed into the aggregate particles must therefore be
allowed for when calculating the air voids. For combined aggregate with
water absorption of not more than 2.0%, the absorbed bitumen may be
estimated on the basis that the absorption of bitumen will be
approximately 20% of the water absorption.
The S.O. may require changes of any of the factors in each proposed job
mix formula and further tests and analyses in order to attain optimum
quality of the asphaltic concrete mixes.
b. Plant trials
After having received the S.O.'s preliminary approval of his proposed job
mix formulae, the Contractor shall arrange to mix, lay and compact
asphaltic concrete conforming to the proposed formula for each class of
mix required in the Works. A minimum of 10 tonnes of each mix shall be
placed in trial areas to demonstrate to the satisfaction of the S.O. that the
mixing, laying and compacting equipment conforms to the requirements
of this Specification, and that the proposed mixes are satisfactory. The
trial areas shall not be part of the Contract Works but shall be provided
by the Contractor at his own expense. They shall be approved' by the
S.O.
As a result of the plant trials, the S.O. may require amendments to the
job mix formulae, further tests and analyses, and possibly additional
plant trials before finally approving the mixes for full scale production and
use in the Works.
c. The S.O.’s final approval of the job mix formulae shall bind the
Contractor to furnish asphaltic concrete mixes meeting the precise
gradation and bitumen contents specified in these formulae within the
tolerances set forth in Table 3.11. Modification to a job mix formula may
only made with the approval of the S.O. Should the S.O. at any time
have reason to believe that the materials and methods of mixing and
laying are different from those approved, he shall so advise the
Contractor, and may order that asphaltic concrete works be discontinued
pending further trials and testing.
Bitumen ± 0.2%
3.9.4 Equipment
The Contractor shall provide all the plant and equipment necessary for
executing the work in accordance with this Specification and shall furnish
the S.O. with such details of particular item of equipment, e.g. manufacturer,
model type, capacity, weight, operating features, etc., as the S.O. shall
require.
The asphalt plant shall be either a batch plant or a drum mix plant or a
continuous mix plant of recognized manufacture and shall be approved
by the S.O. It shall conform to the requirements described hereunder.
The mixing plant shall have a capacity suited to the Works and sufficient
to enable the paver to operate more or less continuously when paving at
normal speeds at the required thicknesses. The plant shall be so
designed as to enable consistent production of asphaltic concrete mixes
within the tolerances prescribed in this Specification, all to the
satisfaction of the S.O.
Scales for all weigh boxes or hoppers shall be of the springless dial type,
accurate to within 0.5% of the maximum load that may be required.
Scale dials and pointers shall be easily read from their operator's normal
position without significant parallax errors. Scales shall be substantially
constructed so that they shall maintain their accuracy after initial
adjustment. The Contractor shall furnish not less than ten 25 kg test
weights at the plant for checking, adjusting and calibrating scales.
at all times and of drawing off samples of the contents. The bitumen
feeding system shall provide for continuous circulation of hot binder
through the system and back into the feed tank. The end of the return
line discharging into the feed tank shall always be kept submerged in the
bitumen in the tank in order to prevent oxidation of the returning hot
binder. The storage tanks, and where necessary barrel decanters, and
all elements of the bitumen feeding system shall be equipped with
heating systems or insulating jackets as necessary to provide for
effective and positive control of the temperature of the bitumen at all
times up to the temperature required for utilization. The method of
heating shall be such that neither flames nor the products of combustion
shall come into direct contact with the bitumen or the casing of its
immediate container, and such that no portion of the bitumen shall be
subject to overheating.
The plant shall have a rotary drum dryer of satisfactory design for drying
and heating the combined aggregate so that its temperature will be at the
required level at the time it is mixed with the bitumen. The burner shall
be so designed that complete combustion of the fuel will be obtained,
and the aggregate will remain clean and not become coated with soot or
oil.
The plant shall be equipped with four (or more) screens, the smallest of
which shall generally be not more than 3.2 mm. The screens shall have a
normal capacity slightly in excess of the maximum output of the mixing
plant. The screens shall be readily accessible for inspection.
The plant shall include four (or more) storage bins for screened
aggregates, each with a capacity of not less than twice the pugmill dead
load capacity. The bins shall be arranged so as to provide separate dry
storage for each screened fraction of the aggregate. Each bin shall be
provided with an overflow pipe of such size and location as to prevent
any backing up of material into other bins. Each bin shall be so
constructed that representative aggregate samples can be readily
obtained, and shall have means for observing the aggregate level.
Separate dry storage shall be provided for mineral filler, and the plant
shall be satisfactorily equipped to feed filler into the mixer.
The plant shall be equipped with adequate and safe stairways to the
mixing platform and sampling locations, and guarded ladders and cat-
walks shall provide access to all other positions as necessary for proper
operation, inspection and maintenance of the plant, all to the satisfaction
of the S.O. All gears, pulleys, chains, sprockets and other dangerous
moving parts shall be properly guarded and protected. Ample and
unobstructed space shall be provided on the mixing platform, and clear
and unobstructed passage shall be maintained at all times in and around
the truck loading area, which shall be kept free from drippings from the
mixer.
The plant shall be equipped with a weigh box or hopper for accurately
weighing out aggregate storage bins. The weigh box or hopper shall be
suspended from its scale’s lever mechanism and shall be sufficiently
large to hold a full batch equal to the pugmill capacity without hand
raking or spilling of the aggregate. The discharge gate shall be so
constructed as to allow rapid and complete emptying of the weigh box or
hopper into the mixer, and prevent leakage when closed.
The plant shall be equipped with a binder weigh bucket which shall be
charged through a fast acting non-drip valve in the binder feed pipe
located directly over the bucket. The bucket shall be suspended from its
scale's lever mechanism and shall have a capacity sufficient to weigh out
binder up to 20% of the weight of the pugmill dead load capacity. The
bucket shall have a discharge mechanism, which shall provide for rapid
and complete emptying of the bucket in a thin uniform sheet or multiple
sprays over the full length and width of the mixer. The discharge
mechanism shall not leak or drip when closed.
The mixer shall be equipped with an accurate time lock system for
controlling the operations of a complete mixing cycle. It shall lock the
aggregate weigh box or hopper gate after charging the mixer with
aggregate, until the closing of the mixer gate at the completion of the
mixing cycle. It shall lock the binder weigh bucket discharge mechanism
during the dry mixing and wet mixing periods. (The dry mixing period is
defined as the interval of time between the openings of the aggregate
weigh box or hopper gate and the start of discharging the binder weigh
bucket. The wet mixing period is defined as the interval of time between
the start of discharging the binder weigh bucket and the opening of the
mixer gate.) The dry and wet mixing periods shall both be adjustable in
increments of not more than 5 seconds from zero to not less than 120
seconds total for dry and wet mixing.
The plant shall have means of calibrating the aggregate bin discharge
gate openings by weighing test samples obtained by diverting the
aggregate fed out of each bin into a suitable test box. Test boxes shall
have a capacity of not less than 100 kg each.
And for a given output it may be varied slightly by adjusting the depth
(and hence weight) of the mixture held in the pugmill by varying the dam
height, the configuration of the paddle blades, or both. However for
substantial adjustments of the mixing time, in order to maintain the depth
at a level compatible with efficient mixing, i.e. so that the paddle tips just
break out of the mixture at the height their action, the rate of feed of
materials to the mixer (and hence output) should be changed.
c. Tip-trucks
d. Asphalt paver
e. Rollers
A pneumatic tyred roller and two steel wheeled tandem rollers shall be
provided. However, a three wheeled steel roller may be substituted for
one of the tandem rollers if the S.O. shall so approve. All rollers shall be
of recognized manufacture and shall be approved by the S.O. The
Each steel wheeled roller shall be ballasted so that its total operating
weight is in the range 8 to 10 tonnes and its driven roll (or rolls) shall
exert a rolling force of not less than 3.5 tonnes/meter of roll width. The
Contractor shall provide the S.O. with a calibration chart for each roller
showing the relationships between the quantity or depth of ballast and
total weight and rolling force.
a. General Conditions
Asphaltic concrete paving work shall only be carried out in dry weather
when the surface to be covered is dry, or if so specified, has received a
bituminous tack coat which shall have achieved a satisfactory degree of
tackiness, all to the satisfaction of the S.O. All laying, rolling and finishing
work shall be carried out during daylight hours, unless the Contractor
shall have provided suitable flood-lighting for the job site, to the
satisfaction of the S.O.
and loading them into the mixing plant's cold aggregate feed bins, care
shall be taken to prevent segregation or uncontrolled combination of
materials of different gradation. Segregated or contaminated materials
shall be rescreened or rejected for use in the Works and removed from
the mixing plant site.
The aggregates shall be fed into the dryer at a uniform rate proportioned
in accordance with the appropriate job mix formula. The rate of feed for
each aggregate shall be maintained within 10% of the rate prescribed,
and the total rate of feed shall be such that, the plant's screens shall
never be overloaded.
The aggregates shall be, dried and heated so that when delivered to the
mixer they shall be at a temperature in the range 150 °C to 170 °C.
Immediately after heating, the aggregates shall be screened into four (or
more) fractions, which shall be separately stored in the hot aggregate
storage bins in readiness for mixing.
Ordinary Portland cement and/or other mineral filler to be used in the mix
shall be stored separately and kept completely dry. Its rate of feed into
the plant shall be accurately controlled by weight or volumetric
measurement, all to the satisfaction of the S.O.
d. Heating of Bitumen
The binder shall be heated so that when delivered to the mixer it shall be
at a temperature in the range 140 °C to 160 °C.
The hot binder shall be weighed out into the binder weigh bucket in
accordance with the proportions prescribed in the job mix formula.
The hot aggregates and filler shall be discharged into the pugmill and
mixed dry for the dry mixing time prescribed in the job mix formula, which
shall usually be in the range 5 to 10 seconds. The hot binder shall then
be added and wet mixing performed for the wet mixing time prescribed in
the job mix formula. This shall be sufficient so that all particles of
aggregate are uniformly coated with bitumen, and shall usually be 45
seconds or more for dense graded mixtures.
The volume of each batch shall be such that the tips of the pugmill
paddle blades just break out of the mixture at the height of their action.
After the completion of wet mixing, each batch of asphaltic concrete shall
be discharged from the pugmill either into a storage hopper or directly
into a truck for hauling to the paving site. Care shall be taken that no
segregation of the mix occurs.
Asphaltic concrete shall be transported from the mixing plant to the site
of the paving works in loads of not less than 5 tonnes using tip-trucks as
specified in Sub-Section 3.9.4.c. Except where asphaltic concrete is to
be hand laid, it shall be discharged directly into the paver hopper, as
required, from the tip trucks. Care shall be taken in the truck loading,
hauling and unloading operations to prevent segregation of the mix.
During transportation, the asphaltic concrete shall be protected from
contamination by water, dust, dirt and other deleterious materials.
layer thickness and surface profile shall be achieved. Care shall be taken
to achieve a uniform surface texture free from indentations, ridges, tear
marks or other irregularities, and to prevent segregation of the mix.
h. Construction Joints
Initial (or breakdown) rolling shall be carried out with an approved steel
wheeled tandem roller or three wheeled steel roller. The principal heavy
rolling shall be carried out with an approved pneumatic tyred roller
immediately following the initial rolling; the pneumatic tyred roller shall be
ballasted to an operating weight of not less than 15 tonnes and its tyre
inflation pressure shall be not less than 0.7 N/mm2. The final rolling shall
be carried out with an approved steel wheeled tandem roller and shall
serve to eliminate minor surface irregularities left by the pneumatic tyred
roller.
In all cases, compaction shall be carried out in such a manner that each
section receives equal compactive effort, all to the satisfaction of the
S.O.
The steel wheeled rollers shall operate at speed of not more than 5
km/hr and the pneumatic tyred rollers shall operate at speeds of not
more than 8 km/hr. No roller or heavy vehicle shall be allowed to stand
on newly laid bituminous mix before compaction has been completed
and the material has thoroughly cooled and set. Rolling shall continue as
long as is necessary to achieve the appropriate requirement as follows:
The top surface of a wearing or binder course shall have the required
shape, superelevation, levels and grades, and shall be everywhere
within the tolerances specified in Section 5.
k. Opening to Traffic
3.10.1 Description
3.10.2 Material
Table 3.12: Gradation Limit and Binder Content for Bituminous Macadam
Bound Bound Leveling Binder Binder Wearing Wearing
Mix Type
Roadbase Roadbase Course Course Course Course Course
Mix
BMR 40 BMR 28 BML 10 BMB 28 BMB 20 BMW 14 BMW 20
Designation
B.S Test
% Passing by Weight
Sieve
50.0mm 100 - - - - - -
10.0mm - - 85 – 100 - 52 – 72 70 – 90 52 – 72
6.3mm 44 – 60 44 – 60 30 – 60 44 – 60 39 – 55 45 – 65 39 – 55
3.35mm 32 – 46 31 – 45 15 – 25 32 – 46 32 – 46 30 – 45 32 – 46
1.18mm - - - - - 15 – 30 -
300µm 7 – 21 7 – 21 - 7 – 21 7 – 21 - 7 – 21
Binder
3.5 ±0.5% 4.0 ±0.5% 5.1 ±0.5% 4.7 ±0.6% 4.7 ±0.6% 5.0 ±1.5% 4.9 ±0.5%
Course
3.10.3 Equipment
a. Aggregate Heating
The aggregates shall be dried and heated so that when delivered to the
mixer they shall be at a temperature in the range 140 °C to 160 °C.
b. Rolling Temperature
c. Compacted Density
The Marshall density of each mix shall be determined using a sample (or
samples) taken from the mixing plant soon after the commencement of
preparing each mix for the Works.
(Note: Stability and flow tests are not normally required for bituminous
macadam mixes.)
3.11 Shoulders
3.11.1 General
subbase or subgrade, all in accordance with this Specification and the lines,
levels, grades, dimensions and cross-sections shown on the Drawings
and/or as required by the S.O.
3.11.2 Material
a. Earth Shoulder
b. Gravel Shoulder
Where shown on the Drawings or directed by the S.O., earth shoulders shall
be turfed in accordance with Sub-Section 3.2.3.
4.1 General
This work shall consist of constructing a Portland cement concrete pavement with or
without reinforcement in accordance with this Specification, including all relevant
requirements of Section 03300 Cast In-Place Concrete Construction and in
conformity with the lines, levels, grades, dimensions and cross-sections shown on the
Drawings. Portland cement concrete shall consist of a mixture of Portland cement,
fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and water, with or without admixture.
4.2 Materials
4.2.1 Cement
4.2.2 Aggregate
Coarse aggregate to be used for at least the top 50mm of the slab shall
have polished stone value of not less than 40.
a. Hot-Poured Sealant
b. Cold-Poured Sealants
The sealant shall be composed of a curing agent and a base resin, which
shall be in such proportions as recommended by the manufacturer to
provide a fast cure if the material is mixed and applied by special
machines, or a retarded cure if mixed by hand. It shall cure within 1 hour
and remain active for not less than 4 hours. The sealant shall be applied
after the curing period of the primer and within the period that the primer
remains active.
Hardness IRHD 55 + 5
4.3.1 Concrete
Concrete shall be of the grade shown on the Drawings and shall comply
with the relevant requirements of Section 03300 Cast In-Place Concrete
Construction.
4.3.2 Equipment
All equipment used such as batching plant and mixers shall comply with the
relevant requirements of Section 03300 Cast In-Place Concrete
Construction.
The concrete slab shall be constructed either by fixed form or by slip form
paving plant in a continuous process in either one or two layers, as
approved by the S.O.
Prior to the placing of concrete, all of the required joint assemblies such as
dowel bars, tie bars, etc., shall be installed in accordance with the
requirements of Sub-Section 3.3.3. In one later construction, the slab
reinforcement shall also be installed and fixed in accordance with the
relevant requirements of Section 03300 Cast In-Place Concrete
Construction.
In two-layer construction, the thickness of the top layer shall be not less
than 50mm or twice the maximum size of the coarse aggregates, whichever
is the greater, and shall be at least 15 mm thicker than the depth of the
groove former, if used. Placement of reinforcement and concreting of the
top layer shall be done immediately and in any case not more than 30
minutes, after the completion of the bottom layer.
The forms shall be bedded on low moisture content cement mortar and
set to the pavement surface level as described in the Contract within a
tolerance of ±3mm. The bedding shall not extend under the slab. There
shall be no vertical step between the ends of adjacent forms greater than
3mm. The horizontal alignment for forms shall be to the required
alignment of the pavement edge as described in the Contract within a
tolerance of ± 10mm. The mortar or concrete bedding shall be broken
out after use. Prior to concreting, the forms shall be approved by the
S.O.
Forms shall not be removed earlier than 6 hours after the completion of
the construction of the slab. Care shall be taken to prevent damage to
the concrete and any projecting tie bars during the removal of the forms.
If the removal of forms results in any damage to the concrete the period
of 6 hours shall be increased to that which is necessary to avoid further
damage and the Contractor shall make good the damaged areas.
Guide wire
Unless otherwise agreed by the S.O., a guide wire shall be provided
along each side of the slab to be constructed by slip form paving plant.
Each guide wire shall be at constant height above and parallel to the
The guide wires shall be supported from stakes not more than 8m apart
by connectors capable of fine horizontal and vertical adjustment, the
guide wire shall be tensioned on the stakes so that a 500 gram weight
shall produce a deflection of not more than 20mm when suspended at
the mid-point between any pair of stakes. The ends of the guide wires
shall be anchored to fixing points which shall be not closer to the edge of
the slab than the row of stakes and in no circumstances shall guide wire
be anchored to a stake.
Prior to being compacted, the surface level of each loose spread layer
shall be adjusted to the correct surcharge by means of rotating strike off
blades or a screw device. The concrete shall be compacted by vibration
or by a combination of vibration and mechanical tamping so as to comply
with Sub-Section 4.3.1 throughout the full depth of the slab. Poker
vibrations shall be used adjacent to the side forms and the edge of
previously constructed slabs.
The initial regulation and finish to the surface of the slab shall be effected
by means of a beam oscillating transversely or obliquely to the
longitudinal axis of the pavement. This beam shall be readily adjustable
for both height and tilt. Joint grooves shall be constructed in compliance
with Sub-Section 4.5. The concrete shall be re-compacted around the
former by a hand held vibrating plate compactor drawn along or on each
side of the joint, prior to regulation of the surface by the diagonal
finishing beam.
The regulation and finishing of the surface of the slab shall be carried out
by a machine, which incorporates twin oblique oscillating finishing
beams, which shall be readily adjustable for both height and tilt. The
beams shall weigh not less than 170kg per linear meter be of rectangular
section and span the full width of the slab. The leading beam shall be
vibrated. The beams shall be supported on a carriage, the level of which
shall be controlled by the average level of not less than four points
evenly spaced over at least 35m of the supporting rail, beam, or slab, on
each side of the slab that is being constructed. The final regulation and
surface finishing of the slab shall be carried out after any wet forming of
joint grooves. After the final regulation and before texture is applied, any
excess concrete on top of the groove former shall be removed.
The level of the conforming plate and finishing beams shall be controlled
automatically from the guide wires by sensors attached at the four
corners of the slip form paving machine. The alignment of the paver shall
be controlled automatically from the guide wires by at least one sensor
attached to the paver. The alignment and level of ancillary machines for
finishing, texturing and curing of the concrete shall be automatically
controlled relative to the guide wires or to the surface and edge of the
slab.
Slip form paving machines shall have vibration of variable output, with a
maximum energy output of not less than 2.5 kW per meter of slab per
300mm depth of slab for a laying speed of up to 1.5m per minute or pro
rata for higher speeds. The machines shall be of sufficient mass to
provide adequate reaction on the traction units maintain forward
movements during the placing of concrete in all situations.
After the concrete has been struck off and compacted, it shall be further
smoothed, screed and compacted by means of a longitudinal hand float or
other equipment as approved by the S.O. Details of joints shall be as shown
on the Drawings. Joints grooves shall be constructed in compliance with
Sub-Section 4.5. Any irregularities at wet formed joint grooves shall be
rectified by suitable means approved by the S.O. As soon as surplus water
has risen to the surface, the pavement shall be given a broomed finish. The
concrete shall be cured in compliance with Sub-Section 4.8
All side forms shall be made of steel and be sufficiently robust and rigid to
withstand construction forces. Timber forms shall only be used for work,
which is less than 200m in length. The forms shall comply with other
requirements of Sub-Section 4.4.2 as appropriate.
4.5 Joint
Joints shall be constructed as specified herein and/or directed by the S.O. Before any
joint materials are set in place, the underlying pavement course at those locations
shall have been approved by the S.O. performed expansion joint filler shall be placed
around each structure, which extends into or through the pavement over the full
interface with the concrete pavement slab before concrete is placed.
When assembled, the top of the installing template shall be about 5mm
above the top of the preformed filler. The filler shall be vertical and shall be
in a plane at right angles to the centre line of the road, subject to a tolerance
of not more than 1 in 500. The joint assembly shall be placed so that the
installing template is on the side of the filler remote from pouring operations.
The top of the filler shall be 10mm below the required concrete surface, and
the bottom shall rest on or extend slightly into the underlying pavement
course. The assembly and its installation shall have been approved by the
S.O. before any concrete is placed against it. Stakes for supporting the
installing template shall be of a cross section and length satisfactory to the
S.O.
a. Sawn grooves
b. Formed grooves
shall be used which will form a key along the longitudinal joint as shown on
the Drawings.
After the final regulation and before the application of the curing membrane,
the surfaces of concrete slabs to be used as running surfaces shall be brush
textured in a direction at right angles to the center-line of the carriageway.
The type of brush and method of application for surface texturing shall be
approved by the S.O. based on trial brushing to be conducted by the
Contractor. The texture depth shall be determined by the sand patch test as
described herein. The average texture depth for each set of 10 tests shall
not be less than 0.75mm and not more than one test of each set shall show
a texture depth of less than 0.65mm in no case shall the maximum texture
depth exceed 2mm.
4.6.2.1 Apparatus
4.6.2.2 Method
31000
where D is the diameter of the patch in mm
DxD
Where shown on the Drawings or directed by the S.O., edges of concrete slabs shall
be rounded as follows. After brush texturing but before the concrete has attained its
initial set, top edges of concrete slabs shall be worked with an approved tool and
rounded to a radius of 5mm. A well defined and continuous rounded edge shall be
produced and a smooth, dense mortar finish obtained. At all transverse joints, any
tool marks appearing on the slab adjacent to the joints shall be eliminated by
brooming the surface. In doing this, the rounding of the edge of the slab shall not be
disturbed. All concrete on top of joints shall be removed completely.
4.8 Curing
The exposed surfaces of concrete pavement shall be cured immediately after surface
texturing and rounding of edges by treating with a curing compound fulfilling the
requirements of Sub-Section 4.2.6. It shall be mechanically sprayed on to the surface
at a rate of 0.22 to 0.27 liter per square meter using a fine spray. The mechanical
sprayer shall incorporate an efficient mechanical device for continuous agitation and
mixing of the compound in its container during spraying. For the sides of slip formed
slabs or when the side forms are removed within the curing period, and for small
areas where a mechanical distributor cannot be used, the compound shall be sprayed
by hand lance at a rate of 0.27 to 0.36 liter per square meter.
The compound shall form a uniform, continuous, coherent film that shall not crack or
peel and shall be free from pin holes or other imperfections. If discontinuities, pin
holes or abrasions exist, an additional coat shall be applied within 30 minutes to the
affected areas. Necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure proper curing at the
joints and that none of the curing compound enters joints, which are to be sealed with
joint sealing compounds. Rope of moistened paper, fibre or other suitable material
shall be used to seal the top of the joint opening, and the concrete in the region of the
joint shall be sprayed with curing compound immediately after the rope seal has been
installed.
Concrete surfaces to which membrane curing compounds have been applied shall be
adequately protected for the duration of the entire curing period from pedestrian and
vehicular traffic, except as required for joint sawing operations and surface tests, and
from any other cause which will disrupt the continuity of the membrane. The curing
membrane so formed shall be maintained intact for a period of not less than fourteen
(14) days.
In addition, the entire surface shall be protected from the effects of solar radiation by
the use of frames covered with material with heat and rain deflecting properties for not
less than 4 hours after application of the curing compound. Notwithstanding the
foregoing, concrete surfaces which are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after
the curing compound has been applied shall be resprayed, all as specified above at
no additional cost. Concrete liable to be affected by running water shall be adequately
protected from damage during the setting period.
Forms shall not be removed until the freshly placed concrete has set for at least 6
hours. The forms shall be removed carefully so as to avoid damage to the pavement.
As soon as forms are removed, the ends of all expansion joints shall be cleaned of
concrete and the full width of the filler exposed for the full depth of the slab. Any areas
showing a minor degree of honeycombing shall be repaired with 1:3 cement mortar.
Where the S.O. considers that a major degree of honeycombing is present, the work
shall be considered defective and shall be removed and replaced at the expense of
the Contractor. In such cases, the section of concrete removed shall be to the full
width and depth of the slab and at least 3 meters long.
No pavement shall be opened to any traffic earlier than twenty-eight (28) days from
the completion of concreting. The Contractor shall erect and maintain suitable
barricades and shall employ watchmen to exclude public traffic and that of his
employees and agents from the newly constructed pavement. These barriers shall be
arranged so as not to interfere with public traffic on any lane intended to be kept open
and necessary signs and lights shall be maintained by the Contractor clearly
indicating, any lanes open to traffic.
Where, as shown on the Drawings, it is necessary to provide for traffic across the
pavement, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, construct suitable and
substantial crossings to bridge the newly constructed concrete pavement for as long
as the S.O. shall direct. Any part of the pavement damaged by traffic or other cause
prior to its final acceptance shall be repaired or replaced all at the expense of the
Contractor in a manner suitably satisfactory to the S.O.
Manhole covers, gullies and their frames shall be isolated from the main pavement
slab as shown on the Drawings and their surrounds cast in separate operations.
Manholes and gully recesses shall be formed by casting the main slab against
formwork boxes with vertical sides, placed and fixed accurately. The formwork boxes
shall be removed before the concrete around the manhole or gully cover is to be
placed and preformed joint filler, 20 mm thick, fixed to the slab edges so exposed.
This shall be to the full depth of the slab allowing for the depth of the groove required
for sealing. Alternatively, the recesses may be sawn out after the concrete has
hardened. Reinforcement shall be placed as shown on the Drawings and concrete
placed by hand in the space between the main slab and the manhole or gully frame.
This concrete shall be of the same grade as that of the main slab, and the mix shall
be modified as necessary to permit full compaction by the methods adopted.
The horizontal alignment shall be determined from the center-line of the pavement
surface shown on the Drawings. The edges of the pavement as constructed and all
other parallel construction lines shall be correct within a tolerance of + 50 mm and
minus 0 mm from the center-line, except for kerbs, channel blocks and edge lines
which shall be laid with a smooth alignment within a tolerance of + 25 mm and minus
0 mm from the center-line.
The design levels of pavement courses shall be calculated from the vertical profile,
crossfall and pavement course thicknesses shown on the Drawings. The level of any
point on the constructed surface of a pavement course shall be the design level
subject to the appropriate tolerances given in Table 5.1.
± 0mm
Road Base
- 20mm
± 10mm
Subbase and Lower Subbase
- 20mm
The regularity of surfaces shall be within the relevant limits given in Table 5.2.
The traverse length of 300 m and its associated maximum permissible number of
irregularities shall apply wherever the continuous length of the completed carriageway
is 300 m or more, whether or not it is constructed in shorter lengths.
Where the total length of pavement is less than 300 m the measurements shall be
taken on 75 m lengths.
6.1.1 General
This work shall comprise the supply and installation of corrugated sheet
steel beam highway guardrails inclusive of bolts, nuts, posts and other
ancillary works, all in accordance with this Specification, and the Drawings,
and as directed by the S.O.
6.1.2 Materials
6.1.2.2 Posts
a. Steel Posts
b. Timber Posts
6.1.3 Installation
Before posts are erected, the alignment and finished levels of the
guardrails shall be set accurately on site for approval by the S.O.
The guardrail beams shall be fixed firmly bolted together with the
blackout pieces on to the post to the lines and grades as shown on
the Drawings, and as directed by the S.O.
6.1.3.3 Anchorages
6.1.4.1 Marking
6.1.4.2 Storage
The Contractor shall provide and arrange the testing facilities and
the test pieces as and when requested by the S.O. The cost of all
sampling and testing shall be borne by the Contractor. If, in the
subsequent installation, there is detection of non-compliance with
the requirements of this Specification through random sampling
carried out by the S.O., then the material of the lot will be rejected
and the Contractor shall remove the same from the Site at his own
cost.
a. Steel
For each lot of 200 pieces or less of either steel posts or steel
block-outs supplied to the Site, the Contractor shall submit
certificates from an approved testing laboratory certifying
compliance with the properties required and the mill certificate.
However, the S.O. reserves the right to conduct further tests on
the materials supplied.
b. Timber
6.2.1 General
This work shall consist of the supply, assembly, erection and installation of
sign faces, sign plates, posts and backing frames, all in accordance with the
details shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. It shall include all
excavation and backfilling, all necessary foundations, anchorages, fixtures
and fastenings, brackets, lighting units and electrical installations where
required, application of paints and finishes, etc., to complete the work all to
the satisfaction of the S.O.
For the purpose of this Specification, traffic signs are defined as follows:
a. Non-illuminated signs are those signs which are not lit either internally or
externally and shall be retro-reflective
Any of the traffic signs defined in Sub-Section 6.2.2 above or any part
thereof as designated on the Drawings or as directed by the S.O. to
remain in position upon completion of the Works.
Any of the traffic signs defined in Sub-Section 6.2.2 above or any part
thereof designed by the Contractor with the approval of the S.O. which ill
not remain in position at the completion of the Works.
6.2.4 Standards
All traffic signs shall, except where specified otherwise, comply with the
requirements of ARAHAN TEKNIK (JALAN) Series 2, published by
Cawangan Jalan, Ibu Pejabat JKR, Kuala Lumpur.
shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall submit for the S.O.'s
approval the details of fabrication drawings for all signs.
All traffic sign housings shall be provided with vandal and weather
resistant locks. Keys, in the quantities determined by the S.O.,
shall be provided to the S.O. Types of lock shall be kept to a
minimum.
6.2.5.2 Foundations
The type and size of foundations for permanent traffic signs shall
be as shown on the Drawings and, unless otherwise stated
therein, shall comply with this Specification.
6.2.5.3 Posts
Sign plates shall be drilled at all locations where rivets or bolts are
required for attaching the plate to the backing frame or fixings
before application of the sign face. However, riveting shall be
carried out only after the application of the sign face.
Where top and bottom light spill screens are required as shown on
the Drawings, these shall extend for the whole width of the sign,
be fabricated out of the same material as the sign plate and shall
have corners cut to the same radius as the other corners of the
sign plate.
Top and bottom light spill screens shall be considered part of the
sign plate and any stiffeners and mounting fittings shall be
designed to accommodate the combined size.
Only vertical and horizontal joints shall be permitted and all joints
in plastic sheeting shall be overlapped by not less than 6 mm. The
overlap in the horizontal joints shall be from the top and the
vertical joints shall be from the left, butt joints in plastic sheeting
will not be accepted.
The finish of all sign faces shall be capable of passing the tests
described in BS 873, and the standards of fabrication and
workmanship shall be such that under normal conditions of service
and proper maintenance, the sign faces shall last not less than 5
years without any serious blemishes or defects for Engineering
Grade retro-reflective sheeting and 8 years for High Intensity retro-
reflective sheeting. The Contractor shall furnish to the S.O. a letter
of warranty for the specified period for all sign faces from the
supplier of the sheeting or the sign fabricator.
Where framing and stiffening are not an integral part of the sign
plate, their joints shall be welded or joined with suitable brackets
utilising nuts, bolts and washers.
Where traffic signs are erected on gantries, the signs shall comply with the
relevant requirements of this Specification. Fabrication and construction of
gantries shall be as shown on the Drawings and as directed by the S.O.
Ferrous steel shall be finished both inside and out by galvanising, electro-
plating or application of zinc or aluminium spray or other equivalent finish
approved by the S.O. Aluminium and other metals shall be left untreated
unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
on Site after final installation, including the fitting of any internal apparatus
required as part of the permanent Works. Internal surfaces shall, unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings, receive the same treatment as for
external surfaces except that final paint coats shall be applied before
internal components are installed.
6.3.1 General
This work shall consist of the supply of road marking material and its
application to form continuous or intermittent lines, letters, arrows, symbols
or figures. The markings shall be white or yellow laid to the dimensions and
at the locations shown on the Drawings and as specified herein or as
directed by the S.O. The work includes the supply of all labour, tools,
equipment, materials, and warning and traffic guidance signs as necessary
for the safe and efficient completion of the entire work.
6.3.2 Materials
The marking material shall be one of the types detailed below as indicated
on the Drawings or as directed by the S.O.
a. Thermoplastic Material
Road marking paint shall comply with the requirements of M.S. 164.
Yellow paint shall be of standard colour B.S.381C No. 356 (Golden
Yellow).
a. Thermoplastic Material
6.3.5 Laying
Centre lines, lane lines and edge lines shall be marked by approved
mechanical means or as directed by the S.O. Other markings shall be
applied by brush, spray, screed, hand-propelled or self-propelled machine
according to the marking configuration and the type of marking material
approved for use. The rate of application of the marking material for each
coat shall be that recommended by the manufacturer unless otherwise
specified. When more than one coat is used, the succeeding coat shall not
be applied until the previous coat has fully set.
Road markings of a repetitive nature other than center lines, lane lines, etc.,
shall, unless otherwise decided by the S.O., be set out with stencils which
comply with the size and spacing requirements as shown on the Drawings.
6.3.6 Protection of Marking
All markings shall be protected from traffic until they have dried sufficiently
so that no pick-up by vehicle tyre will occur.
6.3.7 Reflectoisation
6.3.8 Thickness
a. Thermoplastic Material
ii. Sprayed lines other than yellow lines: not less than 2 mm
iii. Sprayed yellow edge lines (for 'no parking', 'no waiting', etc.) : not less
than 2 mm nor more than 3 mm.
Road marking paint shall be laid to give a wet film thickness of not less
than 315 microns and not more than 400 microns.
The tolerance on the specified width of the marking shall be within the range
of +10% and -0%.
6.3.11 Clearing Up
6.4.1 General
This work shall consist of the supply and installation of cast in situ or precast
concrete kerbs constructed at the locations and in accordance with the
lines, levels, grades, dimensions and types as shown on the Drawings, all in
accordance with this Specification.
6.4.2 Materials
Concrete for kerb sections shall be Grade C25 concrete unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings and shall conform to the requirements of
Concrete Section of this Specification. Unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings, bedding shall be Grade C15 concrete.
6.4.3 Installation
6.4.3.1 Excavation
Excavation shall be made to the required depth and the base shall
be trimmed and compacted to a firm and even surface. All soft and
unsuitable material shall be removed and replaced with suitable
material as defined in Sub Section 4.2 of this Specification. The
bedding material shall then be placed and compacted to form a
bed of required thickness as shown on the Drawings.
Precast concrete kerbs shall be cast using steel moulds and shall
be of the types as shown on the Drawings. Each kerb shall be set
so that its front top axis conforms to the line and grade required.
All spaces under the kerb shall be filled with bedding material
which shall be thoroughly tamped.
Kerbs shall be laid with joints as narrow as possible and fixed with
mortar containing 1 part Portland cement to 2 parts sand. Where a
Portland cement concrete pavement is to be constructed
contiguous to a kerb, expansion joints shall be constructed in the
kerb directly in line with pavement expansion joints. The
expansion joint in the kerb shall be 20 mm in width and shall be
filled with an expansion joint filler of the same nominal thickness
as the pavement joint. Any voids between filler and the concrete
kerb shall be filled with mortar.
6.4.3.5 Backfilling
The spaces in the front and back of each kerb shall be refilled to
the required elevation with suitable material approved by the S.O.
which shall be tamped in layers of not more than 150 mm until
properly compacted. The finished work shall be true to line, grade
and level to within 10 mm and shall present a smooth
appearance free from kinks and distortion visible to the eye.
7.1 Submission
7.1.2 Programme
Samples of minimum 20 kg each for all materials proposed for use in the roadwork
construction shall be submitted to the Engineer two weeks prior to usage in the
construction.
Each layer is to be tested and accepted by the Engineer, prior to the placing
of the next layer.
The in-situ field density of the compacted layer is to be not less than 95% as
a percentage of the maximum dry density. Determine both densities in
accordance with BS 1377, with the former using the sand replacement
method (large pouring cylinder), and the latter using the 4.5kg rammer
method (soils with some course gravel-size particle).
Carry out at least 3 in-situ field test for every 500 m2 or less of surface area
of each compacted layer. Remove and replace with suitable material any
layer that fails to meet the density requirement represented by each in-situ
field test.
Compact the graded granite aggregate base to a dry density of not less than
98% of the maximum dry density as determined in accordance with BS
1377 using the vibrating hammer method. Carry out the in-situ dry density
tests in accordance with sand replacement method (large pouring cylinder)
specified in BS 1377. Carry out blading and rolling alternately to obtain a
smooth, even and uniform compacted base.
Take samples of graded granite aggregates at the rate of one per 100 m3 of
graded granite aggregate laid with at least 3 samples at each site in a day.
For a site where more than 400m3 of graded granite aggregate are laid in a
day, take a maximum of 5 samples. Mark these samples with the date laid
and location identification, and test at the accredited laboratory for
compliance.
Submit report of all test results in copies as directed, including the original
copy, to the Engineer immediately after they are available.
SECTION 02800
BUILDING DRAIN CONSTRUCTION
INDEX TO SPECIFICATION
CLAUSE PAGE
This specification section is the copyright of DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. No reproduction either in part or
in whole in any manner whoever is allowed without written permission from DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd.
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Read with the Particular Specification, and all other contract documents.
This technical specification shall form part of the Contract and the Contractor shall allow for all
obligations, requirements, considerations, etc. to comply with the specification. The Contractor is
also deemed to have visited the site and fully acquainted himself as to the nature and
practicability of the works. No claims will be entertained as a result of his failure to do all of the
above.
The Consulting Civil and Structural Engineer is DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. The Contractor is to
note that when the term ‘Engineer’ in the following Specification means the representative of the
Consulting Engineer.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Engineer is referred to in the following specification,
such term shall be deemed to mean The Architect as defined in the Articles of Agreement or any
other person designated in writing by the Architect from time to time to exercise the power of the
Architect as required.
The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of The Eurocodes, Malaysia
Standards and Codes of Practice current at the date of tender, the Building Regulations and local
By-laws and to the satisfaction of the local Authorities empowered to control the Works, the
Specifications and drawings supplied to the Contractor and any other instructions issued by the
Engineer/Architect or their representative from time to time.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
Any reference in the Specifications to a Malaysia Standard (MS), Eurocodes (EC) or Code of
Practice (CP) shall imply the latest version at the time of tender of the applicable Standard or
Code of Practice. Where the requirements of the Specifications are more onerous or stringent, it
shall take precedence over the requirements of MS, EC or CP. The Engineer has the sole
discretion to modify or upgrade the specifications, drawings and documents to comply fully with
Eurocode requirements at no additional cost and time to the Contract.
1.1 Scope
This Works shall consist of the construction of the construction of surface drains,
subsoil drains, pipe culverts, box culverts, sumps and other drainage structures in
accordance with this Specification or as directed by S.O. Drainage works shall be
constructed to the lines, grades and cross sections shown on the Drawings or as
directed by the S.O.
Read this work section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the other work
sections as follows:
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, ensure all of the Works comply
with the relevant requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or
referenced in the body of the Specification. Alternative Standards and
Codes may be proposed for approval by the Engineer, provided it can be
demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the
requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Malaysia Standards
Other Standards
The intended layout and details for the proposed drainage system for the
project are shown in the drawings. Based on the information given engage
qualified and experienced personnel to propose the following for the works
to Engineer’s acceptance:
Co-ordinate with other contractors who may carry out other works at the
same time at the site. Take into account of site access, space occupation,
safety and safeguarding of adjoining properties and each other’s works.
Where applicable, prior to and upon completion of the site works, carry out a
condition survey to adjacent buildings in accordance with the requirements
of Section 01017 Condition Survey and Monitoring.
Submit all records to the Engineer and adjacent property owners where
directed.
Take cognizance of and co-ordinate with other contractors on site who may
be carrying out instrumentation and monitoring works to avoid duplication of
installation and readings.
Accept responsibility for the upholding of the adjoining buildings and roads,
footpaths etc., where applicable, together with the mains and services from
the time of taking possession of the site through the duration of the works.
Adequately maintain roads and footpaths within and adjacent to the site and
keep clear of mud and debris.
Verify and be satisfied that the information given in the existing site
survey plans provided are accurate. If necessary, engage a
registered Surveyor to carry out additional site survey before
commencing any work.
1.4.6.4 Contamination
Protect all equipment and working area using fencing or other methods as
accepted.
1.4.9 Obstructions
Employ a registered surveyor throughout the Contract Period for the setting-
out of alignment and levels of the drains. Develop the details for the setting-
out based on the information given in the drawings.
When carrying out the contractor’s proposals as set out in clause 1.4.1, take into
account the following performance requirements:
3.1 Description
This works shall consist of excavation for the construction of surface drains, subsoil
drains, cast in situ box culvert, pipe culverts, and other drainage structure, not
otherwise provided for in this Specification, and shall include furnishing, placing,
compacting and shaping foundation bedding materials, backfilling excavations
against completed structures with suitable material or granular backfilling where
specified, and the removal and disposal of all excess excavated material, in
accordance with this Specification and as shown on the Drawings and as required
by the S.O.
3.2 Materials
3.2.1 Excavation
The material shall conform to the following physical and mechanical quality
requirements:
10 mm 100
5.0 mm 90 – 100
1.18 mm 45 – 80
300 um 10 – 30
150 um 2 – 10
c. Material other than sand shall have gradation as shown in Table 3.2.
Table 3.2: Grading Limits for Granular Backfill other than Sand
% by Weight Passing
BS Sieve Size
A B C
37.5mm 100 - -
10.0mm 45 – 75 45 – 75 -
5.0mm 30 – 60 35 – 65 45 – 75
2.0mm 20 – 50 25 – 50 30 – 60
425 um 10 – 30 10 – 30 15 – 35
3.3 Excavation
The Contractor shall notify the S.O. sufficiently in advance of the beginning of any
excavation so that cross-section elevations and measurements may be taken of the
undisturbed ground. The natural ground adjacent to the structure shall not be
Trenches and foundation pits for structures and structure footings and under-drains
shall be excavated to the lines, grades and elevations shown on the Drawings or as
directed by the S.O. Excavation must be kept free from water and temporary drains,
sumps, and pumps shall be provided when necessary. The rate of excavation and
backfill shall be approved by the S.O. The elevations of the bottoms of footings
shown on the Drawings are approximate only and the S.O. may order in writing such
changes in the dimensions or elevations of footings as may be deemed necessary
to secure a satisfactory foundation.
After each excavation is completed, the Contractor shall notify the S.O. to that effect
and no footing, bedding material or structure shall be placed until the S.O. has
approved the depth of excavation and the character of the foundation material.
Rock and other hard foundation material shall be cleared of all loose material and
cut to a firm surface, either level or stepped or serrated, as specified or shown on
the Drawings or directed by the S.O. All seams and crevices shall be cleared out
and grouted with Portland cement grout at the time the footing is placed.
All loose and disintegrated rock and thin strata shall be removed. When the footing
is to rest on material other than rock, special care shall be taken not to disturb the
bottom of the excavation, and excavation to final grade shall be deferred until just
before the footing is to be placed. When, in the opinion of the S.O., the foundation
material is soft or mucky or otherwise unsuitable, the Contractor shall remove the
unsuitable material and insert foundation fill material or concrete as specified or
shown on the Drawings or directed by the S.O. If foundation fill material is required,
it shall be placed and compacted in layers not more than 150mm thick or as directed
by the S.O. The degree of compaction shall be equivalent to that of the surrounding
foundations.
All excavation surfaces and surfaces of backfill material against which concrete is to
be placed shall be even and firm and true to line and level.
Excavated material suitable for use as backfill may be deposited by the Contractor
in storage piles at points convenient for re-handling of the material during the
backfilling operation.
Excavated material shall be deposited in such places and in such a manner as not
to cause damage to highway, services or property either within or outside the road
reserve, and so as to cause no impediment to the drainage of the Site or
surrounding area.
All spaces excavated under this Specification and not occupied by a permanent
structure shall be backfilled. Backfill material shall be free from large lumps, wood and
other extraneous material.
Backfill not within the embankment areas shall be placed in layers not more than
250mm in depth (compacted measurement) and shall be compacted to a density
comparable with the adjacent undisturbed material.
Backfill within the embankment areas shall be made with approved material placed in
uniform layers not to exceed 150mm in depth (compacted measurement) and each
layer shall be constructed in accordance with Section 02300 General Earthworks –
Excavation and Filling expect that mechanical tampers may be used for
compaction. Each layer of backfill shall be wetted uniformly as necessary and
compacted to the same requirements as the adjacent earthwork as specified. Unless
otherwise approved by the S.O., hand tamping will not be accepted.
In placing backfill and embankment, the material shall be placed insofar as possible to
approximately the same height on both sides of the structure. If conditions require
backfilling appreciably higher on one side, the additional material on the higher side
shall not be placed until permission is given by the S.O. or until the S.O. is satisfied
that the structure has enough strength to withstand any pressure created. Backfill for
embankment shall not be placed behind the walls of box culverts until the top slab is
placed for the required time and not less than three days. Backfill and embankment
behind abutments held at the top by superstructure shall be carried up simultaneously
behind opposite abutments and side walls.
No backfilling shall be placed against any structure until permission shall have been
given by the S.O. Jetting of fill or other hydraulic methods involving, or likely to
involve, liquid or semi-liquid pressure shall be prohibited.
Special care shall be taken to prevent any unduly high pressures against the
structures.
The placing of embankment and the benching of slopes shall continue in such a
manner that at all times there will be a horizontal berm of thoroughly compacted
material for a distance at least equal to the height of the abutment or wall to be
backfilled against.
4.1 General
This work shall consist of excavation for waterway channels both inside and outside
the road reserve as shown on the Drawings or directed by the S.O., and shall
include all required excavation for widening, training or permanently diverting rivers,
streams and irrigation and drainage channels other than drains and ditches
appurtenant to the roadway, except excavation of topsoil for use in the Works and
excavation required for clearing and grubbing. This work shall also include the
backfilling of old channels, haulage to their points of utilization in the Works or the
removal and disposal of all excavated materials, the construction of appurtenant
bunds, dikes and berms, and the shaping and finishing of all earthworks involved in
the construction of channels in accordance with the required lines, levels, grades,
and cross-sections.
4.2 Materials
All suitable materials removed from channel excavations shall be used for backfilling
waterways to be abandoned and constructing bunds, dikes and other earth
appurtenances as required. Surplus suitable materials shall be used as far as is
practicable in constructing the roadway. The Contractor shall provide borrow of
satisfactory quality and approved by the S.O. should this be necessary to complete
the work. Borrow which is required to replace suitable excavated materials needed for
construction which the Contractor elects waste shall not be paid for.
All channels and appurtenances shall be excavated and constructed to the lines,
levels, grades and cross-section shown on the Drawings or as directed by the S.O.
Excavation beyond the limits required shall not be paid for and shall be backfilled at
the Contractor’s expense as directed by the S.O. should he deem it necessary.
Sections of channel abandoned owing to diversion shall be backfilled as directed by
the S.O.
5.1 General
Surface drains shown on the Drawings shall be constructed to the lines, levels,
grades and cross-sections as specified or as directed by the S.O. Surface drains shall
include interceptor drains, roadside drains, embankment toe drains, shoulder drains,
bench drains, berm drains, median drains, outfall drains, cascade drains, etc.
Any of the above drains may be constructed either unlined or lined using cast in situ
concrete, precast or porous concrete section or stone pitching.
Any areas of over excavation shall be made good to the satisfaction of the
S.O., all at the Contractor’s expense.
Excavation shall be carried out to the lines and levels as specified and as
shown on the Drawings. Templates which may be of timber or steel shall
then be poured in sections not exceeding 2m in length and shall be carried
out between end forms in alternate bays. Construction joints shall not be
formed in the inverts.
All concrete shall be Grade C25 unless otherwise specified and shall
conform to the requirement of Concrete Section of this Specification. Weep
holes shall be cast in situ as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
S.O.
Porous concrete shall comply with the requirements of porous concrete for
pipes as described in MS 525. Cement and aggregates used in the
manufacture of the porous concrete drain sections shall conform to the
requirements of Concrete Section of this Specification.
Mass concrete for bases shall be of Grade C15 concrete or as specified and
to the dimensions and thickness as shown on the Drawings.
6.1 General
This work shall consist of the construction of all structures or parts of structures to be
composed of stone pitching either grouted or ungrouted as shown on the Drawings or
as directed by the S.O. including erosion protection pavements and aprons, drain
linings, culvert inlets and outlets etc. The works shall be carried out all in accordance
with this Specification and to the lines, levels, grades, dimensions and cross-sections
shown on the Drawings and as required by the S.O.
6.2 Materials
6.2.1 Stone
Stone shall be clean rough quarry stone, or pit or river cobbles, or a mixture
of any of these materials, and shall be essentially free from dust, clay,
vegetative matter and other deleterious materials. Individual pieces of stone
shall be approximately cubical or spherical and shall have least dimensions
in the range 100 to 150mm and a maximum dimension of 250mm, unless
otherwise specified. The stone shall be hard, tough, durable and dense,
resistant to the action of air and water, and suitable in all respects for the
purpose intended.
The ingredients for mortar shall be measured in proper gauge boxes and
mixed on a clean boarded platform or in an approved mechanical batch
mixer.
Mortar which has been mixed for more than 30 minutes shall not be used in
the works. Nor shall mortar be laid against the supporting surface more than
2 minutes before pitching stone and building up the structure to full
thickness is commenced on any section of the work, as the construction
advances.
The work shall be carried out and finished all to the satisfaction of the S.O.
Where shown on the Drawings, ungrouted stone pitching shall be hand set
to provide maximum interlocking effect. The stones, the largest of which
shall be used at the bottom, shall be well bedded on a 75mm layer of gravel
or aggregate rammed to an even surface. The whole work shall be finished
to the satisfaction of S.O.
7.0 BRICKWORKS
7.1 General
This work shall include the laying of brickwork to the lines, levels and grades shown
on the Drawings and/or as directed by S.O.
7.2 Materials
Common brick shall be sound, hard, well burnt, of proper size and clean and
shall give a clear ring when struck. They shall be Class 3 standard format
complying with the requirements of MS 76. Bricks shall be obtained from
manufacturers approved by the S.O.
Plain plaster shall consists of 1 part masonry cement complying with M.S.
794 to 3 parts of sand by volume. Where ordinary Portland cement is used,
plasticizer of a type approved by the S.O. may be added to the mix in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction.
8.1 General
This work shall include the supply and installation of subsoil drains constructed in
accordance with this Specification at the locations and in accordance with the lines,
levels and grades as shown on the Drawings and/or directed by the S.O.
8.2 Materials
8.2.1 Pipes
Porous concrete pipes for subsoil drain shall comply with MS 525.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipes for subsoil drain shall comply with BS 3656.
10 mm 100
5.0 mm 90 – 100
2.36mm 75 – 100
1.18mm 55 – 90
600 um 35 – 59
300 um 8 – 30
150 um 0 – 10
The material passing the 425 µm sieve shall be non-plastic when tested in
accordance with BS 1377.
The physical properties of the filter cloth shall comply with Table 8.2.
c. Filtration Requirements
d. Permeability Requirements
The equivalent Darcy Permeability of the filter cloth shall be greater than
10 times the Darcy Permeability of the soil to be drained.
Cement mortar for pipe joint shall comply with requirement of Sub-Section
6.2.2.
Excavation for subsoil drains shall be carried out all in accordance with the
appropriate provisions of Section 3.
The pipe sections shall be set firmly against the filter material bedding with the flow
lines in the design position. For pipes with mating joints, the receiving ends shall be
upgrade, and the pipe joints shall be fully mated. For butt jointed pipes with collars,
the pipe sections shall be fully contiguous, and the collars properly centered over the
joints.
Joints shall be spot mortared as necessary to hold the pipe sections correctly
centered and aligned, but not so as to unduly restrict the infiltration of water through
the joints.
Slotted or perforated pipes shall be tightly wrapped in filter cloth such that the entire
length of the mortared pipe is covered by at least 2 layers of cloth. All joints in both
layers shall have an overlap of at least 100mm and joints in the outer layer shall be
offset by at least 300mm from joints in the inner layer, all to the satisfaction of the
S.O.
After pipe laying and , if appropriate, wrapping has been approved by the S.O., the
remainder of the filter material shall be placed and uniformly compacted by a suitable
method approved by the S.O. to form a dense, even surround to the pipe as shown
on the Drawings. Care shall be taken that the pipe is neither damaged nor displaced.
Backfill shall then be placed and compacted in accordance with the appropriate
provisions of Sub-Section 3.4.
9.1 General
This works shall comprise the supply and installation of reinforced concrete pipe
culverts, inclusive of excavation, backfilling, jointing, bedding, construction of
headwalls, wing walls, aprons and sumps and channel protection works, all in
accordance with this Specification and the details shown on the Drawings.
9.2 Materials
9.2.1 Pipes
Collars shall be precast with Grade C25 concrete and shall be suitably
reinforced all in accordance to Section 03300 Cast in-place Concrete
Construction. The width of the collar shall be not less than 150mm and the
minimum thickness shall be 50mm.
Cement mortar for pipe culvert joint shall be complied with requirement of
Sub-Section 6.2.2.
Type A bedding shall consist of Grade C15 concrete complying with Section
9 of this Specification.
9.3.1 Excavation
9.3.2 Installation
The type, size and class of pipe to be installed at each location shall be as
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the S.O. Culverts shall not be
installed at any location until the type of pipe, the exact location, the lines,
levels and grades, the length of pipe and details of inlet and outlet structures
have been confirmed by the S.O. In addition, special requirement
recommended by the manufacturer with respect to assembly and installation
shall be complied with. Especially where elliptically reinforced pipe sections
are used, care shall be taken to ensure that the loading axes are positioned
exactly vertically.
All joints shall be full mortared with 1:3 cement mortar before
concreting of the cradle, all to the satisfaction of the S.O. The
concrete cradle below the underside of the pipe may be
constructed monolithically at least 24 hours before the assembly
and mortaring up of the pipe sections and collars, on condition that
shear connectors are provided across horizontal construction
joints to the satisfaction of the S.O.
During installation, the ends of the pipes shall be butted and the
collar centered about the joint using wedges or other approved
means. The annular shall be completely filled with 1:3 cement
mortar with only sufficient water added to ensure adequate
workability and the wedges removed before finally fairing the joint.
Special care shall be taken to ensure that excess cement mortar is
neatly cleaned off. For pipes over 900mm in diameter the jointing
space shall be filled from inside the pipe after completion of
embankment construction using 1:3 cement mortar. When
installed, the clearance between the outer diameter of pipe and
the inner diameter of collar shall be at least 20mm.
The rebated joint shall be internally flush and fully mortared with
1:3 cement mortar, all to the satisfaction of the S.O.
of not less than 25mm in the 15mm wide gap between the existing
pipe and the new pipe. The remaining space in the gap shall then
be filled with Flexcell Expansion Filler.
9.3.3 Backfilling
Heavy plant and equipment shall not operate within 1.5m of any pipe culvert
until backfilling and, where appropriate, pavement construction has
advanced to a stage which provides at least 600mm of cover to the culvert.
Subject to the approval of the S.O., light compaction equipment may be
operated above pipe culvert after a minimum of 300mm of cover has been
placed and compacted.
10.1 General
This work shall comprise the supply and installation of precast box culverts inclusive
of excavation, backfilling, jointing, bedding, construction of headwalls, wing walls,
aprons and sumps and channel protection works, all in accordance with this
Specification and the details shown on the Drawings.
10.2 Materials
Cement mortar for jointing of box culverts shall comply with requirement of
Sub-Section 6.2.2.
10.3.1 Excavation
9.3.1.1.
10.3.2 Installation
The type and size of precast box culvert to be installed at each location shall
be as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the S.O. Precast box
culverts shall not be installed at any location until the exact location, the
lines, levels and grades, the length of culvert and details of inlet and outlet
structures have been confirmed by the S.O. In addition, special
requirements recommended by the manufacturer shall be complied with.
All joints shall be fully mortared, all to the satisfaction of the S.O. In addition,
a 3mm layer of cement mortars shall be spread on top of the legs of the
invert in order to ensure uniform bearing between the invert and lid.
Unless otherwise approved by the S.O., heavy plant and equipment shall
not operate within 2.0 m of any precast box culvert until backfilling and,
where appropriate, pavement construction has advanced to a stage which
provides at least 300mm of cover to the culvert.
11.1 General
The work shall comprise the supply and installation of bolted, corrugated metal pipe
culverts inclusive of excavation, backfilling, jointing, bedding, construction of
headwalls, wing walls, aprons and sumps and channel protection works, all in
accordance with this Specification and the details shown on the Drawings.
11.2 Materials
11.2.1 Pipes
The dimensions of the pipes shall conform to ASSHTO M36. All pipes shall
be clearly identified by making on each section the following information:
a. Name of manufacturer
b. Diameter of pipe
c. Gauge number
d. Date of manufacture
The Contractor shall submit to the S.O. the material test certificates from the
manufacturer showing the chemical composition and mechanical properties
of the base metal and the amount of zinc coating for every lot of pipes
supplied. The S.O. may order further tests in the sections supplied to Site at
the rate of not more than 1 in 100.
All bolts and nuts shall be of high strength carbonated steel meeting the
provisions of ASTM A449 and ASTM A563 Grade ‘C’ respectively. The
galvanizing on bolts and nuts must meet the requirement of ASTM A153.
Diameters of bolts holes in the longitudinal seams, except those at the plate
corners, shall not exceed the bolt diameter by more than 3mm. The bolt
holes in the circumferential seams, including those at the plate corners,
shall not exceed the bolt diameter by more than 6mm. The minimum
distance from the center of a hole to the edge of a plate shall be 1.75 times
the diameter of the bolt.
Notwithstanding the above, the Contractor shall satisfy the S.O. as to the
adequacy of all bolted connections.
11.3.1 Excavation
Unless otherwise directed and/or approved by the S.O., the pipe culvert
shall laid in a trench excavated in accordance with Sub-Section 9.3.1.1.
Where the open ground method is approved, the work shall comply with
Sub-Section 9.3.1.2.
11.3.2 Installation
11.3.3 Backfilling
Heavy plant and equipment shall not operate within 1.5m of any pipe culvert
until backfilling and, where appropriate, pavement construction has
advanced to a stage which provides at least 600mm of cover to the culvert.
Subject to the approval of the S.O., light compaction equipment may be
operated above pipe culvert after a minimum of 300mm of cover has been
placed and compacted.
12.0 GABIONS
12.1 General
This work shall consist of the construction of miscellaneous erosion protection and
retaining structure to be composed of stone filled wire mesh gabions. The work shall
be carried out all in accordance with this Specification and as shown on the Drawings
and/or as approved by the S.O.
12.2 Materials
Gabions mesh shall be triple twisted and shall have a uniform hexagonal
pattern with openings of 100 x 120mm or less. The mesh shall be securely
tied to selvage wires to form rectangular panels which shall be securely
wired together to form the completed gabion baskets. The ties and
connections for each gabion basket shall comprise not less than 8% of its
total weight, and the fabrication shall be all to the satisfaction of the S.O.
When specified on the Drawings, all wire used in the fabrication of gabions
and in the wring operation during construction shall, after galvanizing, have
extruded on to it a coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC). The PVC coating, not
inclusive of galvanizing, shall not be less than 0.55mm in thickness.
12.2.3 Stone
Stone fill for gabions shall be clean rough quarry stone, or pit or river
cobbles, or a mixture of any these materials, and shall be essentially free
from dust, clay, vegetative matter and other deleterious materials. Individual
pieces of stone shall have least dimensions not less than 20 mm larger than
the gabion mesh openings and greatest dimensions not more than 250 mm.
The stone shall be hard, tough, durable and dense, resistant to the action of
air and water, and suitable in all aspects for the purpose intended. The
material shall be approved by the S.O.
Prior to placing gabions, the surface on and against which they are to be constructed
shall have been prepared and finished in accordance with the relevant provisions of
this Specification. Notwithstanding any earlier approval of these finished surfaces, any
damage to or deterioration of them shall be made good to the satisfaction of the S.O.
before gabions are placed.
Each gabion basket shall be put in place in its turn, completely fabricated except for
the fastening down of the lid, stretched to the correct shape and dimensions, and
fastened securely to all contiguous baskets along each edge with tying wire. The
basket shall then be tightly packed with approved stone by hand in such a manner
that voids are kept to a practicable minimum and are uniformly distributed in the stone
mass. Finally, the lid of the basket shall be securely fastened down with tying wire
along all hitherto unfastened edges, all to the satisfaction of the S.O. In no case shall
the weight of the finished gabion be less than 1300 kg per cubic meter.
As a gabion structure is built up, backfilling against finished gabions shall be carried
out as necessary for proper progressive construction, all in accordance with the
relevant provisions of the appropriate Section of this Specification. Unless otherwise
specified, vertical joints between gabions shall be staggered in gabions structures in a
pattern similar to the joints in running bond brickwork.
13.0 VERIFICATION AND SUBMISSION
13.1 Submission
Include proposals for the methods and sequence of works, proposal for
temporary works and or ground water control required, plant and equipment,
removal of debris, control of noise, dirt, dust and any other potential nuisance.
13.1.2 Programme
Submit the setting-out plan for the sewer line as endorsed by the registered
surveyor to the Engineer for acceptance prior to commencing the field
works.
Test the drain for flow and alignment by water. Propose and rectify any
defects before backfilling and reinstatement.
SECTION 03100
FORMWORK AND FALSEWORK
INDEX TO SPECIFICATION
CLAUSE PAGE
This specification section is the copyright of DPE Consultants Pte Ltd. No reproduction either in part or in
whole in any manner whatsoever is allowed without written permission from DPE Consultants Pte Ltd.
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the Particular Specification, and all other contract documents.
This technical specification shall form part of the Contract and the Contractor shall allow for all
obligations, requirements, considerations, etc. to comply with the specification. The Contractor is
also deemed to have visited the site and fully acquainted himself as to the nature and
practicability of the works. No claims will be entertained as a result of his failure to do all of the
above.
The Consulting Civil and Structural Engineer is DPE Consultants Pte Ltd. The Contractor is to
note that when the term ‘Engineer’ in the following Specification means the representative of the
Consulting Engineer.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Engineer is referred to in the following specification,
such term shall be deemed to mean The Architect or Superintending Officer’s Representative (S.
O. Rep.) as defined in the Articles of Agreement or any other person designated in writing by the
Architect or the Superintending Officer (S.O.) from time to time to exercise the power of the
Architect or S.O.
The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Uniform Building By-
Laws of Malaysia, the Malaysian Standards and Codes of Practices, Malaysian Standards
Eurocodes current at the date of tender and to the satisfaction of the local Building Authorities
empowered to control the Works, the Specifications and drawings supplied to the Contractor and
any other instructions issued by the Engineer/Architect or their representative from time to time.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
Any reference in the Specifications to a Malaysian Standard (MS), Eurocodes (EC) or Code of
Practice (CP) shall imply the latest version at the time of tender of the applicable Standards or
Code of Practices. Should there be any discrepancy between these Specifications and the MS,
EC or CP, the more onerous requirement/s shall be adopted. The Engineer has the sole
discretion to modify or upgrade the specifications, drawings and documents to comply fully with
MS Eurocode requirements at no additional cost and time to the Contract.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the general requirements for falsework and formwork used for
structural concrete works except precasting mould, which is covered in precast
specification.
1.3 Standards
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, ensure all of the Works comply
with the relevant requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or
referenced in the body of the Specification. Alternative Standards and
Codes may be proposed for approval by the Engineer provided it can be
demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the
requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
In the event that the standards or codes are revised or superseded, refer to
the latest edition or the appropriate substitution for the relevant subjects.
Refer to the following technical for guidance in carrying out the works.
nd
(a) Formwork: a guide to good practice (Concrete Society Publication, 2
Edition 1995)
(b) Plain formed concrete finishes (Concrete Society Technical Report
52, 1999)
(c) Formwork Striking Times – criteria, prediction and methods of
assessment (CIRIA Report 136)
All floors layout plans with sections showing all structural members with sizes
and incorporating structural and finished levels, including all openings, voids
required architecturally or to accommodate M&E services. These drawings
shall be submitted and approved prior to fabrication and fixing of any
formwork and reinforcement.
Carry out the design of the formwork and falsework system in accordance with MS
EN 12812: 2004. Account for all construction loads and dead weight of the structures.
Account also for the intended surface finish to the concrete members.
Notwithstanding the comments by the Engineer, the strength and adequacy of the
formwork and its supports shall remain the sole responsibility of the Contractor and/or
his Professional Engineer.
2.2.1 Construction
2.2.1.3 All formwork shall be of such quality and strength as will ensure
rigidity throughout the placing, ramming, vibration and setting of
the concrete without visible deflection.
2.2.1.7 The Contractor shall in all cases request the approval of the
formwork by the Engineer's representative in sufficient time to
allow an inspection to be made and shall not commence
concreting until such approval is obtained. The period between the
Contractor's request for approval and his intention to commence
concreting shall be not less than one clear normal working day
and the Engineer's representative may require a longer period if,
in his opinion, the formwork is of such complexity as to require it.
2.2.1.9 Where internal metal ties are permitted, they or their removable
parts shall be extracted without damage to the concrete and the
remaining holes fully filled with a low shrink mortar approved by
the Engineer. No permanently embedded metal part shall have
less than 40mm cover to the finished concrete surface or the
specified cover to the reinforcement whichever is the greater.
2.2.1.10 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval
strength and deflection calculations and shop drawings of the
formwork he proposes to use. The Contractor shall ensure that
adequate time is given to enable the Engineer to examine the
calculations and drawings and also to inspect the formwork before
concrete is placed within it.
2.2.2 Falsework
2.2.2.2 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval at least
one (1) month before commencing work, complete and full details
of his proposed system of falsework, including detailed drawings
and calculations. Falsework shall be capable of accommodating
temperature changes without causing damage to the concrete.
2.2.2.4 All timber shall be of sound wood, in good condition and free from
defects that might impair its strength. If the vertical members are
of insufficient length to cap at the desired elevation for the
horizontal members, they shall preferably be capped and frames
constructed to the proper elevation. Ends of the vertical members
shall be cut square for full bearing to preclude the use of wedges.
If vertical splices are necessary, the abutting members shall be of
the same approximate size, the ends shall be cut square for full
bearing, and the splices shall be scabbled in a manner approved
by the Engineer.
2.2.2.5 All steel members shall be in good condition, free from damage,
kinks, corrosion or any other defect that might impair their
strength.
2.2.2.8 The Engineer may refuse permission to proceed with other phases
of the work if he deems the falsework unsafe or inadequate to
support properly the loads to which it will be subjected.
2.3 Cambers
2.3.1 Formwork
2.3.1.2 The Contractor shall make allowance for any deflection that is
likely to arise during construction and taking building movement
controls into consideration for early loading to the young concrete
that will induce long term deflection to the hardened concrete, so
that the hardened concrete conforms to the specified line and level
and generally is in accordance with the following requirements.
These requirements are provided as a guideline and the
Contractor shall be responsible for its adequacy based on his
construction method etc.
2.3.1.2.1 All slabs and beams more than 5 metres in span shall
be laid to a camber. The Contractor shall be
responsible for determining the magnitude of the
camber. The following formula may be used subject to
the Contractor verifying its applicability:
2.3.1.3 Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, the soffits of beams and
slabs of 5 m span and over shall be given a camber towards the
centre of 5 mm for every 2 m of span. The cambers to which flat
slabs are laid shall be agreed with the Engineer prior to work
commencing.
2.3.2.1 General: Comply with ACI 347 or BS 5975: 1996 for shoring and
reshoring in multi-storey construction, and as herein specified.
2.3.2.2 Extend shoring from ground to roof for structures 4 stories or less,
unless otherwise permitted.
2.3.2.3 Extend shoring at least 3 floors under floor or roof being placed for
structures over 4 stories. Shore floor directly under floor or roof
being placed, so that loads from construction above will transfer
directly to these shores. Space shoring in stories below this level
in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively
loaded or will induce tensile stress in concrete members where no
reinforcing steel is provided. Extend shores beyond minimum to
ensure proper distribution of loads throughout structure.
3.0 MATERIALS
Use materials that suit the method of construction to be employed and the surface
finish required for the final work. Both timber and steel are acceptable materials.
Use at double slab or conceal area and area where the total clear height within the
conceal area is lesser than 1m where not possible to extract formworks.
Use only anti-termite treated formwork or galvanized steel decking such as Bondek or
equivalent. No left in timber form is allowed. No untreated formwork shall be left in.
Propose release agents to the acceptance of the Engineer to suit the method of
construction and the finish required, taking note of the requirements of subsequent
trades.
All release agents used to be non-staining, non-injurious to the finished concrete and
not to be adversely affected by the weather.
In water-resisting construction, use ties of a type that does not induce seepage and
reduce the water-resistance of the structure. Use ties with cone and length that
provide minimum 40mm concrete cover protection.
Use approved epoxy grouting or high strength non-shrink grout to the cone and ties
recess. Submit the proposed epoxy grouting to Engineer’s acceptance.
4.1 Formwork
4.1.1 General
The formwork shall, unless otherwise directed, have smooth even faces and
be supported as to provide a plain surface with clean and true arises. The
surfacing material shall be renewed as necessary during the period of the
contract and all accumulations of hardened concrete on the faces shall be
removed before use.
Formwork shall be provided for the top faces of sloping work and anchored to
prevent floatation where the slope exceeds 15 degrees.
The Contractor may be required to cut out or re-execute the work at his own
expense where openings, holes, conduits and the like which are shown on the
drawings have not been formed.
Forms for walls and thin sections shall be provided with openings and other
devices which will permit the concrete to be placed in a manner to prevent
segregation or the accumulation of hardened concrete on the form or on the
reinforcement above the level of the concrete surface.
If the formwork for a column or wall is erected to its full height, concrete
placement openings shall be left in one side and closed as placing of the
concrete proceeds.
Ensure formwork is clean and clear of all debris and free water before
concrete is placed.
Seal all joints in formwork to avoid leakage of grout and staining of concrete
surfaces.
4.1.8 Cleanliness
All rubbish, chippings, shavings, etc shall be removed from the interior of
formwork immediately before concrete is placed, first by compressed air and
then by a jet of water. Temporary openings shall be formed for the inspection
of the inside of the formwork and for the escape of water used for washing.
Use approved form oil which is compatible with the required finish to coat the
faces of the formwork in contact with the concrete. Such oils shall be insoluble
in water, non-staining, not injurious to the concrete and shall not become flaky
or be removed by rain or wash water. Diesel oil and liquids which retard the
setting of the concrete shall not be used. The same approved type of form oil
shall be used throughout all works. The application of the form oil shall be
such that no reinforcement or prestressing tendons shall be coated by the oil
and there shall be no accumulation of the oil at the bottom of the formwork.
Ensure that no ferrous metals are left in the concrete cover zone when the formwork
has been struck.
Make good any holes left exposed to view in the faces of the concrete by approved
epoxy grouting or high strength non-shrink grout to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Bolts and other metal fittings used in formwork erection shall be constructed so as to
permit their easy removal to a depth of at least 50mm from the face without injury to the
concrete and so that upon their removal the cavities left are of the smallest possible
size. Ensure:
Anchor bolts to be permanently installed in concrete, fixing, box-outs, cores and other
devices used for forming openings, holes, pockets, recesses and other cavities shall be
fixed firmly to the formwork. These fixings shall be as rigid as the formwork itself so as
to prevent the leakage of any grout. No holes shall be cut in cast concrete except with
the approval of the Engineer. If the Contractor fails to provide for any box out, hole or
opening which he may reasonably be expected to anticipate from the drawings and if
the Engineer considers that cutting the concrete to provide such opening may impair
the strength of the member, then the Contractor shall at his expense adopt any other
method which the Engineer may deem fit to provide for such opening.
4.4.1 Construction
All holes left in the concrete shall be filled with mortar and finished to the
approval of the Engineer. Wire ties passing through the concrete may be used
only when approved and the ends of the wire shall be concealed and
measures taken to prevent rust stains on the concrete.
4.5 Striking
4.5.1 Support
Provide support for the concrete in the required position until it has gained
adequate strength. Determine the strength of concrete required to support
its own weight and any construction loads, without short- or long-term
Supports of an upper floor shall rest on the lower floor only if the lower floor
has developed adequate strength to bear the load. If in the opinion of the
Engineer, the lower floor does not have the required strength to carry the
support of the upper floors, then the method adopted to support the formwork
of the upper floor shall have to be approved by the Engineer.
4.5.2.3 When formwork is removed during the curing period the provision
of approved curing methods shall immediately follow the removal
of the formwork.
4.5.3 Striking
Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer, allow for the minimum period as
follows before striking the formworks:
4.5.4 Sequence
5.1 Submissions
Submit all design for falsework supports to Engineer for acceptance prior to
commencing the works. Submit to the authorities such as Ministry of
Manpower for records where required.
SECTION 03200
REINFORCEMENT
INDEX TO SPECIFICATION
CLAUSE PAGE
This specification section is the copyright of DP Engineers Pte Ltd. No reproduction either in part or in
whole in any manner whatsoever is allowed without written permission from DP Engineers Pte Ltd.
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the Particular Specification, and all other contract documents.
This technical specification shall form part of the Contract and the Contractor shall allow for all
obligations, requirements, considerations, etc. to comply with the specification. The Contractor is
also deemed to have visited the site and fully acquainted himself as to the nature and
practicability of the works. No claims will be entertained as a result of his failure to do all of the
above.
The Consulting Civil and Structural Engineer is DP Engineers Pte Ltd. The Contractor is to note
that when the term ‘Engineer’ in the following Specification means the representative of the
Consulting Engineer.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Engineer is referred to in the following specification,
such term shall be deemed to mean The Architect or Superintending Officer’s Representative (S.
O. Rep.) as defined in the Articles of Agreement or any other person designated in writing by the
Architect or the Superintending Officer (S.O.) from time to time to exercise the power of the
Architect or S.O.
The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Uniform Building By-
Laws of Malaysia, the Malaysian Standards and Codes of Practices, Malaysian Standards
Eurocodes current at the date of tender and to the satisfaction of the local Building Authorities
empowered to control the Works, the Specifications and drawings supplied to the Contractor and
any other instructions issued by the Engineer/Architect or their representative from time to time.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
Any reference in the Specifications to a Malaysian Standard (MS), Eurocodes (EC) or Code of
Practice (CP) shall imply the latest version at the time of tender of the applicable Standards or
Code of Practices. Should there be any discrepancy between these Specifications and the MS,
EC or CP, the more onerous requirement/s shall be adopted. The Engineer has the sole
discretion to modify or upgrade the specifications, drawings and documents to comply fully with
MS Eurocode requirements at no additional cost and time to the Contract.
1.1 Scope
This section covers general requirements for bars and welded fabric reinforcements
used in reinforced concrete elements.
No item.
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, ensure all of the Works comply
with the relevant requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or
referenced in the body of the Specification. Alternative Standards and
Codes may be proposed for approval by the Engineer, provided it can be
demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the
requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Malaysian Standards
Other Standards
In the event that the standards or codes are revised or superseded, refer to
the latest edition or the appropriate substitution for the relevant subjects.
Refer to the following technical reference for guidance in carrying out the
works.
All floors layout plans with sections showing all structural members with sizes
and incorporating structural and finished levels, including all openings, voids
required architecturally or to accommodate M&E services. These drawings
shall be submitted and approved prior to fabrication and fixing of any
formwork and reinforcement.
Similarly, drawings for minor sewer incorporating all existing and proposed
lines, manholes, connections, etc shall be submitted as and when required by
the Engineer.
(a) Walls
(b) Columns
(c) Beams and Slabs
Submit testing plan and frequency for the tests (by approved laboratory) on
every batch of reinforcement delivered to site. Sampling of test samples by
the Engineer on site.
Allow for all costs involved in making the tests and for bars mutilated in
obtaining test pieces.
All reinforcement shall be of the diameter, length and material shown on the
Drawings. Prepare all bar bending schedules.
2.0 MATERIALS
2.1 Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be free from pitting, loose rust, mill scale, paint, oil, grease,
adhering earth or any other material that may impair the bond between concrete and
the reinforcement or cause the disintegration of the concrete. No adhering limewash or
cement grout shall be permitted.
Each consignment of reinforcement may be tested for compliance with the relevant MS
standards, and certificates of origin shall be produced. Selection of test pieces shall be
made by the Engineer.
To BS 6744:2001+A2:2009, type 304 S31 and 316 S33, strength grade 250
for plain round bars and grade 460 for deformed high yield steel bars.
2.3 Couplers
The ends of the bars to be joined by mechanical splices, shall be machined dead
square and flat, installed with the bearing surfaces in contact in full compliance with
manufacturer's specification.
The fit shall be "no-go" for any feeler gauge when using end bearing splices.
All splices shall be installed so that inspection is possible. Before concreting any
member where mechanical splices are used, obtain the Engineer's approval of the
splices installation. Make good of all unsatisfactory installations to the Engineer's
approval.
2.4 Spacers
Detail, supply and fix all spacers, in accordance with MS EN 1992-1-1, Clause 7.3.
Seek Engineer’s acceptance for spacers where the concrete will be exposed
subsequently.
Mortar spacers to have durability and strength characteristics not less than the
surrounding concrete.
3.1 Storage
Provide power plant necessary for the cutting and bending of reinforcement on Site in
accordance with bending schedules prepared.
Bars incorrectly bent shall be used only if the means used for straightening and
rebending will not damage the material. In accordance with MS EN 1992-1-1
Reinforcement projecting from work being concreted or already concreted shall not be
bent out of its correct position for any reason unless approved and shall be protected
from deformation or other damage.
Adequate precautions shall be taken at all times to ensure that reinforcement in slabs
and beams is protected from displacement by constructional traffic by the use of, for
example, properly constructed and supported barrow runs and walking boards.
No concreting shall be commenced until the Engineer has inspected the reinforcement
in position and until his approval has been obtained.
Care shall be taken that the binding wire is kept well clear of the face of the
concrete to prevent damage due to corrosion of the wire. Stainless tying wire
shall be used for exposed concrete surfaces where the wire is within the
cover zone.
Bend all ends away from the concrete face and remove all loose ends
before placing concrete.
Permitted only with the prior written approval of the Engineer. Where
permitted, carry out in accordance with MS EN 1992-1-1 and BS EN ISO
17660-1:2006 and BS EN ISO 17660-2:2006 .
Not permitted.
At the time of placing concrete, ensure the reinforcement are clean, free of corrosive
pitting, loose rust and mill scale and other substances that may adversely affect the
bond with concrete. Light surface rust is acceptable.
Make up cages and fix securely in accordance with the reinforcement drawings to
provide adequate rigidity and to ensure that the specified cover and fit within the
moulds are achieved.
Reinforcement not exceeding 12mm in diameter which projects from the face of the
units may be bent to facilitate the casting or demoulding of the unit subject to approval
for each case.
3.6 Cover
Before concreting, check thoroughly that the specified cover dimensions have been
obtained.
Where these are reinforced with a single layer of fabric in the upper part of the slab,
the fabric may be placed in position on top of the first compacted layer of concrete,
followed by the top layer of concrete, placed within 30 minutes of the first layer.
3.8 Laps
Lap reinforcement as shown on the drawings unless otherwise agreed with the
Engineer.
Bars in lapped splices shall be in close contact and should be wired together. Bending
of bars hot or splicing of bars by welding is not permitted, unless shown on the
Drawings or approved by the Engineer.
Where laps required are not shown in the drawings, propose suitable location for
Engineer’s acceptance. Comply with the requirements of MS EN 1992-1-1
3.9 Anchorages
Protect all steel parts from corrosion and keep all threaded parts protected until used.
Keep all devices free from any coating or contamination.
Anchorages, including buried dead anchorages, shall be fixed with due regard to
cover requirements for corrosion resistance and fire protection.
In the event that reinforcement are expected to be exposed for a prolonged period
over three months or such that loose rust and scale may form, apply a corrosion
protection coating to Engineer’s acceptance. Ensure the coating is compatible with
the concrete and will not reduce the bond of the reinforcement.
3.11 Accuracy
4.1 Submissions
Carry out the following tests in an approved laboratory on every batch and size of
reinforcement delivered to site. Testing requirements and frequency to be in
accordance with MS 146:2006 for reinforcement bars and MS 145: 2006 for welded
steel fabric.
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
INDEX TO SPECIFICATION
CLAUSE PAGE
This specification section is the copyright of DPE Consultants Pte Ltd. No reproduction either in part or in
whole in any manner whatsoever is allowed without written permission from DPE Consultants Pte Ltd.
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the Particular Specification, and all other contract documents.
This technical specification shall form part of the Contract and the Contractor shall allow for all
obligations, requirements, considerations, etc. to comply with the specification. The Contractor is
also deemed to have visited the site and fully acquainted himself as to the nature and
practicability of the works. No claims will be entertained as a result of his failure to do all of the
above.
The Consulting Civil and Structural Engineer is DPE Consultants Pte Ltd. The Contractor is to
note that when the term ‘Engineer’ in the following Specification means the representative of the
Consulting Engineer.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Engineer is referred to in the following specification,
such term shall be deemed to mean The Architect or Superintending Officer’s Representative (S.
O. Rep.) as defined in the Articles of Agreement or any other person designated in writing by the
Architect or the Superintending Officer (S.O.) from time to time to exercise the power of the
Architect or S.O.
The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Uniform Building By-
Laws of Malaysia, the Malaysian Standards and Codes of Practices, Malaysian Standards
Eurocodes current at the date of tender and to the satisfaction of the local Building Authorities
empowered to control the Works, the Specifications and drawings supplied to the Contractor and
any other instructions issued by the Engineer/Architect or their representative from time to time.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
Any reference in the Specifications to a Malaysian Standard (MS), Eurocodes (EC) or Code of
Practice (CP) shall imply the latest version at the time of tender of the applicable Standards or
Code of Practices. Should there be any discrepancy between these Specifications and the MS,
EC or CP, the more onerous requirement/s shall be adopted. The Engineer has the sole
discretion to modify or upgrade the specifications, drawings and documents to comply fully with
MS Eurocode requirements at no additional cost and time to the Contract.
1.1 Scope
This section covers general requirements for the use of structural quality concrete in
plain, reinforced or prestressed structures. Relevant requirements may also be
adopted for non-structural concrete, for example in external works. For particular
requirements of specialists works such as prestressing and pre-cast, refer to the other
respective sections.
Read this work section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the other work
sections as follows:
03200 REINFORCEMENT
03100 FORMWORK AND FALSEWORK
07900 DESIGNED JOINTS
07100 WATER-RESISTANCE TO CONCRETE STRUCTURE
1.3 Standards
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, ensure all of the Works comply
with the relevant requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or
referenced in the body of the Specification. Alternative Standards and
Codes may be proposed for approval by the Engineer, provided it can be
demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the
requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Malaysian Standards
Other Standards
In the event that the standards or codes are revised or superseded, refer to
the latest edition or the appropriate substitution for the relevant subjects.
▪ Site plan and sections incorporating all external works, roads, culverts,
drains, slopes, etc. showing all existing and proposed levels. Drawings
showing all existing information within and around the site shall be
submitted at the commencement and updated subsequently to
incorporate proposed works.
▪ All floors layout plans with sections showing all structural members with
sizes and incorporating structural and finished levels, including all
openings, voids required architecturally or to accommodate M&E services.
Submit for acceptance prior to fabrication and fixing of any formwork and
reinforcement.
▪ Similarly, drawings for minor sewer incorporating all existing and
proposed lines, manholes, connections, etc shall be submitted as and
when required by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the control of the quality of concrete
manufactured and placed in the Works. Where concrete is required to resist water
pressure, the Contractor shall ensure that the concrete remains completely watertight
and shall guarantee the water-tightness of all such structures. The Contractor shall, at
his own expense, carry out any remedial measures to the satisfaction of the Engineer
which may be necessary to make such structures watertight whether leakage is through
the concrete or through the joints.
The fact that the Contractor has used materials etc. to the approval of the Engineer
shall in no way relieve him of his responsibilities of producing a concrete of the required
characteristic strength, workability, shrinkage characteristics, etc for the purpose to
which it is placed. Any defects due to materials and workmanship not in accordance
with this Specification shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer by the
Contractor at his own expense. All such remedial work shall be executed without undue
delay.
Ensure the concrete mix delivered and the concreting process will achieve the
specified strength and consistently for all concrete members as indicated in the
drawings, taking into consideration of site conditions and reinforcement details.
Take note that unless otherwise specified, concrete mix for structural elements to
achieve minimum grade as specified in the drawings.
Control the construction such that any crack due to shrinkage and temperature effects
does not exceed 0.1mm wide.
Propose and obtain the Engineer's approval for sections of structure to be temporarily
omitted to allow the major part of the shrinkage of the structure to take place. Where a
building dimension is larger than 60m and no expansion joints are shown on the
drawing, at least one shrinkage bay must be provided.
The width of pourstrip shall take into account of the reinforcement lapping length.
Such shrinkage bays are to be left open for 56 days or such other times as the
Engineer shall direct.
For retaining walls, shrinkage joints incorporating water bars of the form approved by
the Engineer shall be provided at not more than 8m centres. Construction joints shall
coincide with shrinkage joints.
Ensure during construction that the structure is not subjected to loads that will cause
short-term or long-term distress to the concrete.
3.0 MATERIAL
3.1 General
Materials used in the Works shall be of the qualities and kinds specified herein and
equal to approved samples.
Do not use aggregate with clay plus silt content in excess of the limits specified in MS
EN 12620: 2008 as a fine aggregate without the prior approval of the Engineer who
may instruct that such aggregate be rewashed at the Contractor's expense.
Materials shall comply with the appropriate Standards, with preference for materials of
local manufacture. Where the requirements of the relevant Standards are in conflict with
this Specification, then this Specification shall take precedence.
3.2 Cement
Do not use.
Seal all cement delivered to Site and branded bags of the manufacturer or in
Store all cement in a weatherproof dry shed with raised boarded floor, or in
properly designed bulk storage tanks.
Submit a certificate showing the date and place of manufacture of the cement.
Submit testing for engineer’s acceptance. Reject any cement failing to comply
with the requirements of the relevant standards.
Fine aggregate shall be natural sand or crushed stone sand complying with the
requirements of MS EN 12620, BS 882 and not to be alkali reactive. All-in-aggregate
shall not be used.
3.3.1 Testing
3.3.2 Grading
The Engineer shall reserve the right to draw samples of aggregates from any
stockpile at any time and have them tested at an approved laboratory in
accordance with MS EN 12620. Aggregate whose grading is found to fall
outside the approved zone for any criteria specified in MS EN 12620 shall be
liable for rejection.
3.4.1 Size
3.4.2 Grading
3.5 Water
All water used for mixing concrete, mortar and grout, for cleaning out formwork and
for curing to be clean and free from harmful matter in solution or suspension.
3.6 Admixtures
To comply with the requirements MS EN 206, BS 1014, BS 3892 and BS 5075: Part 1.
Acceptance of admixtures will only be made upon provision of satisfactory information
relating to name, type, effects of over-dosage and under-dosage, chemical name and
its main constituents of the admixture, design dosage and justification for use.
Requests for permission to use other types of admixtures not covered by these
Standards may only be considered when accompanied by full supporting information.
The Contractor shall submit the proposed mix design for approval.
Notwithstanding the Engineer's acceptance, the Contractor shall be
responsible for required properties of the mix, including strength.
The mix design shall ensure that no excessive bleeding occurs. The mix
must have the abilities to achieve the specified surface finish.
Whenever possible, ready mixed concrete shall be used. Site mix may be
used if ready mixed concrete is not available or in case of small quantities,
but only with the prior approval in writing from the Engineer. Mixing on site
by hand is not allowed unless approved by the Engineer.
Mix design to comply with requirements as set out in the drawings. Unless
otherwise stated, concrete mix means designed mix. The concrete is
specified by its characteristic strength (= concrete grade) as defined in MS
EN 1992-1-1 Clause 2.4.2.1 but compliance to MS 523, particularly to
minimum and maximum cement content and to maximum water/cement
ratio is also required. The concrete mixes to be used in the Works in any
particular location are as specified on the Drawings. Design concrete mixes,
unless otherwise specified for protection against aggressive soil, shall
comply with the specifications below.
C50/60
C45/55
C40/50
C35/45
C30/37
C25/30
C20/25
C16/20
C12/15
Strength Class
Characteristic Strength at 28
50 45 40 35 30 25 20 16 12
days, fck (N/mm2)
Characteristic Strength at 28
60 55 50 45 37 30 25 20 15
days, fck,cube (N/mm2 )
Maximum water/cement
0.4 0.4 0.45 0.45 0.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.7
ratio
3.7.6 Sulphates
Obtain from an approved source. Ensure that the concrete supplied complies with the
requirements of this specification and the recommendations MS EN 206 - 1: 2016.
Forward details of the ready-mix concrete plant proposed for use to the Engineer for
acceptance. Provide contingency plans prior to commencement of work in the event
of supplies being interrupted during a pour due to a plant breakdown. Where feasible,
details of a suitable back-up plant/supplier should be submitted to the Engineer for
acceptance.
Arrange inspection to the supplier's facilities and to require samples of cement, fine and
coarse aggregates and provide admixtures for testing. The cost of such tests shall be
borne by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall take full responsibilities, notwithstanding the Engineer's approval,
to ensure that all ready-mixed concrete conforms to MS EN 206 and this Specification.
Concrete which does not comply shall be rejected and shall be immediately removed
from Site.
Waterproof concrete shall consist of structural concrete as specified herein and with the
addition of an approved waterproofing additive. This shall be mixed in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions and as detailed in the Bill of Quantities.
Supply and transport all Ready-Mix Concrete to the point of discharge from the
mixer/agitator in accordance with MS EN 206 - 1
For each truck load of concrete delivered, the following information shall
appear on the delivery docket:
The Engineer reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to change the
supplier due to unsatisfactory performance or to rescind his approval for
further use of ready-mixed concrete during the progress of the Works, if any
of the requirements has, in his opinion, not been satisfactorily complied with.
Mixing shall continue until the concrete shows uniform consistency and
colour. The mixer shall be operated to the manufacturer's recommendations.
The drum of the mixer shall always be entirely discharged before materials for
the next batch are fed into it. Mixers which have been out of use for more
than 30 minutes should be thoroughly cleaned before the next batch.
4.1.3 Workability
4.1.5 Pumping
Pumping shall commence first with blowing of water through the pipeline,
followed by cement mortar and these should be discharged away from the
area to be concreted.
4.2 Inserts
Ensure that any cast-in inserts are securely fixed prior to placing concrete.
Place and fully compact the concrete to avoid cold joints and honeycombing, and to
minimize segregation, excessive blemishes or other defects in the hardened concrete.
The formwork shall be thoroughly wetted prior to placing concrete. Construction joints
shall be wetted and/or if specified, treated with a bonding agent to its manufacturer's
specification.
No more than 30 minutes shall pass between adding the cement to the mix and the
completion of the placing. This interval may be increased to maximum 2 hours if the
concrete is transported by agitating trucks and/or retarders are used. The concrete
supplier must guarantee the mix for use and higher strength concrete may require
reduced times. The interval in all cases between the discharge from the agitators and
the placing of concrete shall not exceed 20 minutes.
No vibration from piling or any other equipment shall be accepted during placing and 24
hours after placing the concrete.
Before proceeding to place the concrete, the shuttering shall be realigned, if necessary,
and water and rubbish therein shall be removed by approved means. Immediately prior
to placing the concrete the shuttering shall be well wetted and inspection openings shall
be closed.
Concrete may be placed under water only with the prior written permission of
the Engineer and using a tremie pipe.
Vibration, with any type of vibrator, shall not be continued in any one spot to
the extent that pools of grout are formed. Care shall be given to avoid any
disturbance of concrete which has become too stiff to regain plasticity when
vibrated. Vibration shall not be applied directly to reinforcement.
▪ Internal vibrators shall be used in all sections which are sufficiently large
to permit their use.
▪ Form vibrators shall only be used when sections which are too small for
the internal type and subject to the Engineer's approval.
Internal vibrators shall be placed in the concrete with a slow and uniform
motion and shall be kept there until the escape of air bubbles from the
concrete ceases. They shall then be withdrawn with a slow and uniform
motion in order that a pocket shall not be left in the concrete at the point
from which the vibrator is withdrawn. The vibrator shall be applied in like
manner at points uniformly spaced and not further apart than the radius over
which the vibrator is visibly effective. They shall be applied close enough to
the formwork to effectively vibrate the surface concrete.
With internal and form vibrators, the vibration shall be such that the concrete
becomes uniformly plastic.
Contractor's attention is drawn to the special care required for casting ponds,
swimming pools, water features and all underground structures including
basement floor, retaining walls, sumps, pits, etc. These are designed to MS
EN 1992-3. The Contractor shall ensure that workmanship and curing is up to
the required standard. The crack width in such structures shall not exceed
0.2mm. The Contractor shall take full responsibility for ensuring that the
resulting construction is completely watertight and free from penetration of
moisture.
When, in the opinion of the Engineer, damp patches and/or leakage of water
in the finished Work are due to failure of the Contractor to comply with the
Specifications, the affected Work shall be made good at the Contractor's
expense.
Water bars shall be provided in all construction joints and the type of water-
bar shall be as specified or to the approval of the Engineer. All water bars
shall be joined by welding strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and all multiple joints and special intersections shall be
manufactured by the supplier. All water bars shall have a minimum width of
300 mm and shall be centrally placed in the middle of the structural
members across the construction joint.
All service holes cast in shall incorporate sleeves with puddle flanges and
temporary openings for services should incorporate water-bars.
Care shall be taken at all times to ensure that water-bars are not perforated
or damaged in any way and the concrete shall be carefully placed and
All kickers or starter plinths to walls (if used) on the periphery of the
watertight construction shall be cast monolithically with the base.
The formwork shall comply with this Specification and in addition any bolt or
fastening embedded in or passing through the concrete shall be to the
approval of the Engineer and not impair the water tightness of the structure.
The use of through bolts and sleeves is strictly prohibited.
Slotted inserts or sockets cast into the structural concrete shall be provided
for all fixings, including services. The cutting of holes in watertight concrete
is strictly prohibited.
4.3.4 Blinding
4.4 Kickers
Kickers are to be monolithic with the slab of sound construction and not less than 100
mm high.
4.5.1 General
Construction joints shall be either truly vertical or truly horizontal over the full
section of the concrete and shall, on no account, be formed along the natural
line of slope of the wet concrete. Neither horizontal joints in the beams nor
vertical joints in columns shall be permitted without the written approval of the
Engineer.
▪ Position and form joints such as to suit the structure and to avoid
distress to the structure.
▪ Construction joints shall occur within the end thirds of spanning members
unless for design reasons other positions are specifically indicated on the
Engineer's Drawings.
▪ Construction joints in slabs supported by retaining walls shall coincide with
shrinkage joints in the walls.
▪ Ground beams shall be cast monolithic with the ground slab and no
construction joints shall be permitted in these members either horizontally
at the underside of the slab or vertically on the side of the beam. If slabs
are cast separately, additional shear reinforcement to withstand horizontal
interface shear shall be calculated and provided by the Contractor at his
own cost.
▪ Pile caps shall be cast monolithically with the basement/ground slab and
no construction joints shall be permitted in these members, either
horizontally at the underside of the slab or vertically through the pile cap.
If the basement/ground slabs are cast separately with the pile caps
resulting in horizontal joints within the pile cap, additional shear
reinforcement (not lesser than T12-300 both ways) to withstand horizontal
interface shear shall be calculated and provided by the Contractor at his
own cost.
Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer, the limit pour sizes as given in
the following table:
Water-resisting walls 25 5
Water-resisting slabs 100 10
Slabs with major
100 13
restraint at both ends
Slabs with major 250 20
restraint at one end only
Slabs with little restraint
500 30
in any direction
Walls 40 10
As soon as possible after casting, but in any case after no longer than 24
hours, carefully prepare such joints ,thoroughly roughened by means of water
jetting, scrabbling and wire brushing in order to expose the aggregate to
provide a key. They shall be well cleaned of all foreign matter and laitance
and saturated with water prior to depositing the new concrete
Apply a layer of cement grout on the joint surface prior to pouring fresh
concrete against a construction joint.
The following precautions should be adopted as necessary to comply with the above
limits: -
(a) Shading of aggregate stock piles.
(b) Insulation of water tanks, pipelines and formwork.
(c) Refrigeration of mixing water.
(d) Addition of ice to concrete mix to lower temperature.
(e) Shading of formwork and reinforcement from the sun and drying winds.
(f) Cooling of formwork and reinforcement or other material with water prior to and
ahead of casting of the concrete by mist spraying.
(g) Covering and spraying with water of hardening concrete surfaces.
(h) Concreting during the cooler part of the day.
(a) Propose suitable methods and proposals to Engineer’s acceptance to ensure the
temperature of the concrete does not exceed 70°C during hydration.
(b) Control the temperature gradient across the section by the provision of thermal
insulation or reduce placement temperature or altering the mix design or
combinations to prevent a differential temperature that is not greater than
27.7°C.
(c) Monitor the temperature of the concrete through the section.
(d) Continue temperature monitoring until the hottest part of the section is less than
27.7°C greater than the minimum daily ambient temperature.
(e) Protect the concrete from abrupt changes in temperature at the end of the curing
period. Ensure good drainage system around concrete, and submit proposal to
the Engineer acceptance.
(f) Inspect and remove any bleeding water and weak concrete at the top surface
prior to setting of concrete, replace the surface concrete and re-compact if
necessary.
Protect the concrete during transportation and after placing using tarpaulins,
polythene sheeting etc.
Whichever method the Contractor uses for obtaining each finish, the same
method shall be used for the remainder of the work.
Provide floor hardener, either liquid or powder form to protect all monolithic
floors to architect’s acceptance.
For precast beams and slabs surface receiving in-situ structural topping, the
surfaces shall be particularly finish to ensure the composite action is
achieved.
Generally, this is for use in areas without any other finish than paint
and surface coatings, and provides a dense smooth surface. This
finish is suitable for directly trafficked surfaces.
4.10.1 Curing
4.10.2 Protection
After setting, concrete shall be protected during the first state of hardening
from the structure against damage, the harmful effects of rain, sunshine and
drying winds. The concrete shall be covered with a layer of sacking, canvas,
hessian or similar absorbent material, or a layer of sand and kept consistently
wet for 7 days. After thorough wetting, the concrete may be covered by a
layer of approved waterproof paper kept in contact with the concrete for 7
days.
Propose methods for the repair of any damage occurring and make good
subject to the agreement of the Engineer.
The structure shall be built to dimensions and levels shown on the Architect's drawings.
Deviation from true positions and/or levels will be accepted only if they do not effects
the finished dimensions, positions and levels as shown on the Architect's drawings.
Construct all work within the permissible deviations given below. Refer to contract
conditions for items where tighter accuracy is required.
Note that the tolerances given here are not cumulative. Carry out regular checks on
the accuracy of the structure and if a part of the structure is found to be out of
tolerance, propose any remedial work required.
All structural tolerances given above for curtain walls must also be achieved for external
structural faces of building affecting set out of masonry, windows and other
cladding/finishes.
The distance from any one corner to the plane containing the other three
corners to be accurate within the following:
4.11.4.1 Foundations
The following tolerances are for surfaces that will receive further leveling
finishes and are pre-strike.
4.11.5.2 Foundation
Actual
5mm
5m
4.11.5.6 Any point under a 3 m straight edge Permissible deviation for any
position on floor = 5mm.
3m
5mm
3m
5mm 5mm
Plumb over a height including beams or edges above each other will be
accurate to within the following:
Height ∆ mm
Length, m ∆ mm
Up to and including 1.5 +/-5
Over 1.5 up to and including 3 +/-8
Over 3 up to and including 5 +/-10
Over 5 up to and including 8 +/-15
Over 8 +/-15 + 1mm per metre or part over 8m
(with a maximum of 25mm)
Specified camber mm mm
Up to and including 20 ±5
Over 20, up to and including 40 ± 10
Over 40 ± 15
∆ = Permitted up to 3 mm.
Pre-set foundation bolt or bolt groups when not prepared for adjustment.
Permitted deviation from specified position as follows:
Pre-set wall bolt or bolt groups when not prepared for adjustment. Permitted
deviation from specified position as follows:
Member ∆ mm
Member up to 500mm thick ±5
Over 500mm, up to and including 1000mm -5/+10
Over 1000mm, up to and including 2000mm -5/+15
Over 2000mm -5/+20
(c) This laterally out of position tolerance includes all local deviations in
edge of slab or edge of beam as well as overall building tolerance.
Notes:
(i) The thickness of slab shall not be lesser than 95% of the nominal
thickness as specified.
(ii) Where stated in the architectural drawings, slabs shall be laid to the
specified falls.
(iii) Gaps and slots for the sealants shall satisfy the requirement and
approval to architect.
(iv) Permitted deviations for structural separation joints and Expansion
joints = ± 5 mm
4.12.1 General
All exposed face of such joints shall be sealed by approved 10mm x 10mm
polysulphide sealant all round. Similarly, such joints shall be protected by a
layer of volclay or approved equivalent all round the joint along the mid depth
of the joint. Such material shall be secured to already cast concrete member.
The Contractor shall propose and obtain the Engineer's approval for
sections of structure to be temporarily omitted to allow the major part of the
shrinkage of the structure to take place. Where a building dimension is
larger than 70m and no expansion joints are shown on the drawing, at least
one shrinkage bay must be provided.
Such shrinkage bays are to be left open for 56 days or such other times as
the Engineer shall direct.
The joints shall be formed to the details shown on the Engineer's drawings.
The width of sheet used for the vertical separating medium shall be equal to
the depth of joints indicated on the drawings and the width of the horizontal
separating medium shall be equal to the width of the concrete bearing
surface shown on the drawings.
The horizontal separating medium shall carry the loading indicated on the
drawings. A horizontal movement of 25mm shall be allowed for unless noted
otherwise on the drawings. The concrete surfaces in contact with the
separating medium shall be true to line and level and smoothly finished with
all arises chamfered.
The horizontal separating medium shall be laid first in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions, the edge of the material being accurately
aligned with the "free" edge of the bearing surface.
The vertical separating medium shall then be fixed to the concrete using a
suitable adhesive taking care that its edges are true, square and in contact
with horizontal separating medium for its full length.
When the separating mediums have been finally positioned they shall be
completely covered with a suitable gauge of polythene sheet in order to
exclude grout during subsequent casting operations.
Immediately after removal of the formwork the exposed edges of the joint
shall be cleaned and the edges of the separating media left exposed.
Water stops shall be provided at all horizontal and vertical construction, contraction
and expansion joints of ponds, swimming pools and basement floor, walls, and any
other structure founded below the ground. These shall be of an approved type and
shall not be punctured in fixing. All waterstops to be capable of providing hydrostatic
resistance appropriate to the structure and joint in which they are installed.
Where partitions are built up to the soffits of a reinforced concrete beam or slab a
10mm horizontal joint is to be left clear below the soffit. This joint shall be filled with
approved compressible material and fire-rated to the Architect’s acceptance.
Galvanised hoop iron, stainless steel or other approved brick ties of appropriate
length shall be cast in the concrete for building into the horizontal joints of brick/block
partitions at every 4th brick course.
All piles are trimmed and finished to the Engineer's acceptance before constructing
pile caps.
The piles shall be thoroughly washed clean of all adhering foreign matter before the
blinding layer is placed. A temporary sump pit shall be excavated beside each pile
cap to provide approximately 0.5 m3 below blinding level for rain water runoff. Blinding
shall be laid with falls to the sump.
When formwork is fixed, drainage outlets shall be provided to allow rainwater to pass
into the sump. During concreting, the Contractor shall take suitable precautions to
prevent rain from damaging the mix. The concreting programme shall be arranged
such that a sloping face is always provided away from previously cast areas and this
face is worked towards the drainage outlets. Pumps shall be on hand throughout
concreting in case of rain.
Pile caps shall be cast in one continuous operation, construction joints shall not be
allowed as specified in Clause 4.51. The Contractor shall exercise particular attention
in vibrating the concrete around starter bars and pile heads.
5.1 Submission
The Contractor shall submit the following information on his proposals and obtain the
approval of the Engineer before any Work commencement:-
The Contractor shall submit the following items to the Engineer for his approval during
the course of the Works :-
No concrete of any particular mix proportions shall be incorporated into the Works
until all the requirements of this Specification have been met in respect of those mix
proportions and have been approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall not alter the source of supply of any material from that initially
approved by the Engineer, without the written permission of the Engineer.
Carry out sampling and testing during concreting operations in accordance with MS
EN 206 and the appropriate parts of MS EN 12350.
Supply three copies of all test results to the Engineer as soon as they are available.
Trial mixes are required to verify the mix design for each concrete grade on
the project. Twelve 150 mm compression test cubes should be prepared from
each trial mix. Six cubes shall be tested at 7 days and the remaining six cubes
at 28 days of age. The sampling, making, curing and testing of these work
test cubes shall be in accordance to BS 1881. The mean strength and
individual strength of these work test cubes are to comply with the
requirements of MS EN 206 "Concrete - Specification, performance,
production and conformity”. No concrete shall be placed until the trial mix
results are approved by the Engineer.
The Engineer may accept evidence of test results furnished by the concrete
supplier proving that the prepared mix is satisfactory. In such cases, the trial
mixes may be waived.
Each set of the Works Test Cubes shall comprise six 150mm cubes
made from a single sample of concrete taken from the point of final
deposition of the set concrete under the Engineer's supervision.
Two cubes shall be tested for 7 days compressive strength while
the remaining four shall be tested after 28 days.
The sampling, making, curing and testing of Works Test Cubes shall
be carried out in accordance with BS 1881. Test results shall be
recorded on approved forms and submitted in duplicate to the
Engineer immediately following the test.
(a) The average strength of the two cubes tested at 7 days shall
be used as an indication only. If the average strength is less
than 0.75 of the characteristic strength, the Engineer may
instruct that the mix design be modified to increase the mean
strength of subsequent concrete until satisfactory evidence is
obtained of its adequacy. If the average 7-day strength is less
than 0.67 of the characteristic strength, no more concrete shall
be placed on the suspected concrete until the 28-day strength
is found to comply or unless the Engineer specifically
approves. Any additional expense and/or delay shall be borne
solely by the Contractor.
(b) Tests shall be carried out in approved laboratory. The
appropriate strength requirements are to comply with the
requirements of MS EN 206 “Concrete - Specification,
performance, production and conformity”.
(c) Tests failing to meet these requirements shall require that the
hardened concrete be tested as specified below or that a
structure test be carried out. If any single cube result is less
than 90% of the specified strength, the Engineer reserves the
right to instruct, without any further tests, that the section of
concrete represented by the cubes be removed and replaced
The consistency of the concrete shall be checked for every truck of wet
concrete delivered to Site during the placing operations by means of a
standard slump test in accordance with BS 1881. The slump shall be the
minimum to allow for efficient placing, vibration and consolidation of the
concrete and shall be agreed between the Engineer and the Contractor prior
to commencement of the Work and not altered without the approval of the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall make allowance in this tender for taking cores, testing
them and dry packing and pressure grouting the core locations. 1 to 2 cores
may be taken for every 1,000m2 area to confirm the in-situ strength.
The Engineer may instruct that tests by made on any portion of the Works for
the purpose of checking the strength of cast-in-situ concrete. If ordered, such
tests shall be performed in accordance with the recommendations of BS EN
12390.
The Contractor shall bear the costs of these tests, if they are required
because of cube test failure.
The Engineer may instruct that a load test be made on the Works or any part
thereof for any of the following reasons: -
(a) Concrete test cubes have failed to attain the specified strength.
(b) The shuttering was prematurely removed.
(c) There had been overloading during construction of the Works or part
thereof.
(d) The concrete was improperly cured.
(e) Any other circumstances attributable to alleged negligence on the part of
the Contractor which, in the opinion of the Engineer, results in the Works
or part thereof being of less than the expected strength.
(f) Any concrete subjected to fire.
If the loading test is instructed to be made solely or in part for the reason as
in (a), the test shall be made at the Contractor's own cost. If the test be
required for one or more of the reasons (b) to (f) inclusive, the Contractor
shall be reimbursed for the cost of the test if the result thereof be
satisfactory.
The Engineer may modify the above conditions for a test load if he
deems it necessary.
If water or other materials are added to the ready-mix truck mixer drum
before discharge, comply with SS EN 206. Carry out additional concrete
cube strength testing where designed mixes are used. The water added to
be recorded on the delivery ticket.
5.3 Inspection
Inspect the concrete after the specified curing period. Identify any remedial
work required and submit proposal of rectification for agreement by the
Engineer.
Provide evidence that the temperature of the concrete will not exceed 70°C and not
exceed 27.7°C for differential temperature during hydration where large sections
and/or rich mixes are being used.
SECTION 03315
PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE
INDEX TO SPECIFICATION
CLAUSE............................................................................................................................................. PAGE
This specification section is the copyright of DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. No reproduction either in part or
in whole in any manner whatsoever is allowed without written permission from DPE Consultants Sdn
Bhd.
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the Particular Specification, and all other contract documents.
This technical specification shall form part of the Contract and the Contractor shall allow for all
obligations, requirements, considerations, etc. to comply with the specification. The Contractor is
also deemed to have visited the site and fully acquainted himself as to the nature and
practicability of the works. No claims will be entertained as a result of his failure to do all of the
above.
The Consulting Civil and Structural Engineer is DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. The Contractor is to
note that when the term ‘Engineer’ in the following Specification means the representative of the
Consulting Engineer.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Engineer is referred to in the following specification,
such term shall be deemed to mean The Architect or Superintending Officer’s Representative (S.
O. Rep.) as defined in the Articles of Agreement or any other person designated in writing by the
Architect or the Superintending Officer (S.O.) from time to time to exercise the power of the
Architect or S.O.
The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Uniform Building By-
Laws of Malaysia, the Malaysian Standards and Codes of Practices, Malaysian Standards
Eurocodes current at the date of tender and to the satisfaction of the local Building Authorities
empowered to control the Works, the Specifications and drawings supplied to the Contractor and
any other instructions issued by the Engineer/Architect or their representative from time to time.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
Any reference in the Specifications to a Malaysian Standard (MS), Eurocodes (EC) or Code of
Practice (CP) shall imply the latest version at the time of tender of the applicable Standards or
Code of Practices. Should there be any discrepancy between these Specifications and the MS,
EC or CP, the more onerous requirement/s shall be adopted. The Engineer has the sole
discretion to modify or upgrade the specifications, drawings and documents to comply fully with
MS Eurocode requirements at no additional cost and time to the Contract.
1.1 Scope
This section covers requirements for the contractor’s design, supply and installation of
pre-stressed concrete elements
1.1.2 If, at any stage during the work, it is discovered that the Contractor failed to
comply with all Specifications, such work, whether completed or in progress,
shall be liable to rejection without any payment.
1.1.3 The layout and design intent of the concrete structures are shown in the
drawings. Based on the design intent, the contractor is responsible to
engage qualified and experienced personnel including a Professional
Engineer (PE) where appropriate, to carry out the following proposals for the
works to Engineer’s acceptance.
1.1.5 The contractor shall submit in the tender the pre-stressed concrete
components to be adopted at site, and the site utilization plan. The
contractor shall submit in the tender, the name(s) of the supplier(s) and
specialist.
1.1.6 The contractor shall engage qualified personnel to develop the design
drawings and produce shop drawings for the pre-stressing elements. Submit
all shop drawings for Engineer’s acceptance prior to work include the
followings:
1.1.7 Plans and elevations of each pre-stressed element showing all positions
and dimensions of all details of all cables/tendons, non-tensioned
reinforcement, type of sheathings, anchorage devices, stressing sequence
and jacking details/procedures. These shall include all trimming, local
bursting and full section depth/width end block reinforcement considered
necessary by the Contractor’s Professional Engineer (PE) for satisfactory
completion of these works.
1.1.8 The Contractor shall submit at no extra cost to the Engineer for approval, full
shop drawings details of all cables/tendons, non-tensioned reinforcement,
type of sheathings, anchorage devices, stressing sequence and jacking
details/procedures. These shall include all trimming, local bursting and full
section depth/width end block reinforcement considered necessary by the
Contractor’s Professional Engineer (PE) for satisfactory completion of these
works.
1.1.9 The shop drawings/details shall consider and show the anchors and
associated reinforcement together with all other reinforcement in
accordance with Engineer’s drawings, to avoid congestion and satisfactory
concreting in these regions. All modifications advised by the Engineer to
achieve satisfactory workmanship shall be incorporated without claims for
variations in cost or time.
1.1.10 The Contractor shall make allowance for at least 4 weeks for approval of
shop drawings by the Engineer prior to commencement of relevant work.
1.1.11 During the construction, the Contractor shall maintain such records and
perform or arrange to perform such tests as the Engineer may deem
necessary to ensure compliance with the various provisions in this
Specification.
1.1.12 The contractor shall provide all necessary temporary supports and ensure
that the load transfer during stressing of the slab to the beam and provide all
necessary precautionary measures to ensure that any part of the concrete
structures is not subjected to loads that will cause short or long-term
distress.
1.1.13 The contractor shall submit and work to a quality control plan as agreed with
the Engineer.
1.1.14 The contractor shall submit a copy of the Manufacturer’s Test Certificates
covering each coil to be used. Arrange for testing of samples, at least two
test samples representative of each batch, in accordance with the relevant
European or Singapore Standards in an approved laboratory at no cost to
the Contractor.
Read this work section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the other work
sections as follows:
1.3 Standards
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, ensure all of the Works comply
with the relevant requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or
referenced in the body of the Specification. Alternative Standards and
Codes may be proposed for approval by the Engineer, provided it can be
demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the
requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Malaysian Standards
Other Standards
Technical References
Refer to the following technical reference for guidance in carrying out the
Works:
2.1 Only specially designed concrete mixes complying with the requirements specified
hereunder shall be used for pre-stressed concrete work. Trial batches shall be made
and tested to prove the mix before construction commences.
2.2 Mix design shall be based on target average strength equal to the specified minimum
works cube strength plus twice the expected standard deviation or plus 7 N/mm2
whichever is greater. Concrete mix proportions shall be so adjusted that no
segregation shall occur with the method of handling adopted on Site. Segregation or
patches of uncompacted concrete shall be taken as incorrect mix design or improper
workmanship and shall be removed or replaced with concrete meeting this
Specification at the Contractor’s expense. Excess bleeding of the concrete shall
likewise require adjustments to the concrete mix proportions. Segregation and
bleeding shall be determined by visual inspection.
2.3 The slump for the above mixes shall generally not exceed 75mm, unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.
2.4 Other grades of concrete may be used only if approved by the Engineer.
2.5 Unless agreed by the Engineer, neither admixtures nor cements containing additives
shall be used. The use of calcium chloride in any form is prohibited.
3.1 In addition to the minimum numbers of test cubes specified in the 03300 CAST IN-
PLACE CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION Specification, the Engineer may require 150
mm cubes to be made for the purpose of determining the concrete strength at
transfer. These cubes shall be stored under the same conditions as the concrete they
represent and which has been cast in the Works.
3.2 The minimum concrete strength at transfer shall be 75% of 28 days cube strength but
no less than 30 N/mm2. A higher strength may be required by the Engineer at his sole
discretion.
4.1 The grading of the coarse and fine aggregates shall be determined at least once for
every 60 tonnes supplied to check whether the gradings are similar to those of the
samples used in the trial mixes.
4.2 Single-size aggregates shall be recombined for use if, in the opinion of the Engineer,
variations in grading of the all-in aggregates are too wide. The relative proportions of
the single-size aggregates shall be determined on the basis of trial mixes and subject
to the approval of the Engineer.
5.1 Concrete in one member or panel shall be placed in one operation continuously
without interruption. The Contractor shall provide such protective cover as and when
necessary to avoid stoppage due to sudden rain. Otherwise, concreting shall be
carried out continuously between pre-formed construction joints.
6.1 All concrete shall be fully compacted in the manner specified in the 03300 CAST IN-
PLACE CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION Specification. The Engineer may order the
Contractor to discontinue the use of any type of vibrator if, in his opinion, it is
unsuitable for use in any part of the Works.
6.2 Vibrators shall not come into direct contact with the sheathing in the case of post-
tensioned work. If the sheathing is damaged during concreting, the whole or a portion
of the concrete cast may be rejected by the Engineer. Sheathing shall be cleaned out
within half an hour of completion of each concreting operation by blowing oil free
compressed air through the length of the sheathing.
7.1 For post-tensioned work, wires or strands shall not be cut or bent within 305 mm of
the anchorages until 7 days after grouting. The tendon shall be cut back to give a
minimum of 32 mm cover after concreting of the recesses.
7.4 Concrete, conforming to the requirements of the Specification shall be cast in the
recesses to the shapes designed. Prior to concreting, the surface of anchorage
recesses shall be coated with an approved epoxy resin bonding agent.
8.1 The pre-stressing steel, wire or strand used in pre-stressing tendons shall comply with
MS EN 1992-1-1: 2010.
8.2 The material selected for use in the tendons shall have an ultimate tensile strength of
not less than 1.67 times the specified forces after losses.
8.3 A copy of the Manufacturer's Test Certificates covering each coil to be used shall be
supplied to the Engineer. If Test Certificates relating to the material cannot be
supplied, the Contractor shall arrange for testing of samples in accordance with CP
115. The cost of this testing shall be borne by the Contractor.
8.4 Even for cases where Test Certificates are supplied, the Engineer may require the
Contractor to supply one test sample representative of each batch. Testing of these
samples will be carried out at an approved laboratory at no cost to the Contract.
8.5 High tensile steel wire or high tensile steel strand shall be supplied in coils of a
sufficiently large diameter so that it will retain its physical properties and will be
reasonably straight as it unwinds from the coil.
8.6 All wires shall be cut from certified coils. The Contractor shall keep records so as to
enable identification of the wires with the coil from which they were cut. At least two
tensile strength samples shall be tested against each coil number.
8.7 The manufacture and assembly of tendons shall be performed in accordance with the
best quality of workmanship appropriate to the pre-stressing system being used.
8.8 Tendons shall be made to the required length plus an allowance, where applicable, at
each end for stressing operation.
8.10 Flame cutting of wire or strand within 76 mm of where the tendon will be gripped by
the anchorage or jacks will not be permitted. Flame cutting shall be done under the
supervision of the Engineer and care shall be taken to ensure that the flame does not
play on the anchorage or on the tendon within 25 mm of the anchorage.
8.11 A durable metal label, on which shall be stamped the length of the tendon and the coil
number of the wire or strand used, shall be tied to each tendon.
8.12 Care shall be taken that tendons are not damaged, kinked or bent, and tendons so
impaired shall not be used.
8.13 Only a thin, tightly adherent film of rust will be permitted on tendons. Tendons shall be
kept free from loose rust, oil, grease, tar, paint, mud or any other deleterious
substances.
8.14 In cleaning tendons, they shall not be brought to a smooth polished condition.
8.15 Material for tendons and assembled tendons shall be stored under a waterproof
shelter, supported above ground level and shall be protected from damage and
deterioration from exposure or any other causes.
9.1 All sheathing required in monolithic post-tensioned construction shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
9.2 Sheathing shall be of a type suitable for the pre-stressing system to be used and shall
be strong enough to withstand the placing and compaction of the concrete without
suffering damages or deformation. The sheathing and all splices shall be mortar tight.
9.3 Internal and external diameters of sheathing shall be within the limits specified in the
design or approved by the Engineer.
9.5 The manufacturer's value for the friction coefficients of the proposed sheathing shall
be stated by the Contractor.
9.7 Grout holes shall be provided at both ends of the sheathing and shall be at least 10
mm in diameter. Each of the grouting holes shall be equipped with a plug valve or
similar device capable of withstanding a pressure 1.0 N/mm2 without loss of water,
grout or air.
9.8 Additional vents with plug valves shall be provided at 10 m centres along the
sheathing for the purpose of bleeding air and water and to ensure the complete filling
of the duct with grout. A drain point with plug valve shall also be provided at the low
point of the sheathing.
10.1 Anchorage devices shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Each anchorage
device shall be capable of transmitting a force not less than the ultimate tensile
strength of the tendon without overstressing the concrete. Full section depth/width
overall end block reinforcement and any other spiral reinforcement specified by the
manufacturer as being required for this purpose is considered to be part of the
anchorage devices and shall be of the size and dimensions recommended by the
manufacturer for the pre-stressing system being used. The cost of the anchorage
devices and end block reinforcement shall be deemed to be included in the pre-
stressing system. Certificates of origin shall be provided by the Contractor for all
anchorage devices.
10.2 Damaged anchorage parts shall not be used. All steel parts shall be protected from
corrosion to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All threaded parts and fittings shall be
protected by wrappings or plugs until used.
10.3 The anchorage devices shall be kept free from dirt, mortar, loose, rust, paint, oil, or any
other deleterious matter.
11.1.2 Tendons shall be handled with care and shall be pushed or pulled through
the sheathing in such a manner as to avoid damage or contamination to
either the tendon or the sheathing.
11.1.4 Sheathing shall be fixed by methods which will not damage nor deform the
sheathing.
11.1.5 If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the sheathing is liable to be damaged or
deformed during the placing of the concrete, the Contractor shall take
additional precautions to maintain the position and shape of the sheathing at
no cost or time implication to the Contract.
11.1.6 Any temporary opening in the sheathing shall be satisfactorily plugged and
all joints between sheathing and any other part of the pre-stressing system
shall be effectively sealed to prevent the entry of mortar, dust, water or other
deleterious matter.
11.1.8 Where directed by the Engineer, the tendons shall be pulled back and forth
for at least 300 mm to ensure that the tendons are free.
11.1.9 Unless otherwise stipulated in the design, the minimum cover of concrete to
the outside surface of any sheathing shall be 50 mm for beam soffits and 40
mm elsewhere. This minimum cover shall be increased by 20 mm for
members in contact with earth or water or over salt water and by 25 mm for
members in contact with salt water
11.2 Anchorages
11.2.1 Each anchorage device shall be set square to the line of the corresponding
pre-stressing tendon and shall be positioned securely to prevent movement
during concreting.
11.2.2 The placing and securing of the anchorage shall be subject to the approval
of the Engineer.
11.2.3 The anchorage devices shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer
prior to the placing of concrete. Any mortar or concrete which adheres to
bearing or wedging surfaces shall be removed immediately.
11.2.4 Provision shall be made for covering the anchorages with lightly reinforced
concrete after completion of stressing. The minimum cover shall be 50 mm
over the anchorages and 32 mm over the reinforcement.
12.0 STRESSING
12.1.1 The pre-stressing force shall not be applied to a member until it has attained
the compressive strength stated in Clause 3.2.
13.1 Care shall be taken during stressing to ensure the safety of all personnel engaged on
the Work and of other persons in the vicinity.
13.2 Jacks shall be secured in such a manner that they will be restrained should they lose
their grip on the tendons. No person shall be permitted to stand behind the jacks or
close to the line of the tendons while tensioning is in progress.
13.3 The operation of jacks, the measurements of elongation and associated operations
shall be carried out in such a manner and from such positions that the safety of all is
ensured.
13.4 During actual stressing operations, warning signs shall be displayed at both end of
the member being tensioned.
13.5 Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, there is danger to the general public or to
property, special precautions in the form of substantial barriers will be required.
14.0 EQUIPMENT
14.1 All tensioning equipment shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use. Hydraulic
pumps shall be power driven unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. The power
unit shall be so adjusted that the rate of extension of the tendon is within the limits
specified or as directed by the Engineer.
14.2 Dynamometers and each set of equipment comprising pump, jack and pressure
gauge shall be calibrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the true force
determined from the calibration. All equipment shall be recalibrated at intervals not
exceeding 3 months. Calibration certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer at
least one week prior to jacking. Dynamometers, pressure gauges and scales shall
permit force and elongation to be determined within an accuracy of two per cent.
14.3 Pressure gauges shall only be used as a substitute for dynamometers where
approved by the Engineer. These pressure gauges shall be concentric scale gauges
complying with the requirements of the MS EN 837-1 which requires gauges to be
accurate to within one per cent of their full capacity. They shall be selected so as to
be used between 50 and 90 per cent of their full capacity and the maximum load, and
shall not be less than 200 mm in diameter. Where pressure gauges are used, a
suitable device shall be fitted so as to protect the gauge against sudden release of
pressure. Provision shall also be made by such means as a tee construction, for the
attachment of a second gauge which shall be attached and used as a check
whenever so requested by the Engineer.
15.1 The tensioning force applied to any tendon shall be determined by direct
measurement of the force and checked by measurement of the elongation of the
tendon.
15.2 The secant modulus determined from test samples or shown on test certificates shall
be used when interpreting the measurement of elongation. The design shall specify
the required values for the elongation and for the force in the tendon at the jack.
Allowance shall be made for any anticipated draw-in at the anchorage devices on
release of the jack for elastic shortening of the member and for anticipated losses due
to stressing of subsequent tendons.
16.2 Allowance shall be made for any slippage or draw-in at the anchorage devices on
release of the jacks. The final forces in each tendon, as measured by the
dynamometer shall be within an accuracy of plus or minus two per cent of the values
stipulated.
16.3 If, on completion of tensioning each tendon to the required force, the check
measurement of elongation differs from its required value by more than five per cent,
the Engineer may direct that some or all of the following steps be taken: -
16.3.4 Lubrication of tendons to reduce friction losses. Only water soluble oils shall
be used in ducted systems and these shall be washed out before grouting.
16.3.5 Where only one jack was used previously, the tendon shall be tensioned
from both ends using two jacks.
17.1 General
17.1.1 All stressing operations shall take place in the presence of the Engineer or
his representative. No member shall be stressed until the concrete has
attained the strength specified.
17.1.2 The stressing operation shall be performed only by personnel trained and
experienced in this type of work. Special care shall be taken to apply the
tensioning force smoothly and evenly.
17.1.3 The stressing operation shall be performed in accordance with the best
practice applicable to the particular system approved.
17.1.6 In the case of patented systems, all stressing shall be in accordance with
the recommendations of the patentees. However, full details of the patented
systems shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before work can
commence.
17.1.7 Unless otherwise approved for transverse pre-stress, the bars or cables in
the stiffeners shall be stressed first and for slabs, pre-stressing shall be
applied to alternate bars or cables for a span and one day shall elapse
before the remaining bars or cables are stressed. Extension and pressures
shall agree with the calculated values after due allowance for friction and
wobble effect of the ducts.
17.1.8 No member shall be left partly stressed without the permission of the
Engineer unless the design requires the member to be stressed in stages.
17.1.10 Tendon ducts shall be cleaned out by blowing oil free compressed air
through them, and anchorages shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to
commencement of tensioning. The protruding ends of tendons shall be
cleaned of any coating, such as rust, mortar, oil or mud which would loosen
the grip of wedges of anchorage devices. Tendons shall be checked before
tensioning to ensure that they are free to move inside the duct.
17.1.11 The Jacks shall be set accurately in the line of the tendons.
17.1.12 The force which is applied initially to take up the slack of the tendon, shall
be sufficient to seat the jack firmly but shall not exceed the amount normally
associated with the particular method of pre-stressing. For multi strand
systems, all strands must be stressed together. After taking up the slack, the
tendon shall, where possible, be accurately marked at both ends and
elongations or draw-in measured from these markings. When requested by
the Engineer, readings of force and elongation shall be taken at stages
during the tensioning of a tendon and plotted to determine the zero error in
measuring elongation. Where tendons consist of a number of individual
components, each component shall be marked so that any slip may be
observed.
17.1.14 In the case of a tendon breaking or slipping after tensioning, the tendon
shall be released, replaced and re-stressed. Under no circumstances shall
maximum jacking force exceed the rated capacity of the jacking equipment
used, or 80 per cent of the specified minimum ultimate strength of the
tendon whichever is the lesser.
17.2.1 Complete stressing records shall be kept of pressure gauge readings and
strand extensions for each strand of every cable. A daily return shall be
submitted to the Engineer for record.
18.0 GROUTING
18.1 General
18.2 Materials
Grout for filling pre-stressing ducts shall be composed of cement, water and additive to
reduce shrinkage and bleeding. The water cement ratio shall be as low as possible,
consistent with adequate workability but shall not exceed 0.45 unless approved by the
Engineer. The materials and the proportions of the grout mixture shall be to the
approval of the Engineer.
18.3.2 The grout shall be sufficiently fluid and of a uniformly colloidal consistency to
enable the cable ducts to be grouted using a maximum pressure of 0.52
N/mm2. All grout shall pass through a screen of 1.7 mm maximum clear
opening prior to being introduced into the group.
18.3.3 The bleeding of the grout shall not exceed 2% of the volume at three hours
after mixing and shall not exceed 4% of the volume at any time. All
separated water shall be absorbed within 24 hours. Bleeding shall be
measured in metal or glass cylinder with an internal diameter of
approximately 100 mm. During the test, the container shall be covered to
prevent evaporation.
18.4.1 Mixing and pumping equipment shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer. Grout shall be mixed in a high speed mechanical mixer, for at
least two minutes until a uniform colloidal consistency is produced. Mixing
by hand will not be permitted.
18.4.2 Water shall be added to the mixer first, then the cement shall be added
gradually and the grout stirred continuously until pumped into the duct. The
hoppers to the pumps shall be fitted with BS 14 Sieve strainers. Grout shall
not be used later than one hour to one and a half hour after the addition of
cement to the mix.
18.4.3 Pumps shall be capable of continuous operation with little pressure variation
and shall have a system for re-circulating the grout whilst actual grouting is
not in progress. Pumps shall be fitted with a pressure gauge and shall be
capable of delivery at pressures up to 1 N/mm2.
18.4.4 All equipment, especially piping, shall be thoroughly washed with clean
water after each series of operations and more frequently, if necessary.
18.5.1 The ducts shall be flushed with water before injecting grout. After flushing,
the surplus water shall be removed by oil-free compressed air or other
approved means.
18.5.2 Grout shall then be injected into each duct at a speed of between 30 mm
and 60 mm per second. A continuous steady flow of grout shall be
maintained until the duct is completely filled and pure grout issues from all
vents and from the far end and until all entrapped air has been expelled.
The vents shall be progressively closed as required to ensure the complete
filling of the duct. The grout pressure shall then be held at 0.69 N/mm2 for at
least one minute after which the grouting vent shall be plugged. All vents
and ends shall be kept closed until final setting of the grout has taken place.
Where directed by the Engineer, duct openings shall be inspected two or
three days after grouting and topped up if necessary.
18.5.3 If serious leaks occur, the grouting shall be stopped, the duct flushed clean
with water and the leakage plugged before continuing with grouting.
18.5.4 If a blockage occurs, pumping may be transferred quickly to the far end of
the duct if there are sufficient vents to ensure that the ducts will be filled with
grout. Alternatively, ducts may be flushed with clean water to clear the
blockage. The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete filling of the
ducts with grout. If several blockages occur, the grout mix may be rejected
and a new mix designed.
18.5.5 On completion of grouting and after the grout has hardened sufficiently, any
vents or grouting tubes which extend to the surfaces of the concrete shall be
cut off 25 mm below the concrete surface and the recess plugged with
approved non-shrink grout.
Complete records shall be kept on all grouting of cable ducts and a copy of the
records submitted to the Engineer.
19.0 TOLERANCES
Tolerances for pre-stressed concrete shall follow the tolerances specified under the 03300 CAST
IN-PLACE CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION Specification.
20.1 Props removal shall be in accordance with 03300 CAST IN-PLACE CONCRETE
CONSTRUCTION Specification except: -
20.2 All props to pre-stressed beams and slabs shall be of adjustable heights. These shall
be adjusted to support the members following each stressing operation, if required,
for back-propping for casting of the floors above.
SECTION 03410
PRECAST CONCRETE WORKS
INDEX TO SPECIFICATION
CLAUSE PAGE
This specification section is the copyright of DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. No reproduction either in part or
in whole in any manner whatsoever is allowed without written permission from DPE Consultants Sdn
Bhd.
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the Particular Specification, and all other contract documents.
This technical specification shall form part of the Contract and the Contractor shall allow for all
obligations, requirements, considerations, etc. to comply with the specification. The Contractor is
also deemed to have visited the site and fully acquainted himself as to the nature and
practicability of the works. No claims will be entertained as a result of his failure to do all of the
above.
The Consulting Civil and Structural Engineer is DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. The Contractor is to
note that when the term ‘Engineer’ in the following Specification means the representative of the
Consulting Engineer.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Engineer is referred to in the following specification,
such term shall be deemed to mean The Architect or Superintending Officer’s Representative (S.
O. Rep.) as defined in the Articles of Agreement or any other person designated in writing by the
Architect or the Superintending Officer (S.O.) from time to time to exercise the power of the
Architect or S.O.
The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Uniform Building By-
Laws of Malaysia, the Malaysian Standards and Codes of Practices, Malaysian Standards
Eurocodes current at the date of tender and to the satisfaction of the local Building Authorities
empowered to control the Works, the Specifications and drawings supplied to the Contractor and
any other instructions issued by the Engineer/Architect or their representative from time to time.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
Any reference in the Specifications to a Malaysian Standard (MS), Eurocodes (EC) or Code of
Practice (CP) shall imply the latest version at the time of tender of the applicable Standards or
Code of Practices. Should there be any discrepancy between these Specifications and the MS,
EC or CP, the more onerous requirement/s shall be adopted. The Engineer has the sole
discretion to modify or upgrade the specifications, drawings and documents to comply fully with
MS Eurocode requirements at no additional cost and time to the Contract.
1.1 Scope
This section covers requirements for the contractor’s design, fabrication, handling,
storage, transportation and erection of structural precast concrete elements, including
elements used in composite structures.
Read this section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the following work
sections:
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, ensure all of the Works comply
with the relevant requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or
referenced in the body of the Specification. Alternative Standards and
Codes may be proposed for approval by the Engineer, provided it can be
demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the
requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Malaysian Standards
The layout and design intent of the concrete structures are shown in the
drawings. Based on the design intent, engage qualified and experienced
personnel including a Professional Engineer (PE) where appropriate, to
carry out the following proposals for the works to Engineer’s acceptance.
Submit in the tender, the name(s) of the supplier(s), location of plants and
quantities to be supplied by each supplier, if any precast component is
obtained from the suppliers. Change of the supplier(s) is not permitted
without the Engineer’s consent.
Design all mould and formwork for the fabrication of the precast
elements including all accessories for the lifting, handling and
storage of the elements.
(a) Plans and elevations of each precast element showing all positions and
dimensions of all cast-in items, openings, service ducts and pipes, and
lifting/erection inserts to be incorporated.
(b) Sections and details indicating sizes, numbers and positions of all
Submit and work to a quality control plan as agreed with the Engineer.
In carrying out the design and proposals in clause 1.4.1, account for the input
requirements as set out below.
Design and detail the elements for all stresses induced by the worst loads,
movement, creep and shrinkage during the intended design life.
The elements and their inserts or fixings are to be capable of resisting all
stresses induced during the processes of manufacturing, lifting/handling,
demoulding, transportation, storage and erection.
Design the joints and connections to transmit all forces developed at the
joints of structures.
In the case of water retaining structure, design the elements for maximum
crack width of 0.2 mm, or otherwise in accordance with SS EN 1992-3, for
durability and low permeability against water seepage.
2.2 Erection
Erect the precast concrete elements at the designated location in accordance with the
design intention. Any deviation is to be within the acceptable tolerance limit as
specified in clause 4.3.3 below.
Fabrication and erect the elements in such manner that the joints are in accordance
with the design and detail. Any deviation in the joint width is to be within the
acceptable tolerance such that it will not affect the effectiveness of the joint’s
resistance against the forces developed as well as its protection against water,
weather, corrosion and fire where applicable.
Connection details are to be compatible with the design assumptions for the precast
concrete structure. Materials used for connections are to be robust and compatible
with the durability requirements of the overall structure. Avoid harmful bi-metallic
contacts, which may result in galvanic corrosion.
3.0 MATERIALS
3.1 Moulds
Ensure that all moulds, regardless of materials, conform to the shape, lines and
dimensions of the precast concrete elements to be fabricated.
Design the moulds to prevent damage to the concrete from the following at all stages,
during concreting, curing and demoulding:
Use rubber lining with sufficient rigidity and consistency to allow repeated use for
achieving a consistent quality of patterned finish.
Use high quality rubber mat to Engineer’s acceptance for carrying the tiles of precast
concrete elements with tile finish.
3.2 Concrete
3.3 Reinforcement
Design to MS EN 1992-1-1 and restrict the tensile stress in the slabs to -2.0N/mm2 at
transfer stage and -3.0N/mm2 at final stage.
Use low relaxation strand prestressing steel and conform to relevant Eurocodes and
Singapore Standards. The prestressing steel, wire or strand used in prestressing
tendons shall comply with MS EN 1992-1-1 or BS 5896 as appropriate. Provide
minimum 40mm concrete cover to prestress stands.
Submit a copy of the Manufacturer’s Test Certificates covering each coil to be used.
Arrange for testing of samples, at least two test samples representative of each batch,
in accordance with the relevant British Standards in an approved laboratory at no cost
to the Contractor.
Provide bearing neoprene strips (6mm thick) for proper seating of precast
slabs/beams onto beams/columns or other supporting members. The bearing pad
shall be capable of supporting compressive stress of 20 N/mm2 without cracking,
splitting or delaminating.
For precast prestressed slab, conduct load tests in accordance with the latest MS EN
1992-1-1 on selected samples. One working load test and one ultimate load test shall
be carried out for each type of precast slab.
The grout is to be able to minimise stress induced arising from shrinkage, which
cause crack along the interface between the grout and the precast concrete elements.
3.7 Mortar
Determine the quantity of water required to achieve a mix suitable for jointing details
shown on the drawings. Do not add other ingredients without the Engineer’s
acceptance.
3.9 Waterproofing
3.9.1 Sealant
3.10 Jointing
3.10.1 General
3.10.3 Welding
The use of membranes and admixtures for grout, mortar or concrete with
backer rods for improving water and weather tightness must be approved
before use. All sealant materials used at public accessible areas such as
access balcony, stair-cases, stair-landings etc. shall be protected.
4.1 Fabrication
4.1.1 Moulds
4.1.2 Reinforcement
4.1.2.1 General
ensure that the specified cover and required fit within the mould are
achieved.
4.1.3 Concreting
Cast all precast concrete components under control conditions with the
strictest supervisory and quality control acceptable to the Engineer. Submit
the technical specifications and quality control plans for manufacture of
precast concrete units at the factory/on site for acceptance.
The total content of the concrete from the aggregate, water and any
admixtures is not to exceed 0.1% of the weight of the cement.
4.1.5.2 Timing
Commence steam curing after the concrete attains its initial set.
Prevent surface drying by means of a coating of membrane curing
compound or otherwise agreed with the Engineer during the period
between placement of concrete and application of steam.
4.1.5.3 Temperature
4.1.6 Finishes
4.1.7 Demoulding
For elements cast under factory conditions determine the minimum period
before removing the formwork/mould on the basis of the assessed
compressive strength of the component. The concrete strength at
demoulding is to be minimum 10 N/mm² or higher if required by design.
Before fabrication ensure that allowance has been made for all construction
tolerances to ensure proper final fit-up of the structure.
(a) Dimensions
(b) Lifting Points/ Inserts
(c) Block outs
(d) Sleeve systems
(e) Cast-in steel items
(f) Bolted/welded connections
Evaluate any deviation from the agreed values and submit proposals for any
necessary remedial work to the Engineer for acceptance.
4.1.9 Lifting/handling
Do not lift any component from the mould on which it was cast, before the
concrete has attained its design demoulding strength.
Determine the need for any additional reinforcement and inserts or fixings
that may be necessary for lifting or handling the elements until they are
incorporated into the structure.
Handle and transport the precast concrete elements taking into account
their shapes and design to avoid excessive stresses or damages in the
elements. Place paddings at the contact points between the tie down rope
and the precast concrete elements.
Lift the precast concrete elements only at appropriate points shown in the
fabrication/ erection shop drawings. A minimum safety factor of 3 shall be
used to design the lifting devices.
Make provisions for any temporary supports and make good any inserts or
fixings, holes, etc. used for lifting or handling or temporary bracing/supports.
Carry out minor repair of chipping and spalling in the factory unless
otherwise agreed by the Engineer. Do not attempt major repair until the
proposed methods for the repair have been accepted by the Engineer.
4.1.11 Marking
Clearly mark each item before delivery in accordance with the drawing to
indicate its weight, location and orientation in the structure so as to facilitate
correct delivery and erection. All marks are not to be easily removed.
Position all marks at the concrete surface that can be easily viewed.
4.2 Storage
Ensure that large enough storage spaces are provided for the elements with
adequate room for lifting equipment and delivery truck to manoeuvre. Store the
elements on firm supports clear of the ground.
Ensure that the ground is clean, hard, level and well drained to prevent warp, bowing,
chipping, cracking, discoloration, staining or soiling of the precast concrete elements.
Provide the Engineer with proposals for storage. Issue storage instructions for all
precast concrete elements, defining the storage position, the allowable support points,
the maximum height of any stack and any protective measures required.
4.3 Erection
Inspect all precast concrete elements before and after erection with
particular regard to the following:
(a) Soiling
(b) Cracking
(c) Chipping
(d) Damage to built-in items
(e) Tolerances
(f) Accuracy of location of bearing surfaces, anchorages and connections
Check the number, type and size of rebars at the connections before
erection to prevent cutting of starter bars.
4.3.2 Erection
Ensure that any precast concrete items to be incorporated into the structure
are kept stable in the erected position until the items can safely carry the
construction loads without distress.
Submit the erection techniques, PE’s structural calculations and details for
precast concrete units including structural calculations and details for the
lifting and erection devices.
Evaluate any deviation from the agreed values and submit proposals for any
necessary remedial work to the Engineer for acceptance.
4.4.1 Falsework
Provide suitable falsework support and temporary bracings for the erected
precast concrete elements in accordance with the contractor’s PE design.
Refer to Section 03100 FORMWORK AND FALSEWORK, clause 4.0 for
general requirement of the falsework.
Comply with the following tolerance values from CONQUAS for the
alignment, plumb and level of joint formwork:
Thoroughly remove loose materials, clean all dust, dirt and grease and wet
surfaces of the precast concrete elements prior to concreting. Place and
compact concrete in accordance with Section 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION, clause 4.0. Maintain support to elements
to prevent elements from moving until the concrete has gained sufficient
strength to ensure stability.
Provide non-shrink grout or mortar bedding fully to the load bearing joints
and connections.
Carry out tests in the mix design in accordance with appropriate code or,
proprietary requirements. Refer to Section 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION, clause 4.0.
Ensure joints and joint sealants of precast concrete structures are correctly
installed, so as to provide continued water and weather tightness of
buildings without maintenance. The use of membranes and admixtures for
grout, mortar or concrete with backer rods for improving water and weather
tightness must be approved before use. All sealant materials used at public
accessible areas such as access balcony, stair-cases, stair-landings etc.
shall be protected.
Before sealing the joints, clean and free concrete surface to sound and
smooth from all mortar dust or other contaminants that may affect adhesion.
Prepare and install the joints surface, primers, sealant compounds and
backup materials to give the highest standard of materials and
workmanship. These should conform to all applicable specifications.
Clean and remove all compound smears, primers, solvents etc. used in
caulking and sealing works immediately from adjacent materials as the work
progresses.
Test all joints of the floor slabs with concrete topping for water tightness
after all pipes, trunking, etc. install, and penetrations are sealed to the
Engineer’s acceptance. Submit the method of testing to ensure such
requirement for acceptance. The test is deemed to have failed if any
seepage or dampness occurs at the soffit of the slab during the test or
within a period of 48 hours. Carry out joints rectification and to repeat the
test if test is unsatisfactorily.
5.1 Submissions
5.1.3.4 Mould
5.1.3.5 Lifting/Handling
5.1.3.6 Storage
5.1.3.7 Transportation
5.1.3.8 Erection
5.1.3.9 Connections
(a) Details
(b) Preparation
(c) Grouting
(d) Grout mix design
(e) Temporary shims
5.1.3.10 Repairs
5.1.3.11 Finishes
At the end of the project submit a maintenance / replacement manual for all
components and connections to be carried out by the building owners.
Inspect all precast concrete elements before they leave the factory with particular
regard to the following:
(a) Cracking
(b) Chipping
(c) Tolerances
(d) Accuracy of location of inserts or fixings
In the case of precast concrete elements cast on site, inspect the elements before
transferring the elements to storage or erection.
Repair minor defects in accordance with the method in clause 6.6 of SS CP 81.
Submit the results of the inspection for Engineer’s acceptance. Ensure that no
defective precast concrete elements are delivered for erection.
5.4 Records
Keep casting records for all elements and allow for Engineer’s inspection.
Include the following information:
Engage PE for the supervision and inspection for the precast production,
and keep all inspection record.
5.5 Tests
Refer to all related work sections in clause 1.2 above for test requirements
to verify compliance of the quality of at least the following materials:
(a) Concrete
(b) Grout and mortar
(c) Reinforcements
(d) Prestressing components
(e) Structural steelwork and connections
(f) Steel work protections
(g) Sealants
(h) Waterproofing
Submit all test results to the Engineer as soon as they are available. Submit
also the certificates from the supplier of any proprietary products used in the
works demonstrating compliance with the specified requirements.
Conduct water tightness test for the joints of the precast concrete elements
as per the following, unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer:
(a) For floor, flood the floor with 25mm depth of water at the highest point.
Test all floor joints before waterproofing for not lesser than 48 hours.
The test is deemed to have passed if there is no water seepage or
dampness observed at the face behind the face subject to the water
test.
(b) For external wall, spray with a continuous water jet corresponding to
600 litres per hour from a water hose with a nozzle velocity of 2 m per
second and a cone scatter of approximately 60 degree. Hold the hose
at 30 degree to the horizontal plane and at 1.2 m away from the wall
surface. Place the hose with the nozzle in line with the vertical joint and
at a level of horizontal joints so that the jet cone scatter will cover the
vertical and horizontal joints. Test all external facing joints not lesser
than 60min. The test is deemed to have passed if there is no water
seepage or dampness observed at the face behind the face subject to
the water test.
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
INDEX TO SPECIFICATION
CLAUSE PAGE
1.0 GENERAL 1
1.1 Scope ......................................................................................................................................1
1.2 Related Sections.....................................................................................................................1
1.3 Standards and Technical Reference ......................................................................................1
1.4 Trade Preambles ....................................................................................................................7
1.5 Definitions ............................................................................................................................ 10
3.0 MATERIALS 12
3.1 Steel Sections/Elements ...................................................................................................... 12
3.2 Welding Consumables ......................................................................................................... 14
3.3 Fasteners ............................................................................................................................. 14
3.4 Profiled Steel Decking ......................................................................................................... 15
3.5 Protective Finishes .............................................................................................................. 15
3.6 Grout .................................................................................................................................... 17
This specification section is the copyright of DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. No reproduction either in part or
in whole in any manner whatsoever is allowed without written permission from DPE Consultants Sdn
Bhd.
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the Particular Specification, and all other contract documents.
This technical specification shall form part of the Contract and the Contractor shall allow for all
obligations, requirements, considerations, etc. to comply with the specification. The Contractor is
also deemed to have visited the site and fully acquainted himself as to the nature and
practicability of the works. No claims will be entertained as a result of his failure to do all of the
above.
The Consulting Civil and Structural Engineer is DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. The Contractor is to
note that when the term ‘Engineer’ in the following Specification means the representative of the
Consulting Engineer.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Engineer is referred to in the following specification,
such term shall be deemed to mean The Architect or Superintending Officer’s Representative (S.
O. Rep.) as defined in the Articles of Agreement or any other person designated in writing by the
Architect or the Superintending Officer (S.O.) from time to time to exercise the power of the
Architect or S.O.
The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Uniform Building By-
Laws of Malaysia, the Malaysian Standards and Codes of Practices, Malaysian Standards
Eurocodes current at the date of tender and to the satisfaction of the local Building Authorities
empowered to control the Works, the Specifications and drawings supplied to the Contractor and
any other instructions issued by the Engineer/Architect or their representative from time to time.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
Any reference in the Specifications to a Malaysian Standard (MS), Eurocodes (EC) or Code of
Practice (CP) shall imply the latest version at the time of tender of the applicable Standards or
Code of Practices. Should there be any discrepancy between these Specifications and the MS,
EC or CP, the more onerous requirement/s shall be adopted. The Engineer has the sole
discretion to modify or upgrade the specifications, drawings and documents to comply fully with
MS Eurocode requirements at no additional cost and time to the Contract.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the fabrication and erection of normal
structural steelwork in buildings. It does not cover the use of stainless steel in special
structures.
No items.
1.3.1 Standard
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, ensure all of the Works comply
with the relevant requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or
referenced in the body of the Specification. Alternative Standards and
Codes may be proposed for approval by the Engineer, provided it can be
demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the
Malaysian Standards
Other Standards
construction.
When carrying out the works, take guidance from the following technical
reference:
The structural steelwork layout and design are shown in the drawings.
1.4.3 Qualifications
1.4.3.2 Supervisors
Submit and work to a quality control plan as agreed with the Engineer.
Appoint an independent Inspection and Testing Agency (ITA) who will carry
out all the inspections and non-destructive testing specified herein. The cost
of providing the inspection services, NDT and quality control to be
undertaken by the appointed Inspection Agency shall be deemed included
in the contract.
In either of the above cases, make available to the ITA the following:
1.4.8 Warranty
For the sprayed-on fireproofing, warrant that the materials will not flake,
dust, delaminate or erode.
1.4.9 Safety
1.5 Definitions
(a) Design Drawings Drawings showing the dimensioned layout of the steel
structure with the size and material grades of all
members, the forces to be developed in their
connections and any cambers etc, from which shop
drawings are made.
When carrying out design as described in Clause 1.4, ensure the design conforms to
the requirements of MS EN 1993-1-1 or other design codes as indicated in the
Contract.
Ensure that the steelwork is adequately braced or restrained to withstand all loadings
liable to be encountered during construction without inducing excessive stresses,
deflections or distortion in the structure.
When carrying out the proposal for the protective system in Clause 1.4,
account for the following performance requirements:
2.3.1.1 Durability
3.0 MATERIALS
Dimensions
Tolerances
ing steels
Non-alloy
Weather-
steels
steels
steels
grain
Q&T
Fine
BS EN
Universal Beams & Columns BS 4 -1
10034
BS EN
Joists BS 4 -1
10024
BS EN
Channels BS 4 -1
10279
BS EN BS EN
Angles
c”
b”
10056-1 10056-2
BS EN 10137-2 “
BS EN 10113
BS EN 10155
BS EN 10025 “
BS EN BS EN
Rolled Tees
10055 10055
BS EN
Split Tees BS 4 - 1
10034
Plates BS EN
-
(Reversing Mill) 10029
Plates BS EN
-
(Cut from Coil) 10051
EURO-
Wide Flats - NORM
91
Hollow Sections (Hot-Finished)
“e” BS EN 10210-1 - BS 7668 BS EN 10210-2
Turnbuckles BS 4429
a. Product without specified maximum manganese content or are not supplier with carbon equivalent value (CEV)
options. Additional requirement may therefore need to be specified, eg option 5 or 6 of BS EN 10025
b. Grade S275 and S355 only. If the steel is to incorporate welded connection “option 5” must be ordered.
c. Only Plate and Wide Flats – Grade 460
d. See manufacturers’ information for rolled asymmetric beams and S235 Cold Formed Hollow Sections
e. All Hollow Sections are to be Hot Finished to BS EN 10210-1, unless otherwise specified on drawings.
All steel elements are to have the manufacturer’s mill test certificates
indicating compliance with the specified codes.
For hot rolled plates and wide flats, if there are surface
imperfections and defects as classified in BS EN 10163-2 Clause 4
(Requirements) revealed during surface preparation, rectify the
surface in accordance to BS EN 10163-2 Clause 5 (Repair
Procedures).
For hot rolled hollow sections, rectify the surface imperfections and
defects revealed during surface preparation in accordance to BS EN
10210-1 Clause 6.8 (Surface Condition).
Welding consumables for metal arc welding are to comply with ANSI/AWS D1.1
Clause 5.3 (Welding Consumables and Electrode Requirements).
Ensure compatibility between welding consumables and parent materials used for the
steelwork.
3.3 Fasteners
Ordinary bolts (full and part threaded length) are to comply with BS 4190 for
all grades.
Ordinary nuts are to comply with BS 4190 (grade 4 for grade 4.6, 8 for 8.8
and 10 for 10.9).
For galvanised or sherardised bolts use class 10 nuts for 8.8 bolts and class
12 nuts for 10.9 bolts.
3.3.2.1 Bolts
Comply with BS 4933 for grade 4.6 (cup headed bolts and 90°
countersunk head bolts).
3.3.2.2 Nuts
3.3.2.3 Washers
3.3.5.1 Bolts
3.3.5.2 Nuts
3.3.5.3 Washers
3.5.4.3 Sealants
3.6 Grout
Grout around anchor bolts under base plates and between steel plates and concrete
surface is to have a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of 40 N/mm2.
4.1 General
4.1.1 Traceability
4.1.2 Marking
Mark all pieces so that they can be identified at all stages of fabrication.
Hard stamping may be used other than where specified in the Architectural
Drawings as exposed steel structures.
4.1.3.1 General
Mark or label all products and store them in such a way that identification of
product and batch numbers is available at all times.
Where two or more coats of the same product are to be applied, use a
different colour for alternate coats in order to provide visual indication of the
stage reached or progress of the coating work.
Owner may also, at his own discretion, engage an independent testing and inspection
agency to randomly inspect paints, high-strength bolted connections and welded
connections and to perform tests and prepare test reports.
Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests, state in each report whether test
specimens comply with requirements, and specifically state any deviations therefrom.
Provide access for testing agency to places where structural steel work is being
fabricated or produced so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished.
Correct deficiencies in structural steel work that inspections and laboratory test
reports have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional
tests, at Contractor's expense, as necessary to reconfirm any non-compliance of
original work and to show compliance of corrected work.
a) Verify that gaps of installed Direct Tension Indicators are less than gaps
specified in ASTM F 959, Table 2.
Submit for approval by the Engineer details of the proposed quality control
system and personnel to be used during shop and field welding work.
Ensure the competent personnel and certified by an acceptable to the
engineer organization, to carry out and record compliance with approved
procedures by qualified welders and visual inspection of welds and to carry
out and record dimensional checks.
All of the above shall be carried out in accordance with the AWS
D1.1 Standard.
All Class "B" field welds shall be subjected to NDT, the testing
method to be specified by the Engineer.
4.2.5.3 Documentation
4.2.5.4 Verification
Weld Classes
(a) Class A
(b) Class B
Prepare and comply with proper storage and handling procedures in approved
method statement to ensure achievement of the desired quality and to minimise
damage to the steelwork.
Protect all open ends of Tubular members at all times from the ingress of water or
deleterious materials.
4.3.2 Storage
Adequately support steel clear of the ground. Keep clean and do not allow
water to accumulate on components. Protect steel against corrosion.
Ensure individual piece markings are visible when members are stacked.
4.3.3 Handling
Plan and carry out bundling, packing, handling and transport in a manner
designed to prevent permanent distortion to the steelwork and minimise
damage to any protective coating.
Store and protect welding consumables that have been removed from the
original package so that the welding properties are not affected.
4.4 Fabrication
Ensure properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for
delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.
Open ends of tubular members at all times shall be securely protected from the
ingress of water or dust or deleterious materials.
4.4.1 Cutting
Thermal cutting are not permitted at the areas indicated in the Architectural
Drawings as exposed steel structures.
4.4.2 Holing
4.4.2.1 Forming
Drill, punch, plasma or laser cut and thermal or flame cut round
holes perpendicular to metal surfaces for fasteners.
4.4.2.2 Matching
Ensure all matching holes are formed such that fasteners can be
inserted freely through the assembled members at right angles to
the contact faces.
Tightly clamp the separate parts before drilling and remove any
burrs after separating the parts.
4.4.3 Dressing
4.4.4.1 Heating
4.4.4.2 Inspection
After the process is complete, visually inspect all welds within the
area of curving or straightening. Carry out non-destructive testing of
welds, where directed.
4.5 Bolting
(a) For bolts ≤ 24mm diameter, hole sizes are to be bolt diameter
+2mm.
(b) For bolts > 24mm diameter, hole sizes are to be bolt diameter
+3mm.
The length of bolt is to be such that at least one clear thread shows
above the nut after tightening, and at least one thread plus the
thread run out is clear between the nut and the unthreaded shank of
the bolt.
4.5.2.5 Washers
Use at least one washer placed under the nut or bolt head being
rotated in each bolt assembly where the rotation might damage the
surface protective treatment on the members being connected. Use
a plate or heavy duty washer under the head and nut where the
members being connected have oversize or slotted holes.
4.5.2.8 Tightening
4.5.2.11 Reaming
Reaming may be used where the connection design allows the use
of larger diameter holes and bolts in cases where drifting would
distort the steelwork.
Place the hardened washer under the nut or head being turned.
4.5.3.2 Tightening
4.5.3.6 Reaming
Reaming may be used where the connection design allows the use
of larger bolts in cases where drifting would distort the steelwork.
Remove all mill-scale from the faying surfaces of friction grip joints.
Ensure the faying surfaces of friction grip joints are free of distortion,
deformities or contaminants, which may reduce the slip factor below
the design value.
Where slotted holes are provided for movement connections ensure the
joint is free to move.
Seal bolt holes and vent holes in hollow sections to prevent the ingress of
moisture.
If not specified on the design drawings, show the proposed method on the
shop drawings.
4.6 Welding
Processes for Shielded metal arc welding (SMAW), submerged arc welding
(SAW), gas metal arc welding (GMAW) except GMAW-S, short circuiting
transfer and flux cored arc welding (FCAW) which conform to all of the
requirements of ANSI/AWS D1.1 Section 3 are deemed as pre-qualified and
accepted for use without performing the Welding Procedure Specifications
(WPS) Qualification Tests.
4.6.3.1 Preparation
Submit all inspection and test plans for Engineer’s acceptance prior
to carrying out welding works.
4.6.4 Assembly
4.6.4.1 Fit-up
Tack welds are subject to the same quality requirements as the final
welds, with the following exceptions:
Remove tack welds, which are not incorporated into the final weld,
unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
4.6.5.1 Method
The trial is to use the materials and procedures proposed for the
works. Test a minimum of ten studs in the trial.
Visually inspect all studs. They are to exhibit full 360 degree ‘flash’
with no evidence of undercut into the stud base.
Test at least 5% of studs and not less than two per beam.
Bend the head of the stud by striking the head of the stud to an
angle of approximately 30° from their original axis with a hammer.
Under this test the weld is to show no visible signs of cracking or
lack of fusion.
4.7.1.4 Straightness
4.7.1.5 Camber
4.7.1.6 Length
4.7.2.5 Flatness
4.7.3.1 Depth
4.7.3.5 Flanges
4.7.3.6 Length
4.7.3.13 Squareness
4.7.3.17 Length
Δ= 3mm
4.8 Erection
4.8.1 General
Adopt an erection procedure such that all members can be placed and fixed
in position without distortion.
Accept responsibility for the Safety and Stability of the Steelwork during
erection and until such time as it is finally completed and handed over, must
take all precautions including temporary bracings necessary to ensure
stability of partially assembled structure against wind forces, and those
stresses exerted due to erection equipment and its operation tending to
distort or deform the framework.
Accept responsible for the Inspection and Testing of all Temporary works.
Prepare and submit the inspection procedure / check lists for Engineer’s
acceptance.
Any temporary supports used may be removed after the structure has been
lined, levelled and plumbed, provided sufficient components have been
erected and secured to ensure the overall structure remains stable under
the worst anticipated conditions of loading.
All Temporary cleats for lifting, site welding, site fit-ups etc., shall be
removed, ground flush and Non-Destructive tested when permanent
members are in place and final connections are made.
Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and
adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces, faying surfaces and other
surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform
necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and
alignment.
4.8.6 Alignment
Align each part of the structure as soon as practicable after erection. Do not
make permanent connections between members until the structure has
been sufficiently aligned, levelled, plumbed and temporarily connected so
that members will not be displaced during subsequent erection or alignment
of the remainder of the structure.
Carry out site welding only by agreement with the Engineer or as shown on
the design drawings.
Carry out all site welding in accordance with clause 4.5(Welding) above.
Do not carry out site welding in inclement weather unless adequate weather
protection is provided for welders and materials.
Plumb and level columns using steel packs and wedges of adequate
strength and stiffness, and not larger than necessary for the purpose.
4.8.12 Grouting
Do not carry out grouting under column base plates until a sufficient portion
of the structure has been aligned, levelled, plumbed and adequately braced.
Immediately before grouting, clean the space under the column base plates
to be free of all extraneous matter.
Where components and fixings are cast in by others ensure that they are
also within the anticipated PDs before commencing steel erection.
Inspect for position and level in good time before the planned start of
steelwork erection.
In the event of any discrepancies found, notify the Engineer, propose and
correct the discrepancies.
4.9.2.3 Bolts or Bolt Groups Cast into Walls (No Allowance for
Adjustment)
PD on length or width = 20mm for L < 30m and [20 + 0.25 (L-30)]
mm for L ≥ 30m, where L is the specified overall dimension in
metres.
Inform the Engineer as soon as possible if checks show that the deviation in
position of the steelwork as erected exceeds the PDs given above. Propose
and carry out remedial measures as required.
4.10.1 General
All Steelworks shall be provided with a Protective Coating system with a 20-
year minimum Design Life for the performance and Colour Chalk and Fade
out. The Coatings are to be provided over the full surface area of Steelwork.
Shop paint the structural steel in accordance with BS EN 1997-1:2004 (BS
EN ISO 12944-1:1998, BS EN ISO 14713:1999), except those members or
portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint
embedded steel that is partially exposed on exposed portions and initial 2
inches of embedded areas only.
For corrosion protective system, carry out surface preparation as below. For fire
protection system, carry out in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.
Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits.
Clean the steel of dirt, grease and other contaminants.
Measure the surface profile of the steelwork to be coated using the methods
in BS 7079 Group C.
Rectify all defects exposed during surface preparation using the methods
given in BS 7079 Group C.
Blast-clean all areas and welds prior to applying the full coating.
Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint. The
protective coatings are to be as outlined below for normal internal and external
applications. For more aggressive environments, higher performance Marine Paint
systems are to be used:
All damages to the Coating System while transportation, handling and erection shall
be repaired by abrading the damaged surfaces to SSPC-SP3 and recoating with the
following paint system:
a) Primer – Surface Tolerant Epoxy Primer 80 micron minimum dry film thickness,
conventionally sprayed.
b) Barrier Coat & Finish Coat – Same as Clause 4.12.
All locations shall be Spot Blasted to SA 2½ specification and Coated with the
following Paint system:
a) Primer – Surface Tolerant Epoxy Primer 80 micron minimum dry film thickness,
conventionally sprayed.
b) Barrier Coat & Finish Coat – Same as Clause 4.12.
All steelworks, holding down bolts, embedded plates, shear keys etc., cast in concrete
have to be hot dip galvanized to a minimum DFT of 100 microns for both interior and
exterior.
All purlins shall be hot-dip coating composed of essentially 50% - 60% aluminium with
the remainder zinc but incorporating minor additions of control elements (with a
chromate passivation treatment in conjuction with a thin clear organic coating, not
oiled) to a minimum coating mass of 600 g/m2 on both sides or DFT of 85 microns.
4.15.1 Procedures
Ensure the Steelwork does not distort as a result of Galvanising. The size of
components, preheating requirements, and dipping method are to be
reviewed to achieve minimal distortion and Maintain Steelwork Tolerances.
4.15.5.2 Barrier
4.15.5.3 Finish
4.15.6 Procedures
4.16.1 General
Shop and Field Painting shall be inspected and tested in compliance with
the relevant standards and codes of practice. The tests shall be carried out
randomly and at the sole discretion of the Supervision Consultant.
Clean, to the level of Clause 4.9(Surface Cleanliness), all site welds and
fasteners that are not suitably protected with an accepted protective system.
Paint the weld areas and fasteners with an approved protective system with
similar properties, performance and compatibility with the protective
treatment used on the surrounding surfaces.
Apply extra stripe coats of primer over all edges and corners to seal gaps
between adjacent components such as bolted connections for all steelwork
that will be externally exposed in the finished works.
Propose to the Engineer for acceptance method statement for making good
damaged coatings.
Do not apply where standing water can occur that does not drain away freely.
They are to be dry, free form oil and other contaminants that are likely to
impair adhesion. They are to also be chemically resistant and non-reactive
to the fireproofing materials.
4.18.2 Application
Obtain details from the manufacturer, conditions not fully covered by the
printed recommendations and record in writing any oral recommendations
received.
4.18.3 Equipment
4.18.4 Thickness
Extend full thickness of the material over the entire substrate such that it is
covered in a monolithic blanket of uniform fine texture.
Check the thickness of the sprayed-on material with a single point gauge or
a site thickness indicator.
The average thickness recorded for each the location is not to be less than
that required to achieve the specified fire resistance.
Do not use material that has partially set or caked or lumpy material.
4.18.6 Sealer
Fix metal lath where it is required for the application of the sprayed-on
fireproofing to the parent steel surface, using methods that will not adversely
affect the properties and strength of the steel members in accordance with
agreed proposals.
4.18.8 Application
4.18.8.1 General
(c) Sweep up wet material, which has fallen to the floor and place
in a suitable container marked for legal disposal off the Site.
4.18.9 Patching
5.1 Submission
5.1.3 Material
Submit to the Engineer for acceptance the Product data, certificates and
manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for following
products. Include mill certificates, laboratory test reports and other data to
show compliance with specifications (including specified standards).
(a) Structural steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports
covering chemical and physical properties.
(b) High-strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers.
(c) Include Direct Tension Indicators if used.
(d) Structural steel primer barrier coat and final coat paint.
(e) Shrinkage-resistant grout.
(f) Fire-proof paint
(g) Studs
(a) A site plan showing the work layout area, position and type of cranes,
access routes, datum level, setting-out lines, storage area, etc.
(b) Fabrication procedure/manual, locations (local and/or overseas), list of
subcontractors/suppliers and their scope of works, quality assurance
system, etc.
(c) Storage and handling.
(d) Maximum size of structural steel components that can be delivered to
the site.
(e) Assembly of structural members on the ground level before erection,
where partial or complete fabrication work is required on site.
(f) Sequence and method of erection and assembly of structural members
taking into account the site conditions, site constraints, site restriction
and interface with other trades.
(g) Detailed drawings and calculations for temporary works.
(h) Details of proposed site inspection systems by the Accredited
Inspection Body.
(i) Details of staging, platforms and weather protection where site welding
is to take place.
(j) Remedial procedures for damaged steelwork during fabrication,
transportation, storage, handling and erection.
(k) Safety procedures for handling and erection of steelwork on site.
5.1.5 Proposed Protective Works for Structural Steelworks System and Methods
5.1.7 Programme
Include in the programme, the time required for all procedural trials,
inspection and testing, and trial assemblies.
Submit all reports from the Independent Inspection and Testing Agency to
Engineer periodically as agreed with the Engineer.
Submit as-built drawings to the Engineer for record upon completion of the
Works. Include information on all element type, sizes, position including
deviation exceeding the permitted PD if any, connection and assembly
details, and protective works applied if any.
a) Quality policy
b) Organisation charts and responsibilities
c) Internal quality control and audits
d) Facilities and equipment
e) Calibration and testing of equipment
f) Testing and inspection procedures
g) Subcontractors and suppliers
(a) The fire protection system meets fire rating and performance in
accordance with ASTM E119, ANSI/UL 263, BS 476-8 or BS
476-21.
(b) The fire protection materials contain no asbestos or free
crystalline silica.
(c) There is no flaking, dusting, delaminating or erosion to the fire
protection materials after sealer is applied.
5.1.14 Warranty
Carry out procedural trial and trial assemblies as agreed with the Engineer, including
tests on material and workmanship in accordance with the Specification, prior to
commencement of the Works. Give adequate period of notice as agreed with the
Engineer.
Keep records of all tests and make them available to the Engineer and the
Independent Inspection and Testing Agency for examination throughout the duration
of the Works.
Refer to the Inspection and Test plan for Fabrication and Erection in
Appendix-A for guidance. Submit the ITP for approval if appendix A is
deviated.
Carry out visual inspection over the full lengths of all welds prior to any Non-
Destructive Testing (NDT).
Submit all reports for steel protective works from the Independent Inspection
and Testing Agency to Engineer periodically as agreed with the Engineer.
Record the results of all visual inspections and non-destructive testing and
make all records available for inspection.
5.5.3 Samples
Refer to the contract for the schedule and applicability of tests for the
project.
Select four number tests at each location in an area not exceeding 100m².
For each test location, take a total of nine readings at two positions 300mm
apart and determine the average of the eighteen readings.
5.6.2.1 General
Select one test location per area not exceeding 1000m² but not less
than two test locations per floor.
(a) Beams
Select four number test locations in an area not exceeding
200m². Take a total of nine readings at two positions 300mm
apart and determine the average of the eighteen readings.
Engage an accredited laboratory to carry out salt spray test for the
fireproofing material in accordance with ASTM B117.
SECTION 07100
WATER-RESISTANCE TO CONCRETE STRUCTURES
INDEX TO SPECIFICATION
CLAUSE PAGE
This specification section is the copyright of DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. No reproduction either in part or
in whole in any manner whatsoever is allowed without written permission from DPE Consultants Sdn
Bhd.
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the Particular Specification, and all other contract documents.
This technical specification shall form part of the Contract and the Contractor shall allow for all
obligations, requirements, considerations, etc. to comply with the specification. The Contractor is
also deemed to have visited the site and fully acquainted himself as to the nature and
practicability of the works. No claims will be entertained as a result of his failure to do all of the
above.
The Consulting Civil and Structural Engineer is DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. The Contractor is to
note that when the term ‘Engineer’ in the following Specification means the representative of the
Consulting Engineers.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Engineer is referred to in the following specification,
such term shall be deemed to mean The Architect or Superintending Officer’s Representative (S.
O. Rep.) as defined in the Articles of Agreement or any other person designated in writing by the
Architect or the Superintending Officer (S.O.) from time to time to exercise the power of the
Architect or S.O.
The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Uniform Building By-
Laws of Malaysia, the Malaysian Standards and Codes of Practices, Malaysian Standards
Eurocodes current at the date of tender and to the satisfaction of the local Building Authorities
empowered to control the Works, the Specifications and drawings supplied to the Contractor and
any other instructions issued by the Engineer/Architect or their representative from time to time.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
Any reference in the Specifications to a Malaysian Standard (MS), Eurocodes (EC) or Code of
Practice (CP) shall imply the latest version at the time of tender of the applicable Standards or
Code of Practices. Should there be any discrepancy between these Specifications and the MS,
EC or CP, the more onerous requirement/s shall be adopted. The Engineer has the sole
discretion to modify or upgrade the specifications, drawings and documents to comply fully with
MS Eurocode requirements at no additional cost and time to the Contract.
1.1 Scope
This section covers primarily the requirements of waterproofing for below ground in-
situ concrete structures to exclude portable water. It may be adapted to cover the
concrete element of water retaining structures e.g. tanks and swimming pools. For
waterproofing applied as surface finish to such structures refer to Architectural
specifications.
1.1.1 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the design, supply, proper
installation and performance of an approved waterproofing system to make
the subgrade and earth retaining structures completely watertight. The
Contractor shall produce test certificates to verify that the proposed system
meets the specification and is suitable for the intended use. The Contractor
shall submit his proposal of the proposed waterproofing system at the time
of tender.
1.1.3 All basement, below-grade and earth retaining structures (including lift pits,
water tanks, fuel tanks, etc) shall be protected by the waterproofing system
all round.
1.1.5 The Contractor shall submit the waterproofing system for the basement, all
sub-grade and earth retaining structures at the time of tender.
1.1.7 The materials for construction and workmanship of all structural works
should generally conform to the Specifications, requirements and
recommendations of the design codes, and where applicable, to other
relevant latest European (EN) or Singapore Standards (SS).
1.1.8 If, at any stage during the work, it is discovered that the Contractor failed to
comply with all Specifications, such work, whether completed or in progress,
shall be liable to rejection without any payment.
1.1.9 The layout and design intent of the concrete structures are shown in the
drawings. Based on the design intent, the contractor is responsible to
engage qualified and experienced personnel including a PE (civil) where
appropriate, to carry out the following proposals for the works to Engineer’s
acceptance.
Read this work section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the
other work sections as follows:
1.3 Standards
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, ensure all of the Works comply
with the relevant requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or
referenced in the body of the Specification. Alternative Standards and
Codes may be proposed for approval by the Engineer, provided it can be
demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the
requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Malaysian Standards
Other Standards
In the event that the standards or codes are revised or superseded, refer to
the latest edition or the appropriate substitution for the relevant subjects.
Refer to the following technical for guidance in carrying out the works.
1.4.4 Warranty
Provide a ten (10) year indemnity and warranty for watertightness for the
entire waterproofing system including all components and accessories of
the basements, swimming pool and other below-grade structures (including
lift pits, water holding tanks, fuel tanks, all sunken pits, trenches, etc),
effective from the date of completion of the whole Works. The indemnity
and warranty shall be submitted in the specified format and shall be subject
to the approval and acceptance by the Employer. Should any leak, moist
lines, points or patches occur during the indemnity and warranty period,
carry out the necessary remedial Works immediately to restore the
watertightness of the structure at no cost to the Employer. Make good
damages to all finishes (such as plaster, paint, panelling, tiling, etc),
electrical or other installations, or other property, caused by water leakage
or dampness. Alternatively, reimburse the Employer for making good such
damages.
Carry out a visual mock up of the waterproofing system on all the structural
elements affected for inspection/approval by the Engineer prior to actual
installation of the system on Site.
The Contractor shall bear all costs involved in making the tests.
2.1 General
The contractor is responsible for the design, supply, installation and protection of the
waterproofing membrane system to make the basement structures, all sub-grade and
earth retaining structures absolutely watertight. Produce test certificates to verify that
the membrane meets the Specification and is suitable for the end use intended.
Allow for, if any additional reinforcement to control shrinkage and crack widths in
order to be compatible with the propose waterproofing system.
Include all internal faces of lift pits in contact with the ground and of concrete tanks
holding non-potable water, including the underside of tank roofs.
For portable water tank, ensure non-toxic waterproofing system provided to internal
face of concrete tanks holding potable water for consumption and approved for such
use by the local governmental and/or health authorities. Provide test certificates
issued by an approved and accredited testing authority as proof of non-toxicity and fit
for the intended use.
Should any leaks, moist lines, points and/or damp patches occur during the indemnity
period, the Contractor shall immediately carry out the necessary remedial Works to
restore the watertightness of the structure as required under the indemnity.
The Contractor shall make good, damages to all finishes (such as plaster, paint,
paneling, tiling, etc) electrical or other installations and/or other property, caused by
the water leakage and/or dampness. Alternatively, he shall reimburse the Employer
for making good such damages.
Account for the following design input requirements when carrying out the design
proposals in clause 1.4.1.
2.2.1 Durability
Provide 15 years for the required design life of the waterproofing system.
Grade 3 (Habitable)
Likely usage of Basement Ventilated residential and working areas including
offices, restaurants, leisure centres.
Form of Construction Tanked protection system as above. Drained cavity system to wall
and floor.
Grade 4 (Special)
Likely usage of Basement Archives and stores requiring special controlled environment
Form of Construction Tanked protection system as above. Drained cavity system to wall
and floor, with vapour barrier to inner skin of wall and to cavity floor.
Structurally integral protection with design BS EN 1992-3and a vapour
proof membrane
Target Performance Level Totally dry environment. The humidity levels will be important.
Commentary Comments as for Grade 3. There would be a high risk in using
Integral protection alone.
Ensure that all materials comply with the relevant product standards
as defined in this specification.
3.0 MATERIALS
Ensure that all materials used are compatible and comply with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
If available, Architectural Specifications shall take precedence over Clause 3.2 and
3.3.
3.3.1 The proposed membrane shall comply to German Standards DIN 16729 or
approved equivalent for waterproofing of underground structures subject to
hydrostatic pressure.
3.3.4 The proposed waterproofing membrane shall have high biaxial strength,
elongation and puncture resistance and resistant to most chemicals
including all ground chemicals and be root-impenetrable.
3.3.6.1 Components
8.8
123
3.3.6.3 Primer
3.4.3 The Portland Cement, cement content shall not be less than 350 kg/m3 of
concrete.
3.4.5 The concrete shall contain Cementaid Superplastet or equal high range
water reducer, such that the free water/binder (w/b) ratio shall not exceed
0.45.
3.4.7 Prior to construction, trial mixes are to be conducted under the supervision
of the Engineer or his representatives and with the 3CC-PB manufacturer
present, to confirm that the proposed mix conforms with the strength, w/b
ratio, slump and other requirements.
3.4.8 The concrete shall have a corrected 30-minute water adsorption of not
greater than 1.0%, as measured by BS 1881: Part 122: 1983, except that
the age of the test shall be 7 days.
3.4.9 The trial mix concrete shall further have an average water penetration depth
of not greater than 15 mm as measured by DIN 1049:Part 5: 1991.
3.4.10 The supplier shall satisfy the Architect that any admixture or ingredient other
than cement, aggregate or approved water-reducing admixture, used by the
contractor to comply with the absorption and permeability requirements,
must be shown by an independent authority to have had no reduction in
performance after field exposure for a minimum of 15 years.
3.4.11 All movement and construction joints in the structural members shall be
formed with an approved centrally-placed waterstop of at least 300 mm
width. Location of all construction joints shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval at least 4 weeks prior to the commencement of the works on
site. The Contractor is deemed to have allowed for compliance with this
requirement in his tender.
3.4.12 Any additional reinforcement to control shrinkage and crack widths which
the Contractor deems necessary in order to be compatible with the
waterproofing system he proposes, shall be provided at no extra cost and
time to the Contract.
3.4.13 The maximum size of each slab pour during concreting shall be limited to
100m2 in plan area. For walls, the length of each pour shall be limited to 6m.
3.4.14 All leaking and/or wet cracks and damp surfaces/patches shall be pressure-
grouted with an approved waterproofing compound to the Engineer’s
satisfaction at the Contractor’s own cost and time.
3.4.15 The Contractor shall be responsible for designing the concrete mix to meet
the requirements of the waterproofing system. At least 2 sets of trial mixes
(6 test cubes each) shall be carried out to determine the compressive
3.4.16 The contractor shall submit the provisions he will make (eg pre-formed
grouting holes – to grout the leaking joints, etc) to rectify any leaks,
especially those through the construction joints. It is highlighted that the
construction joints in the slab will become inaccessible once the topping
(non-structural) concrete is placed, including diaphragm wall construction.
3.4.17 The proposed waterproofing system shall be installed in full accordance with
the manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations.
2. Suitability for use in Potable NSF Standard 61 Suitable for use on potable water
water containments containments
AS/NZ 4020.1999
The material used for pile head treatment shall be three component resin grout
comprising of high performance fluid resin system or approved equivalent designed to
encapsulate and ensure water tightness with the following properties:
3.6 Waterstops
Use Hydrophilic waterstops provided with a delay coating that retards the
onset of expansion so as to prevent premature expansion prior to concrete
casting.
Provide a complete system, including hoses, junction boxes, resin, pumps and all
other components required for its installation and use.
3.7.1 Resin
Provide details of the proposed product to the Engineer for agreement prior
to starting work.
3.7.2 Hoses
It is to be approved chemical grout, which will form a continuous, uniform gel. Mix
proportions are to be as recommended by the manufacturer.
The gap of the joints must be sealed for water tightness. Sealants are
classified as elastic, elastoplastic or plastic according to their response to
movement.
3.9.2 Gaskets
Two basic types are acceptable: mastic strips and impregnated or coated
cellular strips, in compliance with relevant Codes and Standards.
Use cellular plastics and rubbers, which comply with relevant Codes &
Standards.
3.9.5 Baffles
Where required, propose proprietary product, organic or inorganic, which modifies the
permeability of the concrete.
Refer to Contract and specification for proprietary product specified for this project if
any.
Propose for Engineer’s acceptance, a type capable of maintaining the water resistance of the
structure.
Ensure during construction that the structure is not subjected to loads that will cause
short-term or long-term distress to the concrete and the waterproofing system.
The membrane material shall be compatible with the surface of concrete and not
impact the design strength. The use of curing compounds, release coatings on
concrete forms, or admixtures in the concrete that interfere with the adhesion of the
barrier material to concrete shall not be permitted.
If curing compound is used, conduct field tests to demonstrate that complete removal
of the compound can be achieved before application of the membrane. Alternatively,
the Contractor may perform field tests to establish the compatibility of the compound
with the membrane materials and the concrete surface.
Do not use release agents such as oil, wax, grease and silicone which transfer to the
concrete surface during placement, and contribute to poor adhesion between
membrane system and concrete. The use of proprietary paint systems applied to
forms and formulated to prevent contamination of the concrete surface, or the use of
polyethylene lined forms, may be considered.
Generally, surfaces shall be dry and must be newly exposed concrete, free of
chemical contaminants and loose, weak or unsound materials.
(a) Plug bug holes over 13mm in length and 6mm deep with concrete and finish
flush with surrounding surfaces.
(b) Form tie rod holes must be filled flush with surrounding surfaces with approved
grouting material.
(c) Grind fins smooth.
(d) Remove scaling to sound, unaffected concrete. Repair exposed area.
(e) Correct irregular construction joints by feathering repair or by grinding. Materials
and methods to be used for repair work must be compatible with membrane
material to be used and approved by manufacturer.
(f) Seal cracks and joints with recommended material and sealant. Use proper
depth-width ratio as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
(g) Surface joints, including walls and substrate shall be 6mm or less. Repair all
joints wider than 6mm with sealer before proceeding with installation.
(h) Remove fins, protrusions or similar irregularities projecting from the concrete
surface by chipping, bush-hammering, needle-gunning, or wire-brushing.
Dry packed with graded aggregate and pressure grouted with approved non-shrink
cementitious mortar for large surface voids and rutted cracks. Submit the method
statement for Engineer’s acceptance prior to work.
Damp the area to be patched and a band at least 150mm wide surrounding to prevent
absorption of water from the patching mortar. After surface water has evaporated
from the area to be patched, use an approved bonding agent well brushed into the
prepared surface. Ensure the premixed patching mortar thoroughly consolidated into
place, struck off so as to leave the patch slightly higher than the surrounding surface
and left undisturbed for at least one hour to allow for some initial shrinkage before
being finally finished. Keep the patched area damp for seven (7) days.
Employ a suitable method of repair to stop any seepage or flow of water into or
through the concrete structure prior to application of the membrane system.
4.4 Storage
Keep all materials clean and dry, avoid damage and use strictly in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
4.5 Protection
No membrane material shall be left permanently exposed for any period of time after
installation.
Control pours sizes to minimise shrinkage and temperature stresses in the concrete
structure. Refer to the requirement of Section 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
CONSTRUCTIONS, clause 2.2.
Do not use methods of fixing formwork which result in holes through the concrete
section when the formwork is removed.
Use a puddle flange or other appropriate sealing detail. Avoid post-formed openings.
a) Store the materials in a dry and temperature controlled area preferably in the
range of +20 to +25°C.
b) Ensure that the surface temperature of the pile head is kept within the
temperature range of +10 to +40°C.
c) Application should be done when the day time atmospheric temperatures are
considerably low.
d) The equipments for mixing such as the paddle mixer, mixing bowl should be kept
cool so that they do not impact additional temperature to the material when it is
being mixed.
e) Clean the top surface of the pile head of any loosely adhering particles or dust.
f) Cut a uniform groove all around the base of the reinforcement. When the grout is
poured it will fill the groove and seal that particular area which are the weak
points for water penetration.
g) Place a clean mould around the pile head, treated with sufficient height to
accommodate specified layer of grout on top of pile head.
h) Mix resin grout as per manufacturer instruction and pour the mixed grout onto the
mould from one end in one continuous pour to a thickness shown on the
drawing.
i) Leave for curing. The grout will achieve its full cure after 7 days.
4.12 Inspection
Carry out jointly with the Engineer before backfilling or covering up to identify defects
which may lead to water penetration. Carry out further joint inspection to identify any
water penetration after backfilling and when any ground water has returned to normal
level.
4.13 Repairs
Where concrete shows signs of leakage or damp patches, submit proposals, including
details of proposed materials and methods of application, for rectification to the
Engineer. Comply with BS8102 Clause 8.8 and 8.9.
Ensure that all repair materials are compatible with materials used in the original
construction.
4.14 Waterstops
Use waterstops in all construction and movement joints in concrete specified as water
resistant unless otherwise noted and agreed with the Engineer. Use an approved
Submit all location of the construction joints to the Engineer for approval at least four
(4) weeks prior to the commencement of the Works on Site.
Obtain the agreement of the Engineer for the methods to be used to maintain the
waterstops in position and to avoid damage during concreting and formwork removal.
Allow for compliance of the joints preparation, treatment and waterstops for all
construction and movement joints in concrete specified as water resistant with this
requirement in the contract.
Allow the waterproofing membrane for anchoring to the underside of the basement
slab and therefore ensuring the waterproofing integrity is independent of the substrate
integrity. Ensure terminates at the top of vertical walls at least 300mm minimum
above ground level, pile caps, etc.
For horizontal areas, protect the waterproofing membrane with a minimum 25mm
thick 1:3 cement and sand screed render prior to the commencement of further
construction activities.
For vertical surfaces, cover the waterproofing membrane with the approved protection
material prior to backfilling.
4.15.1 Finishes
4.15.2 Application
Lay the material across a change in the plane of the concrete surface
provided it is sufficiently pliable to enable the adhesive to remain in contact
with the primed concrete. Where this cannot be achieved, provide
preformed angles or other fixtures as required and bond to the concrete
surface.
4.15.4 Protection
4.15.5 Continuity
Apply to concrete which is 28 days old and with moisture content less than 5% prior to
application, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.
Allow the waterproofing membrane for overlapping to the underside of the basement
slab and therefore ensuring the waterproofing integrity is independent of the substrate
integrity. Ensure terminates at the top of vertical walls at least 300mm minimum
above ground level, pile caps, etc.
For horizontal areas, protect the waterproofing membrane with a minimum 25mm
thick 1:3 cement and sand screed render prior to the commencement of further
construction activities.
For vertical surfaces, cover the waterproofing membrane with the approved protection
material prior to backfilling.
4.16.1 Temperature
The Waterproof Concrete shall be used to the full thickness of structural elements
(beams, slab and walls) of all Concrete Water Tanks and bases of lift pits
Carry out at least two (2) sets of trial mixes (of six test cubes for each set) to
determine the compressive strength of the concrete at both 7 days (4 cubes) and 28
days (8 cubes). Other tests (2 sets each) carried out on the trial mixes shall include
slump, absorption, water permeability and any other tests specified by the
waterproofing system manufacturer.
All test results shall be approved by the Engineer in writing prior to proceeding with
the works.
Allow for two pressure penetration tests on a concrete sample t be carried out under a
hydrostatic head of at least 20 m.
b) On completion make good holes with a damp 1:3 cement: sharp sand mix
thoroughly rammed in and finished neat and flush.
Where the movement of soil substrate is likely to occur, the waterproofing specialist in
association with the Contractor shall take appropriate measures to ensure the
integrity of the waterproofing system is not compromised.
Unless otherwise shown in the drawings, provision shall be made for at least one
number of 300mm wide centrally-placed water stop to be placed across all movement
and construction joints formed in the structural elements.
All construction joints and cast-in projection for wall and slab shall be treated with one
coat of approved waterproofing coating slurry, in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instruction, in between concrete pour.
Prepare the joints and apply the sealants, back-up materials, bond breakers
and joint fillers in accordance with relevant Codes and Standards
4.19.2 Gaskets
Use compatible flashing materials with those used in the waterproofing system.
Compatibility as specify the membrane manufacturer. The flashing material used shall
be of approved and durable type, and shall be resistant to weathering and mechanical
damage and compatible with all other material employed in the membrane system.
Provide flashing at the line or joint where the membrane will terminate, particularly at
the basement walls and pile foundations.
The surface of adjoining building elements that are used to form the terminus of the
waterproofing membrane shall meet the same requirements as the surfaces that
receive the barrier.
A treated timber nailer or equivalent device shall be used to mechanically secure the
top edge of the flashing material according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
Reglets shall not be used as a substitute for a nailing strip or device.
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Tender
Before starting work provide written confirmation to the Engineer from the
supplier of the waterproofing system that the proposed concrete mix,
Submit product date, shop drawings and method statement for approval for
pilehead treatment to ensure water tightness.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval of the comprehensive
shop drawings showing all the details and procedures for the relevant parts
of the Works. In the programme for the production and review of shop
drawings, at least 4 weeks shall be allowed for review by the Engineer for
each submission. Delays caused by the late submission of shop drawings or
repeated amendments to drawings due to inadequate or inaccurate
drawings shall not entitle the Contractor to any additional cost or time
claims.
5.1.7 Details
Allow for the cost of carrying out ponding test on the balancing tank and
backwash tank in the contract. The ponding tests shall be carried out prior
to the application of the waterproofing system and finishes. The pools and
tanks shall be filled up with water to the design level and maintain for a
minimum duration of 72 hours during the test. Rectify all water
seepage/leakage noted during and after the tests to the Engineer’s
satisfaction.
Where required by the Engineer, carry out water testing to check the
performance of horizontal membrane applications. Flood the area to be
tested with at least 25mm of water. Plug and kerb up the drains (temporary
or permanent) to retain the water for a period of at least 72 hours.
Where water testing is not possible because of job conditions, location, etc,
carry out a thorough inspection to check all laps, terminations and flashings
for any evidence of 'fish mouths', incomplete adhesion or other conditions
that may be detrimental to the watertight integrity of the membrane.
5.1.11 Warranty
Prepare and submit a quality control plan for Engineer’s acceptance prior to
commencing. Submit all quality control records periodically during the
course of construction.
During construction, carry out two (2) absorption samples at the same time
as samples for compressive strength testing.
Cores will be taken from the structure under the supervision of the
Engineer. Should these core samples fail to comply with the
specification, the requirements of Clause 5.1.12.2 will apply.
Submit samples of the proposed system and materials for Engineer’s acceptance
prior to ordering of the material. Identify and label all samples appropriately.
If there is any leakage, dampness and presence of seepage water resulting from
hydrostatic pressure or capillary action on the surfaces of the structural elements that
are visible, submit proposals for rectification for acceptance and carry out the
rectification.
The rectification works shall achieve the same design life and performance as the
waterproofing system specified.
5.4.1 Watertightness test of all below-grade structures shall be carried out in full
compliance with MS EN 1992-3, all at the Contractor’s expense within the
contract period. Any leaks found shall be rectified in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations, at the Contractor’s expense and re-
tested to the Engineer’s satisfaction.
5.4.2 Watertightness test shall be carried out for all water tanks by filling with
water up to the design level.
5.4.3 Where required by the Engineer, water testing shall be carried out to check
the performance of the waterproofing system. The area to be tested shall be
flooded with at least 25mm of water. Drains shall be plugged and kerbings
(temporary or permanent) shall be formed to retain the water for a period of
at least 24 hours. Any leaks found during this period shall be repaired in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the area shall
then be retested. Before repairing the surfaces, they shall be dry.
5.4.4 Where it is impractical to water test an area because the slope of the
substrate would produce excessive water depths, the waterproofing system
shall be tested by allowing water to run continuously over the area for a
period of at least 8 hours. During the 8-hour period, the whole area shall be
kept completely immersed.
5.4.5 The Contractor shall allow for the cost of carrying out ponding test on the
water features pool, balancing tank and backwash tank in this tender. The
ponding tests shall be carried out prior to the application of the finishes. The
pools and tanks shall be filled up with water to the design level and maintain
for a minimum duration of 72 hours during the test. All water
seepage/leakage noted during and after the tests shall be rectified at the
Contractor’s own cost to the Engineer’s satisfaction. The pools and tanks
shall be further tested for watertightness by repeating the above procedure
upon completion of application of finishes. All water seepage/leakage
observed shall be rectified at the Contractor’s own cost and retested for
watertightness to the Engineer’s satisfaction.
SECTION 07900
DESIGNED JOINTS
INDEX TO SPECIFICATION
CLAUSE PAGE
This specification section is the copyright of DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. No reproduction either in part or
in whole in any manner whatsoever is allowed without written permission from DPE Consultants Sdn
Bhd.
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the Particular Specification, and all other contract documents.
This technical specification shall form part of the Contract and the Contractor shall allow for all
obligations, requirements, considerations, etc. to comply with the specification. The Contractor is
also deemed to have visited the site and fully acquainted himself as to the nature and
practicability of the works. No claims will be entertained as a result of his failure to do all of the
above.
The Consulting Civil and Structural Engineer is DPE Consultants Sdn Bhd. The Contractor is to
note that when the term ‘Engineer’ in the following Specification means the representative of the
Consulting Engineer.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Engineer is referred to in the following specification,
such term shall be deemed to mean The Architect or Superintending Officer’s Representative (S.
O. Rep.) as defined in the Articles of Agreement or any other person designated in writing by the
Architect or the Superintending Officer (S.O.) from time to time to exercise the power of the
Architect or S.O.
The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Uniform Building By-
Laws of Malaysia, the Malaysian Standards and Codes of Practices, Malaysian Standards
Eurocodes current at the date of tender and to the satisfaction of the local Building Authorities
empowered to control the Works, the Specifications and drawings supplied to the Contractor and
any other instructions issued by the Engineer/Architect or their representative from time to time.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
The Contractor is to note that when the term Client is referred to in the Specifications, such term
shall be deemed to mean the Employer/Developer unless the context otherwise requires.
Any reference in the Specifications to a Malaysian Standard (MS), Eurocodes (EC) or Code of
Practice (CP) shall imply the latest version at the time of tender of the applicable Standards or
Code of Practices. Should there be any discrepancy between these Specifications and the MS,
EC or CP, the more onerous requirement/s shall be adopted. The Engineer has the sole
discretion to modify or upgrade the specifications, drawings and documents to comply fully with
MS Eurocode requirements at no additional cost and time to the Contract.
1.1 Scope
This section covers general requirements for designed settlement and expansion
joints, and bearing joints in concrete structures. It also covers crack induced
construction joints. For general requirements of normal construction joints refer to
CAST IN-PLACE CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION.
Read this work section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the other work
sections as follows:
1.3 Standards
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, ensure all of the Works comply
with the relevant requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or
referenced in the body of the Specification. Alternative Standards and
Codes may be proposed for approval by the Engineer, provided it can be
demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the
requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Malaysian Standards
British Standards
In the event that the standards or codes are revised or superseded, refer to
the latest edition or the appropriate substitution for the relevant subjects.
Refer to the following technical for guidance in carrying out the works.
The type of designed joints and locations are indicated in the drawings.
Engage qualified and experienced personnel to propose the following for
Engineer’s acceptance:
1.4.3 Warranty
Submit construction joints plan and method statement of the joint preparation
before and after concreting, and before joining to fresh concrete of next
casting.
The Contractor shall bear all costs involved in making the tests.
When carrying out the proposals as set out in clause 1.4.1, take account of the
following requirements and provide manufacturer’s data to confirm suitability.
2.1.2 Durability
Where used in this Contract, all designed joints and bearings shall be
warranted against all defects and any malfunctioning for a minimum period
of ten (10) years from the date of Completion of the whole of the Works and
all defects occurring during this period shall be made good by the
Contractor. The Warranty shall be provided jointly and severally by the
When a proprietary product is specified, verify and submit evidence that the
product will satisfy the performance requirements as above. In case that the
desired performance of the selected product cannot be verified, notify the
Engineer and propose alternative product for acceptance.
The specialist/ manufacturer shall carry out the detailed design of the
bearings. The bearings shall be designed for the loads and movements
specified in the Drawings. The design shall meet the technical and testing
requirements of this Specification and the Drawings.
For all construction methods, the bearings and their support structure shall
be detailed to prevent damage of the concrete cover.
Provisions shall be made in the design for the removal and replacement of
the bearings, including all their fixings. All bearings shall be designed with
suitable handling attachments to the bearings to facilitate the removal and
replacement process.
All bearings shall be of a proven design. Untried material and design will not
be accepted.
3.0 MATERIALS
Refer to contract and drawing for selected proprietary products for the project if any.
Submit the material specification for acceptance.
3.2.1 Waterstops
3.2.3 Primer
Refer to contract specification and drawing for the type of sliding dowel
system selected for the project if any. Submit the material specification for
acceptance.
To be grade 250, clean and free from loose mill scale, loose rust, oil and
other deleterious substances.
To SS 561, clean and free from loose mill scale, loose rust, oil and other
deleterious substances.
3.3.4.1 Debonding
3.3.4.2 Cap
Refer to contract specification and drawing for the product selected for the project if
any. Submit the material specification for acceptance.
Refer to contract specification and drawing for the product selected for the
project if any. Submit the material specification for acceptance.
Refer to contract specification and drawing for the product selected for the
project if any. Submit the material specification for acceptance.
Refer to contract specification and drawing for the required dimension of the
grooves if any. Submit the material specification for acceptance.
3.6 Bearings
3.6.1.1 General
Where bearings are provided with side guides, they shall be aligned
in the direction of movement as required in the design.
PTFE filled with 25% glass fibres by weight shall be used to for the
vertical sliding surfaces to each rocker plate in contact with the side
guides. The vertical sliding surfaces of the side guides shall be of
stainless steel.
3.6.2.1 General
The thickness of outer and inner plates shall not be less than 3 mm
and 1.5 mm respectively. No welding operation shall be carried out
on an elastomeric bearing.
Dowel bars or shear pins shall not be used as restraints for fixed
and guided sliding bearings. Alternative means of restraints (e.g.
concrete restraint blocks) that can be easily inspected, maintained
and replaced shall be adopted.
4.1.1 General
otherwise specified the separating material for vertical joints shall be 10mm
foamed polystyrene sheet.
All exposed face of such joints shall be sealed by approved 10mm x 10mm
polysulphide sealant all round. Similarly such joints shall be protected by a
layer of volclay or approved equivalent all round the joint along the mid depth
of the joint. Such material shall be secured to already cast concrete member.
4.1.2 Accuracy
Position and form joints accurately, straight, well-aligned and truly vertical or
horizontal or parallel with setting out lines of the building. Construct the joint
within an acceptable tolerance of 2mm unless otherwise specified.
4.1.4 Modifications
Propose suitable joint location and detail for Engineer’s acceptance. Take note of any
desired location that may be indicated in the drawings.
4.3.1 Sealants
Insert temporary strips into the fully compacted concrete. Compact and level the slab
along the strips. Remove strips.
If the type of aggregate so permits, saw grooves in the top surface of the slab
sufficiently early (within 24 hours of casting slab) to prevent random cracking.
Fully compact and level the concrete, insert steel T bar and withdraw to
form void.
Carefully insert strip to accurate line and level, then re-compact and re-level
slab.
4.7 Bearings
All bearings shall be suitably marked to identify their types and locations.
4.7.2.1 Marking
4.7.2.2 Delivery
4.7.2.3 Storage
4.7.3.1 General
Tolerance
Description Tolerance
(a) Variation from true level Simply-supported structures:
± 3 mm
Continuous structures:
0.0001 times the sum of the adjacent
spans but not exceeding ± 5mm
(b) Tilt of top and base plates 1 in 500
(c) Centrelines of the bearing to their ± 3mm
correct position
(d) Orientation on plan 1 in1000 (to required direction)
After the bearings have been installed, the Contractor shall take all
protection measures necessary to ensure that the bearings remain free from
damage.
Upon completion, the Contractor shall submit as-built drawings for all the
bearings installed. The as-built drawings shall include information on the
schedule of bearings. The final recorded movements shall be based upon
completion of the structure (not project).
5.1 Submission
5.1.2.1 Materials
5.1.2.2 Sequence
5.1.2.3 Methods
5.1.5 Warranty
Submit the warranty for Engineer acceptance upon completion of the works.
Submit samples of all joint system and materials for Engineer’s acceptance prior to
ordering of the material. Identify and label the samples appropriately.
5.3 Tests
5.3.1 Watertightness
For joints specified as watertight, test all joints after installation with a
spraying hose for watertightness.
5.3.3.1 General
All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer. The
Engineer shall be given at least 7 and 14 calendar days’ notice for
tests carried out locally and overseas respectively. The notice
period shall exclude any time required for travel visa application and
approval.
However, if there are less than 6 bearings of one type, all bearings
of that type shall be load tested. Each bearing code number given in
the Drawings shall be considered as a bearing type.
Should any bearing fail the routine tests, or the Contractor propose
modifications to the already accepted bearing details, additional
bearing tests shall be performed to demonstrate compliance with
the requirements. The type and number of additional tests shall be
subject to the Engineer’s acceptance.
The bearing shall be tested to 0.9 times the ULS lateral load shown
on the Drawings while loaded in compression to 10% of the
maximum vertical load shown on the Drawings.
The bearing shall be tested in rotation to the value for rotation given
in the Drawings whilst being loaded in compression to the maximum
vertical SLS load shown on the Drawings.
The bearing will be rejected, if, following the tests for load or
rotation, it exhibits any signs of failure such as:
5.3.4.1 General
The first test shall allow for at least 6 persons representing the SO
or Employer. Subsequent routine test shall allow for 2 persons.